Sony Switch 8000Sf Users Manual MVS 8000/8000SF System
MVS-8000_CCP8000 V7.20 Volume 1 MVS-8000_CCP8000 V7.20 Volume 1
MVS8000 to the manual 2d50f0db-1fb0-49c7-882a-92ef3c362be8
2015-01-23
: Sony Sony-Sony-Switch-8000Sf-Users-Manual-298401 sony-sony-switch-8000sf-users-manual-298401 sony pdf
Open the PDF directly: View PDF 
.
Page Count: 591
| Download | |
| Open PDF In Browser | View PDF |
Multi Format Switcher System MVS-8000/8000SF System (With CCP-8000 Series) Multi Format Switcher System MVS-8000/8000SF System (With CCP-8000 Series Center Control Panel) User’s Guide User’s Guide Volume 1 2nd Edition (Revised 1) [ English ] Volume 1 2nd Edition (Revised 1) 3-206-016-12 (1) [English] MVS-8000/8000SF System (With CCP-8000 Series Center Control Panel) User’s Guide Multi Format Switcher System Volume 1 [English] 2nd Edition (Revised 1) Software Version 7.20 and Later NOTICE TO USERS © 2001 Sony Corporation. All rights reserved. This manual or the software described herein, in whole or in part, may not be reproduced, translated or reduced to any machine readable form without prior written approval from Sony Corporation. SONY CORPORATION PROVIDES NO WARRANTY WITH REGARD TO THIS MANUAL, THE SOFTWARE OR OTHER INFORMATION CONTAINED HEREIN AND HEREBY EXPRESSLY DISCLAIMS ANY IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR ANY PARTICULAR PURPOSE WITH REGARD TO THIS MANUAL, THE SOFTWARE OR SUCH OTHER INFORMATION. IN NO EVENT SHALL SONY CORPORATION BE LIABLE FOR ANY INCIDENTAL, CONSEQUENTIAL OR SPECIAL DAMAGES, WHETHER BASED ON TORT, CONTRACT, OR OTHERWISE, ARISING OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH THIS MANUAL, THE SOFTWARE OR OTHER INFORMATION CONTAINED HEREIN OR THE USE THEREOF. Sony Corporation reserves the right to make any modification to this manual or the information contained herein at any time without notice. The software described herein may also be governed by the terms of a separate user license agreement. Functions Newly Supported in Version 7.20 The functions newly supported in the MVS-8000 system version 7.20 are as follows. Functions relating to switcher processor Classification Functions supported Menu No. See page Vol. 1 Vol. 2 System 1080P/59.94 and 1080P/50 formats and dual link support a) 7313 245 - Transition Preset color mix with an image selected on the utility 2 bus in place of a color matte b) 1171 342 - Key Fixing key fill and key source in key drop off mode (frame delay mode) c) 1112.4 55, 393 - Frame memory Clip transition b) 1176.1 42, 93 - Recording and playback of ancillary data b) 2525, 7316.8 92 314 Recording and recalling of extended clip d) 2521, 2522, 2523 87 - DME Applying DME effects to a maximum of three keys on the SDI interface in combination with a dedicated interface b) 7337.7 - 423 Files • File operations of extended clips d) • Converting between frame memory clips and extended clips d) • Importing extended clips d) 7151, 7151.1, 7162 205 468, 476, 482 Creating and editing macro timelines 5441, 5441.1 Macros Color corrector 216 546 Macro take operation using a GPI input 7325.1, 7352 - 369, 436 Setting a macro attachment without changing cross-points 7326.6 - 381, 530 Recalling frame memory clips - 212 - Recording with external devices - 212 - Changing the registers for saving macros 7142.3 - 502 All the internal signals of the switcher can be selected for color correction c) 7335 - 410 3 Classification Functions supported Multi program 2 Re-entry between the main and sub sides of the same M/E bank b) Menu No. Vol. 1 Vol. 2 240 - 239 - 7431 - 567 Menu No. See page 7331 When recalling snapshot, keys on main or sub side can be recalled independently. b) Diagnosis Displaying communication status b) See page a) For MVS-8000G only b) For other than MVS-8000 c) For MVS-8000G/8000GSF only d) For MVS-8000A or MVS-8000G only Functions relating to operability Classification Functions supported Vol. 1 Vol. 2 Inhibiting cross-point button operations 7321.12, 7324 31 334 Distinguishable color of the shifted 7322.x1 button numbers in the Xpt Assign menu - 346 External devices Making the USB primary setting automatic - 316 Macros Holding down [PRE MCRO] and [POST MCRO] buttons together makes it possible to set a macro attachment in macro only mode 218, 259 531 Files 40 or more directories can be created 71xx - 485 Snapshot Wipe and DME wipe snapshot operations with menu 1157, 1167 182 - Menu No. See page Control panel 7317 Functions relating to external devices Classification 4 Functions supported Vol. 1 Vol. 2 Audio mixer Selection of signals linked with the audio mixer 7322, 7322.11 33, 342 350 GPI output Addition of “Device Recording” to the actions triggered by control panel or DCU GPI output 7325.3, 7354 - 370, 439 Table of Contents Functions Newly Supported in Version 7.20 ..........................................3 Chapter 1 MVS-8000 Functions Introduction ..................................................................................................19 Features of the MVS-8000 Multi Format Switcher System......................22 Video Processing Flow .................................................................................24 Signal Selection .............................................................................................25 Basics of Signal Selection .....................................................................26 Bus Selection .........................................................................................26 Signal Assignment and Selection ..........................................................29 Signal Name Display.............................................................................33 Transitions.....................................................................................................34 Selecting the Next Transition ................................................................34 Independent Key Transitions.................................................................37 Transition Types....................................................................................41 Executing a Transition...........................................................................44 Keys................................................................................................................48 Key Types..............................................................................................48 Key Modifiers........................................................................................52 Key Memory..........................................................................................56 Key Snapshots .......................................................................................57 Blink ......................................................................................................57 Key Default ...........................................................................................57 Key Modify Clear..................................................................................58 Resizer ...................................................................................................58 Wipes .............................................................................................................60 Types of Wipe Pattern ...........................................................................60 Pattern Mix ............................................................................................61 Wipe Pattern Variation and Modifiers ..................................................63 Wipe Snapshots .....................................................................................71 Wipe Modify Clear................................................................................71 DME Wipes ...................................................................................................72 Types of DME Wipe Pattern .................................................................72 DME Wipe Pattern Variation and Modifiers.........................................80 Relation Between DME Wipes and Other Effects ................................81 Table of Contents 5 DME Wipe Snapshots ...........................................................................82 DME Wipe Modify Clear......................................................................83 Resizer DME wipes...............................................................................83 Frame Memory .............................................................................................85 Overview ...............................................................................................85 Still Image File Functions .....................................................................89 Frame Memory Clip Function ...............................................................92 Image Data Management.......................................................................94 Image Data Transfer ..............................................................................94 External Hard Disk Drive Access..........................................................96 Color Backgrounds.......................................................................................97 Copy and Swap .............................................................................................98 Side Flags.....................................................................................................102 Overview .............................................................................................102 Side Flag Settings ................................................................................102 Wipe Action on Images With Side Flags ............................................103 DME Wipe Action for an Image With Side Flags ..............................104 Video Process ..............................................................................................107 Video Process Adjustments of a Primary Input Signal .......................107 Video Process Adjustments on a Particular Bus .................................107 Video Process Memory .......................................................................108 Digital Multi Effects (DME) ......................................................................109 Three-Dimensional Transformations...................................................110 Transformation Operation Modes .......................................................116 Graphics Display .................................................................................120 Three-Dimensional Parameter Display ...............................................122 DME Special Effects ...........................................................................122 Interpolation ........................................................................................151 Key Density Adjustment .....................................................................152 Key Source Selection ..........................................................................152 Global Effects......................................................................................152 External Devices .........................................................................................158 Shared Functions for External Device Control ...................................158 Control of P-Bus Devices....................................................................159 Control of GPI Devices .......................................................................160 VTR/Disk Recorder/Extended VTR Control ......................................161 Regions and Registers ................................................................................165 Regions ................................................................................................165 Registers ..............................................................................................166 6 Table of Contents Keyframes ...................................................................................................168 Effects..................................................................................................168 Saving and Recalling Effects ..............................................................169 Effect Attributes ..................................................................................169 Effect Editing ......................................................................................169 Time Settings.......................................................................................171 Paths ....................................................................................................174 Effect Execution ..................................................................................180 Master Timelines .................................................................................181 Snapshots.....................................................................................................182 Snapshot Types....................................................................................182 Snapshot Attributes .............................................................................183 Utility ...........................................................................................................185 Shotbox ........................................................................................................186 Setup ............................................................................................................187 Overview of Setup...............................................................................187 System Setup .......................................................................................187 Saving and Recalling Setup Data ........................................................194 Panel Setup ..........................................................................................195 Switcher Setup.....................................................................................198 DME Setup ..........................................................................................202 Setup Relating to DCU Input/Output ..................................................202 Setup Relating to the Router Interface and Tally Interface.................203 Simple Connection to MKS-8080/8082 AUX Bus Remote Panel (Option) ....................................................................................204 Files ..............................................................................................................205 Macros .........................................................................................................210 Overview .............................................................................................210 Macro Creation and Editing ................................................................212 Macro Execution .................................................................................215 Macro Timeline ...................................................................................216 Macro Editing Using Menus ...............................................................218 Macro Attachment ...............................................................................218 Menu Macros.......................................................................................222 Color Corrector ..........................................................................................223 Simple P/P Software ...................................................................................227 Overview .............................................................................................227 Restrictions on Use..............................................................................227 Multi Program 2 .........................................................................................230 Table of Contents 7 Overview .............................................................................................230 Sequence of Operations in Multi Program 2 .......................................232 Basic Operations (Required) ...............................................................232 Examples of Operations in the Multi Program 2 Mode (When Sharing a Switcher Bank).........................................................................237 Optional Operations ............................................................................237 Functions Added in Multi Program 2 Mode .......................................241 Differences Between Multi Program 2 Mode and Standard Mode .....242 Restrictions on Using Multi Program 2 Mode ....................................243 Dual Link Support......................................................................................245 Chapter 2 Menus and Control Panel Names and Functions of Parts of the Control Panel ...............................251 Control Panel: Example Configuration 1 (With Standard Transition Modules) .......................................251 Control Panel: Example Configuration 2 (With Simple Transition Modules) ..........................................252 Control Panel: Example Configuration 3 (With Compact Transition Modules) .......................................255 Cross-Point Control Block ..................................................................256 Transition Control Block (Standard Type)..........................................260 Flexi Pad Control Block (Standard Type) ...........................................264 Key Control Block...............................................................................267 Device Control Block (Trackball) .......................................................271 Device Control Block (Joystick) .........................................................277 Device Control Block (Search Dial)....................................................278 Keyframe Control Block .....................................................................281 Numeric Keypad Control Block..........................................................284 Fade to Black Control Block ...............................................................287 Auxiliary Bus Control Block (for AUX Buses) ..................................288 Auxiliary Bus Control Block (for Router Control) .............................291 Menu Control Block ............................................................................294 Memory Card/USB Adaptor Block .....................................................295 “Memory Stick”/USB Connections Block ..........................................296 Utility/Shotbox Control Block ............................................................298 Transition Control Block and Flexi Pad Control Block (Simple Type).... 299 Independent Key Transition Control Block (Simple Type) ................304 Downstream Key Control Block .........................................................306 8 Table of Contents Downstream Key/Fade-to-Black Control Block .................................308 Transition Control Block (Compact Type) .........................................310 Basic Menu Operations ..............................................................................313 Menu Organization..............................................................................313 About the Top Menu List ....................................................................313 Accessing Menus.................................................................................314 Displaying a Menu ..............................................................................321 Interpreting the Menu Screen ..............................................................322 Menu Operations .................................................................................323 Switching Between the Main Menu Site and Subsidiary Menu Site ..335 Shortcut Menu .....................................................................................335 Chapter 3 Transitions Basic Operating Procedure........................................................................340 Key Priority Setting....................................................................................343 Setting the Key Priority in the Transition Control Block....................343 Setting the Key Priority by a Menu Operation....................................345 Display of the Key Output Status and Key Priority ............................346 Selecting the Transition Type by a Menu Operation ..............................348 Super Mix Settings .....................................................................................349 Color Matte Settings...................................................................................350 Executing a Transition ...............................................................................351 Transition Indicator Function ..............................................................351 Setting the Transition Rate ..................................................................352 Pattern Limit........................................................................................355 Executing an Auto Transition..............................................................359 Executing a Transition With the Fader Lever (Manual Transition) ....359 Combinations of Auto and Manual Transitions ..................................360 Non-Sync State....................................................................................360 Fader Lever Operation in Bus Fixed Mode.........................................361 Transition Preview .....................................................................................363 Independent Key Transitions ....................................................................364 Basic Independent Key Transition Operations....................................364 Setting the Independent Key Transition Type by a Menu Operation..365 Setting the Independent Key Transition Rate......................................366 Fade to Black...............................................................................................369 Fade to Black Operation......................................................................369 Setting the Fade to Black Transition Rate...........................................369 Simple Transition .......................................................................................371 Table of Contents 9 Basic Operations for Simple Transitions.............................................371 Display of the Key Output Status and Key Priority ............................373 Split Fader ...........................................................................................373 Independent Key Transitions With a Simple Transition Module........374 Chapter 4 Keys Key Setting Operations Using Menus.......................................................378 Key Setting Menus ..............................................................................378 Key Type Setting.................................................................................379 Chroma Key Composition...................................................................381 Chroma Key Adjustments ...................................................................382 Selecting Key Fill and Key Source .....................................................387 Key Edge Modifications......................................................................390 Masks...................................................................................................397 Applying a DME Effect to a Key ........................................................400 Specifying the Key Output Destination...............................................403 Key Modify Clear................................................................................404 Blink Function .....................................................................................404 Video Processing .................................................................................405 Key Setting Operations With the Key Control Block .............................406 Operations in the Key Control Block ..................................................406 Key Edge Modifications......................................................................410 Masks...................................................................................................414 Applying a DME Effect to a Key ........................................................415 Other Key Setting Operations .............................................................417 Resizer .........................................................................................................419 Two-Dimensional Transformations of Keys .......................................419 Resizer Interpolation Settings .............................................................424 Resizer Crop/Border Settings ..............................................................424 Applying Resizer Effects.....................................................................427 Key Snapshots.............................................................................................433 Key Snapshot Operations ....................................................................433 Key Snapshot Operations Using a Simple Transition Module............435 Chapter 5 Wipes Basic Procedure for Wipe Settings ...........................................................438 Wipe Settings Menu ............................................................................438 Wipe Pattern Selection ........................................................................438 Pattern Mix ..........................................................................................441 10 Table of Contents Setting Wipe Modifiers .......................................................................443 Wipe Modify Clear..............................................................................454 Wipe Settings for Independent Key Transitions .....................................455 Basic Procedure for Independent Key Transition Wipe Settings........455 Setting Independent Key Transition Wipe Modifiers .........................456 Wipe Snapshots...........................................................................................460 Wipe Snapshot Operations With the Flexi Pad ...................................460 Wipe Snapshot Operations With the Menus .......................................463 Chapter 6 DME Wipes Basic Procedure for DME Wipe Settings .................................................466 DME Wipe Settings Menu ..................................................................466 DME Wipe Pattern Selection ..............................................................466 Setting DME Wipe Modifiers .............................................................469 DME Wipe Modify Clear....................................................................476 DME Wipe Settings for Independent Key Transitions ...........................477 Basic Procedure for Independent Key Transition DME Wipe Settings .... 477 Setting Independent Key Transition DME Wipe Modifiers................478 Resizer DME Wipe Setting ........................................................................481 DME Wipe Snapshots ................................................................................482 DME Wipe Snapshot Operations With the Flexi Pad .........................482 DME Snapshot Operations With the Menus .......................................482 Creating User Programmable DME Patterns .........................................483 User Programmable DME Transition Mode .......................................483 Chapter 7 Frame Memory Still Image Operations ...............................................................................490 Preparations .........................................................................................490 Interpreting the Frame Memory Menu ................................................490 Selecting an Input Image .....................................................................494 Selecting Outputs and Target Frame Memory ....................................495 Capturing an Input Image (Freeze)......................................................496 Recalling Still Images .........................................................................500 Inverting the Field Polarity of a Saved Still Image (Field Invert Function) 501 Image Processing.................................................................................502 Image Output .......................................................................................507 Continuously Capturing Still Images (Record) ...................................508 Table of Contents 11 Recalling a Continuous Sequence of Still Images (Animation)..........509 Frame Memory Clip Operations...............................................................512 Preparations for Operation ..................................................................512 Recalling Clips ....................................................................................512 Clip Playback ......................................................................................514 Clip Creation .......................................................................................518 Creating and Handling Frame Memory Folders..................................520 Clip Output ..........................................................................................521 Recording and Playback of Ancillary Data .........................................522 Clip Transition Operations........................................................................524 Image Data Management...........................................................................527 Pair File Processing .............................................................................527 Moving Files........................................................................................528 Deleting Files ......................................................................................529 Renaming Files....................................................................................530 File Backups ........................................................................................531 Restoring Files.....................................................................................531 External Hard Disk Drive Access .............................................................532 Hard Disk Formatting..........................................................................533 Saving Files .........................................................................................533 Recalling Files .....................................................................................535 Chapter 8 Color Backgrounds Color Background Setting Operations .....................................................538 Color Background Settings Menu .......................................................538 Basic Color Background Setting Operations.......................................538 Chapter 9 Copy and Swap Basic Copy and Swap Operations .............................................................544 Copy and Swap Menu Operations.......................................................544 Copy by Button Operation ..................................................................545 Chapter 10 Misc Menu, Etc. Misc Menu Operations...............................................................................548 Port Settings for Control From an External Device ............................548 Editing Keyboard Settings...................................................................549 Side Flag Settings ................................................................................550 Safe Title Settings ...............................................................................552 Displaying a List of Transition Rates and Changing the Settings.......553 12 Table of Contents AUX Menu Operations ..............................................................................555 AUX Bus Settings ...............................................................................555 Status Menu ................................................................................................556 Video Process Settings................................................................................557 Appendix (Volume 1) Wipe Pattern List .......................................................................................560 Standard Wipes....................................................................................560 Enhanced Wipes ..................................................................................561 Rotary Wipes .......................................................................................562 Mosaic Wipes ......................................................................................563 Random/Diamond Dust Wipes............................................................565 DME Wipe Pattern List .............................................................................566 DME Wipe Patterns Available in One-Channel Mode .......................566 DME Wipe Patterns Available in Two-Channel Mode.......................575 DME Wipe Patterns Available in Three-Channel Mode.....................579 Resizer DME Wipe Pattern List ...............................................................580 Index ............................................................................................................582 Table of Contents 13 14 Table of Contents Chapter 1 MVS-8000 Functions Introduction ................................................................................................19 Features of the MVS-8000 Multi Format Switcher System ....................22 Video Processing Flow ...............................................................................24 Signal Selection ...........................................................................................25 Basics of Signal Selection ...................................................................26 Bus Selection .......................................................................................26 Signal Assignment and Selection ........................................................29 Signal Name Display ...........................................................................33 Transitions ...................................................................................................34 Selecting the Next Transition ..............................................................34 Independent Key Transitions ...............................................................37 Transition Types ..................................................................................41 Executing a Transition .........................................................................44 Keys ..............................................................................................................48 Key Types ............................................................................................48 Key Modifiers ......................................................................................52 Key Memory ........................................................................................56 Key Snapshots .....................................................................................57 Blink ....................................................................................................57 Key Default .........................................................................................57 Key Modify Clear ................................................................................58 Resizer .................................................................................................58 Wipes ...........................................................................................................60 Types of Wipe Pattern .........................................................................60 Pattern Mix ..........................................................................................61 Wipe Pattern Variation and Modifiers ................................................63 Wipe Snapshots ...................................................................................71 Wipe Modify Clear ..............................................................................71 DME Wipes .................................................................................................72 Types of DME Wipe Pattern ...............................................................72 DME Wipe Pattern Variation and Modifiers .......................................80 Relation Between DME Wipes and Other Effects ..............................81 DME Wipe Snapshots .........................................................................82 DME Wipe Modify Clear ....................................................................83 Resizer DME wipes .............................................................................83 Frame Memory ...........................................................................................85 Overview .............................................................................................85 Still Image File Functions ...................................................................89 Frame Memory Clip Function .............................................................92 Image Data Management .....................................................................94 Image Data Transfer ............................................................................94 External Hard Disk Drive Access ........................................................96 Color Backgrounds .....................................................................................97 Copy and Swap ...........................................................................................98 Side Flags ...................................................................................................102 Overview ...........................................................................................102 Side Flag Settings ..............................................................................102 Wipe Action on Images With Side Flags ..........................................103 DME Wipe Action for an Image With Side Flags ............................104 Video Process ............................................................................................107 Video Process Adjustments of a Primary Input Signal .....................107 Video Process Adjustments on a Particular Bus ...............................107 Video Process Memory .....................................................................108 Digital Multi Effects (DME) ....................................................................109 Three-Dimensional Transformations .................................................110 Transformation Operation Modes .....................................................116 Graphics Display ...............................................................................120 Three-Dimensional Parameter Display .............................................122 DME Special Effects .........................................................................122 Interpolation ......................................................................................151 Key Density Adjustment ...................................................................152 Key Source Selection ........................................................................152 Global Effects ....................................................................................152 External Devices .......................................................................................158 Shared Functions for External Device Control .................................158 Control of P-Bus Devices ..................................................................159 Control of GPI Devices .....................................................................160 VTR/Disk Recorder/Extended VTR Control ....................................161 Regions and Registers ..............................................................................165 Regions ..............................................................................................165 Registers ............................................................................................166 Keyframes .................................................................................................168 Effects ................................................................................................168 Saving and Recalling Effects ............................................................169 Effect Attributes ................................................................................169 Effect Editing ....................................................................................169 Time Settings .....................................................................................171 Paths ..................................................................................................174 Effect Execution ................................................................................180 Master Timelines ...............................................................................181 Snapshots ...................................................................................................182 Snapshot Types ..................................................................................182 Snapshot Attributes ...........................................................................183 Utility .........................................................................................................185 Shotbox ......................................................................................................186 Setup ..........................................................................................................187 Overview of Setup .............................................................................187 System Setup .....................................................................................187 Saving and Recalling Setup Data ......................................................194 Panel Setup ........................................................................................195 Switcher Setup ...................................................................................198 DME Setup ........................................................................................202 Setup Relating to DCU Input/Output ................................................202 Setup Relating to the Router Interface and Tally Interface ...............203 Simple Connection to MKS-8080/8082 AUX Bus Remote Panel (Option) ..................................................................................204 Files ............................................................................................................205 Macros .......................................................................................................210 Overview ...........................................................................................210 Macro Creation and Editing ..............................................................212 Macro Execution ...............................................................................215 Macro Timeline .................................................................................216 Macro Editing Using Menus .............................................................218 Macro Attachment .............................................................................218 Menu Macros .....................................................................................222 Color Corrector ........................................................................................223 Simple P/P Software .................................................................................227 Overview ...........................................................................................227 Restrictions on Use ............................................................................227 Multi Program 2 .......................................................................................230 Overview ...........................................................................................230 Sequence of Operations in Multi Program 2 .....................................232 Basic Operations (Required) .............................................................232 Examples of Operations in the Multi Program 2 Mode (When Sharing a Switcher Bank) .......................................................................237 Optional Operations ..........................................................................237 Functions Added in Multi Program 2 Mode .....................................241 Differences Between Multi Program 2 Mode and Standard Mode ...242 Restrictions on Using Multi Program 2 Mode ..................................243 Dual Link Support ....................................................................................245 Introduction Chapter 1 MVS-8000 Functions This manual is the User’s Guide for the MVS-8000/8000SF Multi Format Switcher system. The MVS-8000 and MVS-8000SF have different numbers of M/E banks and input/output signals, but are otherwise functionally identical. This manual refers to these generically as the “MVS-8000 system,” and describes principally the operation of the system using the CCP-8000 series of center control panels. The User’s Guide for this system comprises two volumes. Contents of Volume 1 Overview of functions of the MVS-8000 system, and basic switcher operations including transitions, keys, and wipes. Contents of Volume 2 DME effects, snapshots, keyframes, and various operations such as setup which affect the overall system. Devices and system nomenclature In this manual, when discussing the principal components of the MVS-8000 system, in place of the formal product names, abbreviated names characterizing the functions and features are sometimes used. When distinctions between system configurations must be drawn, the terms in the following table are used. Principal components and naming The formal product names of the principal components of the MVS-8000 system, and the terms used in this manual are as follows. Formal product name Term used in this manual MVS-8000/8000SF/8000A/8000ASF/8000G/ 8000GSF Multi Format Switcher Processor a) Switcher or switcher processor MVE-8000 (MKS-8800)/8000A Multi Format DME Processor DME or DME processor or MVE-8000/ 8000A MVE-9000 Multi Format DME Processor DME or DME processor or MVE-9000 CCP-8000-series Center Control Panel Control panel or center control panel DCU-8000 (MKS-8700) Device Control Unit DCU or MKS-8700 DCU-2000 (MKS-2700) Device Control Unit DCU or MKS-2700 Introduction 19 a) Where there are differences among the MVS-8000/8000SF system, MVS-8000A/8000ASF system, and MVS-8000G/8000GSF system, these may be noted specifically in the relevant place. System nomenclature The following terms are used for systems, depending on the combination of installed options, and the signal format. Chapter 1 MVS-8000 Functions System configuration and features Term for system System with installed option boards and settings to support HDTV format HD system System with installed option boards and settings to support SDTV format SD system A system in which the center control panel has 4M/E system four M/E banks A system in which the center control panel has 3M/E system three M/E banks A system in which the center control panel has 2M/E system two M/E banks Related manuals The following manuals are supplied with the individual products of the MVS8000 Multi Format Switcher system. MVS-8400/8300/8200 Switcher Processor Pack • MVS-8400/8300/8200 Operation Manual • MVS-8400/8300/8200 Installation Manual MVS-8000A-C/8000AS-C Switcher Processor Pack • MVS-8000A-C/8000AS-C Operation Manual • MVS-8000A-C/8000AS-C Installation Manual MVS-8000G-C/8000GS-C Switcher Processor Pack • MVS-8000G-C/8000GS-C Operation Manual • MVS-8000G-C/8000GS-C Installation Manual MVS-8000SF-C Switcher Processor Pack • MVS-8000SF-C Operation Manual • MVS-8000SF-C Installation Manual MVE-8000-C DME Processor Pack • MVE-8000-C Operation Manual • MVE-8000-C Installation Manual MVE-8000A DME Processor Pack 20 Introduction • MVE-8000A Operation Manual • MVE-8000A Installation Manual MVE-9000-C DME Processor Pack • MVE-9000-C Operation Manual • MVE-9000-C Installation Manual Chapter 1 MVS-8000 Functions CCP-8000 Center Control Panel Pack • CCP-8000 Operation Manual • CCP-8000 Installation Manual DCU-8000 Device Control Unit Pack • DCU-8000 Operation Manual • DCU-8000 Installation Manual DCU-2000 Device Control Unit Pack • DCU-2000-C Operation Manual • DCU-2000-C Installation Manual Introduction 21 Features of the MVS-8000 Multi Format Switcher System Chapter 1 MVS-8000 Functions The MVS-8000 Multi Format Switcher system boasts extensible high performance and multifunctionality. The following are some of the principal features of this system. System configuration flexibility Multiformat support This system supports both HDTV and SDTV signal formats. The format selection can be switched by a simple control panel operation. The MVS8000G supports either the HDTV or SDTV signal format, depending on the software option selection. Extensible system configuration By suitable combination of options, the switcher can be configured with various inputs and outputs, and different numbers of M/E banks. The system offers the flexibility to change and expand as required. You can connect up to two MVE-8000/8000A or MVE-9000 extensible DME processors, each of which provides any number from one to four channels, for a maximum of eight channels of DME functionality. Powerful external device interfaces By connecting to a Sony routing switcher or similar, a large system can be built. From the control panel, it is also possible to operate other equipment, including VTRs and disk recorders. Powerful tally system The complete system including routing switcher provides an all-inclusive tally system. The system can be adapted to different applications and settings, using multiple tally outputs, including both on-air and recording tallies. Comprehensive video manipulation M/E banks Each mix/effects bank (M/E bank) is equipped with four keyers, and each keyer is capable not only of chroma keying, but also independent key transitions separate from the background transitions. The four keys can be freely combined, to carry out four different program outputs. 22 Features of the MVS-8000 Multi Format Switcher System Chapter 1 MVS-8000 Functions Powerful frame memory functions In an MVS-8000 system, an HDTV system can hold 58 still image frames (88 frames in 720P/59.94 format), and an SDTV system can store 222 frames in memory, while up to eight frames can be recalled and used simultaneously. In an MVS-8000A system and MVS-8000G system, an HDTV system can hold approximately 1,000 still image frames or 2,000 frames in 720P/59.94 format, and an SDTV system can hold approximately 5,000 frames in 480i/ 59.94 format or 4,000 frames in 576i/50 format in memory, and up to eight frames can be recalled and used simultaneously. Link operation with DME By means of the dedicated DME interface, a range of DME functions including DME wipes and processed keys can be handled as switcher functions. By connecting two MVE-8000/8000A or MVE-9000 units, in any combination, you can interface to a maximum of eight DME channels. Note that the MVE-8000A and MVE-9000 can also be used with this system by connecting through an SDI interface. Designed for use in a live broadcasting environment Flexible control panel layout Because of its modular design, the various sections of the control panel can be laid out as required. This allows a flexible layout appropriate to the system operation. High-performance user interface The menu control block provides a large color LCD panel, with rapid touchpanel menu selection. The source name displays and buttons in the Flexi PadTM and shotbox control blocks have color backlit LCD displays. The signal names, and graphical representations of the patterns associated with buttons provide intuitive feedback, and allow the immediate decisions that are required in a live operating environment. Features of the MVS-8000 Multi Format Switcher System 23 Video Processing Flow The following illustration shows the flow of operations for carrying out a transition on an M/E bank or the PGM/PST bank. Chapter 1 MVS-8000 Functions Select current background video (page 25) Select next transition (page 34) Background Keys 1 to 4 Select new background video (page 25) Make key settings (page 48) Select transition type (page 41) Cut Mix NAM Super mix Preset color mix Wipe DME wipe Make wipe settings (page 60) Make DME wipe settings (page 72) Preview the effect of transition (page 46) Execute the transition (page 44) 24 Video Processing Flow Signal Selection Source name displays Chapter 1 MVS-8000 Functions You carry out signal selection with the cross-point buttons in the cross-point control block of each M/E bank or the PGM/PST bank, and the buttons in the auxiliary bus control block. The number of buttons in each cross-point row may be 16, 24, or 32, but here the description is of the 32-button case as an example. KEY4 button Key 2 row KEY3 button Reentry buttons Key 1 row Cross-point buttons SHIFT M/E 1 M/E 2 M/E 3 XPT HOLD KEY3 SHIFT M/E 1 M/E 2 M/E 3 XPT HOLD KEY4 MCRO ENBL MCRO ASGN SHIFT SHIFT M/E 1 M/E 2 M/E 3 XPT HOLD AUTO RUN SHIFT M/E 1 M/E 2 M/E 3 XPT HOLD UTIL UTIL button Reentry buttons SHIFT button Background B row Background A row Cross-point control block Signal Selection 25 Basics of Signal Selection Chapter 1 MVS-8000 Functions Each of the M/E banks, PGM/PST bank and auxiliary bus control block has 32 cross-point buttons and three reentry buttons (four in the case of the auxiliary bus control block). These buttons are identified by numbers common to all of the banks and block, and a signal is assigned to each number. The basis of signal selection is to select, in a cross-point button row, the crosspoint button to which is assigned the desired signal. Reentry buttons To use the output of one M/E bank as background input to another bank, use the reentry buttons [M/E1], [M/E2], and [M/E3] (on the auxiliary bus control block, [M/E1], [M/E2], [M/E3], and [PGM]) in the cross-point control block of the destination bank. For example, to feed the output from the M/E-1 bank as the background B input to M/E-2, in the M/E-2 cross-point control block, press the [M/E1] button in the background B row. Bus Selection Each row of 32 cross-point buttons is shared by multiple buses. For example, in the M/E-1 bank, the key 1 row of buttons can be assigned either to the key 1 bus or to the key 3 bus. The [KEY3] button switches between these two assignments. To assign a bus to the cross-point buttons in the auxiliary bus control block, press one of the AUX delegation buttons to select the bus. The following table illustrates the correspondence between buses and crosspoint button rows, and the delegation operations. 26 Bank Bus name Cross-point button row Delegation operation M/E-1, M/E-2, M/E-3 Background A bus a) Background A row – Background B bus a) Background B row – Key 1 bus Key 1 row Turn off the [KEY3] button Key 2 bus Key 2 row Turn off the [KEY4] button Key 3 bus Key 1 row Turn on the [KEY3] button Key 4 bus Key 2 row Turn on the [KEY4] button Signal Selection Bus name Cross-point button row Delegation operation PGM/PST Program bus a) Program row – Preset bus a) Preset row – DSK 1 bus DSK1 row Turn off the [DSK3] button DSK 2 bus DSK2 row Turn off the [DSK4] button DSK 3 bus DSK1 row Turn on the [DSK3] button M/E-1, M/E-2, M/E-3, PGM/PST DSK 4 bus DSK2 row Turn on the [DSK4] button Utility 1 bus Background A row Utility 2 bus Background B row When [UTIL] button mode is Hold, hold down the [UTIL] button DME external video bus Key 1 row Hold down the [UTIL] button DME utility 1 bus Key 2 row Hold down the [UTIL] button, and press the [KEY4] button, turning it off DME utility 2 bus Chapter 1 MVS-8000 Functions Bank Hold down the [UTIL] button, and press the [KEY4] button, turning it on Signal Selection 27 Bank Bus name Cross-point button row Delegation operation Auxiliary bus control block AUX1 to AUX48 buses 1st row, 2nd row Turn on the appropriate buttons in accordance with the signal assignment made in the Setup menu. MONITOR 1 to MONITOR 8 buses Frame memory source 1 and frame memory source 2 buses Chapter 1 MVS-8000 Functions DME 1 to DME 8 video buses DME 1 to DME 8 key buses Edit preview bus M/E-1 UTILITY 1 and M/E-1 UTILITY 2 buses M/E-2 UTILITY 1 and M/E-2 UTILITY 2 buses M/E-3 UTILITY 1 and M/E-3 UTILITY 2 buses P/P UTILITY 1 and P/P UTILITY 2 buses M/E-1 Key 1 fill to M/E-1 Key 4 fill buses M/E-1 Key 1 source to M/ E-1 Key 4 source buses M/E-2 Key 1 fill to M/E-2 Key 4 fill buses M/E-2 Key 1 source to M/ E-2 Key 4 source buses M/E-3 Key 1 fill to M/E-3 Key 4 fill buses M/E-3 Key 1 source to M/E-3 Key 4 source buses DSK 1 fill to DSK 4 fill buses DSK 1 source to DSK 4 source buses M/E-1 external DME bus M/E-2 external DME bus M/E-3 external DME bus P/P external DME bus DME UTILITY 1 and DME UTILITY 2 buses 28 Signal Selection a) Dual background bus mode (see below) can be selected. Dual background bus mode In this mode, the shifted signal on the background A row can be selected on the key 1 row, and the shifted signal on the background B row can be selected on the key 2 row. To switch this mode on and off, it is necessary to assign this function to the [PRE MCRO] button in the cross-point control block. Chapter 1 MVS-8000 Functions For details of the assignment operation, see “Overall Control Panel Settings (Config Menu)” in Chapter 16 (Volume 2). Note For the following switcher banks, dual background bus mode is not available. • When set to “Dual M/E Assign” • When M/E Config is set to “DSK” Signal Assignment and Selection Assigning signals to buttons Each of the 32 cross-point buttons and reentry buttons has a corresponding button number, to which you assign a signal. In addition to the signals input to the PRIMARY INPUTS 1 to 80 connectors (1 to 34 connectors for the MVS-8000SF/8000ASF/8000GSF) on the rear panel of the switcher, you can also select signals generated within the switcher. Each button has assigned to it a video signal and a key signal, forming a pair. You can set these video and key combinations in a Setup menu. For details of Setup menu operations, see “Cross-Point Settings (Xpt Assign Menu)” in Chapter 16 (Volume 2). Signal Selection 29 Cross-point button control block button numbers Shift button M/E 1 M/E 2 M/E 3 XPT HOLD M/E 1 M/E 2 M/E 3 XPT HOLD KSK4 MCRO ENBL MCRO ASGN SHIFT DSK3 Chapter 1 MVS-8000 Functions M/E 1 M/E 2 M/E 3 XPT HOLD AUTO RUN M/E 1 M/E 2 M/E 3 XPT HOLD UTIL 1, 2, 3, 4, ....... (first button numbers) ....... 29, 30, 31 121 123 32, 33, 34, 35, ....... (second button numbers) ....... 60, 61, 62 125 127 Shift button On each M/E bank and the PGM/PST bank, each cross-point button and reentry button has two button numbers, and you use the shift button to switch between these numbers. In the case of a 32-button layout, the button numbers are as follows. Cross-point control block button numbers Button Number when the shift button is not pressed Number when the shift button is pressed From the left end to the 31st 1 to 31 button 32 to 62 Reentry buttons 125 to 127 121 to 123 Note On the MVS-8000A/8000G, you can use the rightmost button (number 32) as a [SIDE FLAG] button. In this case, the shift button moves one to the left, to number 31, and the button numbers are offset by one. For details of the [SIDE FLAG] button, see “Cross-Point Settings (Xpt Assign Menu)” in Chapter 16 (Volume 2). Switching button numbers The rightmost (32nd) button functions as a shift button. (The shift button function can be disabled in a Setup menu.) When selecting the signals of button numbers 1 to 31, press the cross-point button for the desired signal. To select button numbers 32 to 62, hold down the shift button, and press the cross-point button for the desired signal. 30 Signal Selection Button numbers in the auxiliary bus control block 2ND button 1, 2, 3, 4, ....... AUX 2 AUX 3 AUX 4 AUX 5 AUX 6 AUX 7 (1st row) AUX 8 AUX 9 AUX 10 AUX 11 AUX 12 AUX 13 AUX 14 AUX 15 AUX 16 AUX 17 AUX 18 AUX 19 AUX 20 AUX 21 AUX 22 AUX 23 AUX 24 AUX 25 AUX 26 AUX 27 DME UTIL1 DME UTIL2 FM 1 FM 2 EDIT PVW 124 LEVEL 1 LEVEL 2 LEVEL 3 LEVEL 4 DEST MCRO 1 MCRO 2 MCRO 3 SHIFT 32, 33, 34, 35, ....... (2nd row) RTR Chapter 1 MVS-8000 Functions AUX 1 ....... 29, 30, 31 121 2ND KEY M/E 1 M/E 2 M/E 3 P/P XPT HOLD M/E 1 M/E 2 M/E 3 P/P XPT HOLD ....... 60, 61, 62 125 128 When the [2ND] button is unlit The cross-point buttons and reentry buttons in the auxiliary bus control block have separate upper (1st row) and lower (2nd row) numbers. In the case of a 32-button layout, the button numbers are as follows. Auxiliary bus control block button numbers ([2ND] button unlit) Button 1st row 2nd row Button Button numbers From the left end to the 31st button 1 to 31 Reentry buttons 121 to 124 From the left end to the 31st button 32 to 62 Reentry buttons 125 to 128 When the [2ND] button is lit Different buses can be assigned to the 1st-row buttons and 2nd-row buttons. When the 32nd button is set as a shift button, the 1st-row buttons and 2nd-row buttons both have the following button numbers. Auxiliary bus control block button numbers ([2ND] button lit) Button Number when the shift button is not pressed Number when the shift button is pressed From the left end to the 31st 1 to 31 button 32 to 62 Reentry buttons 125 to 128 121 to 124 Inhibiting cross-point button operations For each cross-point button, you can temporarily inhibit operations. Signal Selection 31 Note This setting is cleared when you reset the control panel. Chapter 1 MVS-8000 Functions Assigning a button to the function of disabling cross-point button operation You can assign the button to be used for the operation to the [PRE MCRO] button, in setup. (See Chapter 16, “Overall Control Panel Settings (Config Menu)” (Volume 2)) You can also use the [Inhibit Set] and [Inhibit All Clear] functions, assigned to user preference buttons. (See Chapter 16, “Setting Button Assignments (Prefs/ Utility Menu)” (Volume 2)) Buses for which operations can be inhibited This setting applies to the AUX control block and switcher bank cross-point buttons. For example, if you make the setting for one cross-point button in a switcher bank, this inhibits operation of all cross-point buttons with the same number in the following buses. The corresponding name also disappears from the source name display. • Background A, background B • Keys 1 to 4 • Utility 1, utility 2 • DME utility 1, DME utility 2 • External DME To inhibit operation of a cross-point button Hold down the button which “Inhibit Set” is assigned, and press the cross-point button whose operation you want to inhibit. The button you pressed flashes amber, and this makes the operation inhibited. Note Even when you inhibit operation of a cross-point button, macro attachment settings are still possible (see page 218). To clear a cross-point button operation inhibit setting Hold down the button to which “Inhibit Set” is assigned, and press the button whose operation is inhibited (flashing amber). This clears the operation inhibit setting for the button you pressed. To clear all operation inhibit settings Press the button to which “Inhibit Set” is assigned and the button to which “Inhibit All Clear” is assigned simultaneously. 32 Signal Selection Selection of signals linked with the audio mixer When you select a signal in a switcher bank background A row or AUX bus control block which is set to be linked with the audio mixer, the program output of the audio mixer follows the signal selection. For details of the setting, see Chapter 16, “Cross-Point Settings (Xpt Assign menu)” (Volume 2). Chapter 1 MVS-8000 Functions Note • For details of audio mixers that can be connected, contact your Sony service or sales representative. • When the signal is switched with a snapshot, keyframe, and so on, the audio mixer is not linked. • When bus fixed mode is selected in setup (see page 45), the audio mixer program output is linked to the bus output as the background. Signal Name Display You can attach a name (source name) to each signal assigned to a cross-point button, with a maximum of 16 characters. • The source name displays in the cross-point control block and auxiliary bus control block show the source names of the video signals assigned to numbers 1 to 31. • To display the source names for numbers 32 to 62, press the [SHIFT] button to the right of the source name displays. • To display the source names of the key signals assigned to buttons, hold down the [SPLIT] button in the key control block or the [KEY] button in the auxiliary bus control block. Colors of lit cross-point buttons In a particular row of cross-point buttons, only the last pressed button is effective, and lights amber or red. The amber indicates the “low tally” state, and the red indicates the “high tally” state, to indicate whether or not the selected signal appears in the final output video. Significance of colors of lit cross-point buttons Color State Significance Amber Low tally Does not appear in final output video Red High tally Appears in final output video Signal Selection 33 Transitions In the M/E banks and PGM/PST bank, the switch from the current video stream (appearing on the corresponding program monitor) to a new video stream is referred to as a transition. Chapter 1 MVS-8000 Functions Selecting the Next Transition To execute a transition, it is first necessary to decide how the image will be changed as a result of the transition. This selection is carried out using the next transition selection buttons (see page 261) in the transition control block of each M/E or PGM/PST bank. For details of operations, “Basic Operating Procedure” (page 340). In the M/E banks and PGM/PST bank, you can change one of the images, the background, and keys 1 to 4 (downstream keys 1 to 4 in the PGM/PST bank), and also vary combinations of these simultaneously. The following are examples of transition. Changing the background A background transition switches from the video currently selected on the background A bus (the current video) to the video selected on the background B bus (the new video). Transition Background A Background B In the default selection of flip-flop mode (see page 45), the background always switches in the direction from the A bus to the B bus. When the transition completes, the cross-point selections on the A and B buses are interchanged. 34 Transitions Inserting and deleting a key You can insert one or more of the four keys (downstream keys on the PGM/ PST bank). If you select a key which is already inserted, the transition will delete the key. A simultaneous combination of deleting and inserting keys is also possible. Key 1 Chapter 1 MVS-8000 Functions Insert Delete Key 2 Inserting or deleting key 1 and key 2 Key 1 Transition Key 2 Deleting key 1 and inserting key 2 Transitions 35 Simultaneously changing the background and keys You can change any of the four keys (downstream keys on the PGM/PST bank) and the background at the same time. Key 1 Chapter 1 MVS-8000 Functions Transition Key 2 Changing the background and key 2 simultaneously Key 1 Transition Key 2 Key 3 Key 4 Changing the background and keys 1 to 4 simultaneously Selecting the key priority If a number of keys are already inserted in the current video, you can check or change the key priority, that is to say, the order in which the keys are overlaid. When a key priority ([KEY PRIOR]) is selected as the next transition, you can also change the key priority in the new video. For details of this operation, see “Key Priority Setting” (page 343). 36 Transitions The key priority values go from 1 to 4, with a higher priority key being “in front” as seen on the screen. 3 1 Chapter 1 MVS-8000 Functions 4 2 Priority sequence on the screen Independent Key Transitions What is an independent key transition? In addition to common transitions, it is possible to carry out independent transitions on the keyers of the M/E banks and PGM/PST bank. These are called “independent key transitions.” By carrying out an independent key transition in combination with a common transition, different transition types can be used for the background and keys. It is also possible to use different transition types for key insertion and key deletion by means of a Setup menu setting. For details of this operation, see “Basic Independent Key Transition Operations” (page 364). The following description compares the independent key transition with a common transition, taking a simultaneous change of the background and key as an example. Video used in the transition Background A Background B Key to insert Transitions 37 Effect of a common transition In the case shown in the previous illustration, carrying out a common transition produces the following change in the image. Chapter 1 MVS-8000 Functions Transition type: wipe Same wipe is applied to background and key. Effect of a common transition Effect of use with an independent key transition The key is inserted with an independent key transition as the background changes with a common transition, providing the following result. Transition type: wipe Independent key transition type: wipe Different wipe patterns are applied to the background and key transitions. Effect of a background transition and independent key transition Combining other transitions with independent key transitions When you set a common transition and a key independent transition for the same key, you can apply two different effects such as a wipe and mix (dissolve) (see page 41) to the key simultaneously. When carrying out such a combination of transitions simultaneously on a key as auto transitions (see page 45), the result depends on the timing of pressing the respective [AUTO TRANS] buttons. 38 Transitions Wipe and mix (dissolve) are carried out simultaneously. Chapter 1 MVS-8000 Functions Simultaneous execution If the [AUTO TRANS] buttons for the two transitions are pressed simultaneously, the following is the result. Note that in both cases the common transition is a wipe and the independent key transition is a mix (dissolve). Deleting a key with simultaneous transitions: With the key inserted, it is deleted simultaneously with the two transitions. When the common transition completes, even if the independent key transition is still not completed, the two end simultaneously. The key is deleted, even if the independent key transition has not completed. Deleting a key with simultaneous transitions Inserting a key with simultaneous transitions: With the key not inserted, it is inserted simultaneously with the two transitions. If the common transition or independent key transition ends first, the other continues to completion. Wipe and mix (dissolve) are carried out simultaneously. The transitions continue until both are completed. Inserting a key with simultaneous transitions Time offset execution If the [AUTO TRANS] buttons for the two transitions are pressed with a time offset, the following is the result. Note that in both cases the common transition is a wipe and the independent key transition is a mix (dissolve). Transitions 39 Time offset execution with the key inserted: With the key inserted, it is deleted with the two transitions acting with a time offset. Whichever button is pressed first, when the common transition completes, even if the independent key transition is still not completed, the two end simultaneously. Example: When the independent key transition [AUTO TRANS] button is pressed later Chapter 1 MVS-8000 Functions Common transition (wipe) start Independent key transition (mix) start The key is deleted, even if the independent key transition has not completed. Time offset execution with the key inserted Time offset execution with the key not inserted: With the key not inserted, it is inserted with the transition whose [AUTO TRANS] button is pressed first. Since the key is then in the inserted state, with the transition whose [AUTO TRANS] button is pressed later, the key is deleted. When the key is completely deleted, both transitions complete. 40 Transitions Example 1: When the independent key transition [AUTO TRANS] button is pressed later Chapter 1 MVS-8000 Functions Independent key transition (mix) start Common transition (wipe) start The transition completes with the key deleted. Example 2: When the common transition [AUTO TRANS] button is pressed later Independent key transition (mix) start Common transition (wipe) start The transition completes with the key deleted. Time offset execution with the key not inserted Transition Types Selecting the transition type determines the way in which the transition occurs. Carry out the type selection with the transition type selection buttons in the transition control block of each M/E or PGM/PST bank. For details of this operation, see “Basic Operating Procedure” (page 340). The following are the transition types. Mix This is a dissolve, in which the new video progressively fades in over the current video, with the sum of the two video outputs maintained constant. At the mid-point of the transition (when the fader lever is in the center position), the output of each is 50%. This transition type can also be selected for an independent key transition. In this case, the key either dissolves in or dissolves out similarly, with the progress of the transition. Transitions 41 NAM (non-additive mix) In this dissolve, the current video and new video signals are compared, and the signal with the higher luminance level is given priority in the output. The current video is maintained at 100% output for the first half of the transition as the new video increases progressively to 100%, then the current video is progressively reduced from 100% to zero in the second half with the new video maintained at 100% output. Chapter 1 MVS-8000 Functions Note This transition type is not available for an independent key transition. Super mix In this dissolve, the current video is maintained at 100% output for the first half of the transition as the new video is mixed while increasing progressively to 100%, then the current video is progressively reduced from 100% to zero in the second half with the new video maintained at 100% output. Note that you can set the output levels of the current and new video signals at the mid-point of the transition, in the range 0 to 100%. (See “Super Mix Settings” (page 349).) Note This transition type is not available for an independent key transition. Preset color mix This is a two-stage dissolve, comprising two transitions, the first a dissolve to a color matte, and the second from the color matte to the new video. In the first transition, the current video is replaced by the color matte in a mix (dissolve), then in the second transition the color matte is replaced by the new video also in a mix (dissolve). You can specify the color matte by luminance, saturation, and hue values. (See “Color Matte Settings” (page 350).) Also, in place of a color matte you can use an image selected on the utility 2 bus. Notes • This transition type is not available for an independent key transition. • In the multi-program mode, you can use a preset color mix only when selecting the background for the next transition. One-stroke mode and one-time mode • You can make a setting such that a preset color mix is carried out in a single transition. This is called “one-stroke mode.” 42 Transitions Note When the bus fixed mode is selected with a Setup menu setting, a preset color mix is always carried out in the one-stroke mode. • You can also make a setting such that when a preset color mix is completed, the next transition switches to the previous transition type automatically. This is called “one-time mode.” Chapter 1 MVS-8000 Functions When only the background is changed Current video Color matte New video Preset color mix (changing background only) When a key is inserted Key fades out Key When a key is selected as the next transition When no key is selected Key fades in Preset color mix (transition including key) By means of a Setup menu setting, it is possible to preserve the key state while carrying out the color matte mix. Transitions 43 When, with a key inserted, a key is selected in the next transition Key state preserved Key gradually removed Key Chapter 1 MVS-8000 Functions Preset color mix (when set to preserve key state) Wipe A wipe replaces the current video by the new video according to a predetermined pattern. This transition type can also be selected for an independent key transition. For details, see “Wipes” (page 60) and Chapter 5 “Wipes” (page 437). DME wipe Using a DME effect, it is possible to obtain a transition to a new image from the current image, as in a wipe. You can also use this transition type as an independent key transition. For details, see “DME Wipes” (page 72) and Chapter 6 “DME Wipes” (page 465). Clip transitions Linked to a mix (dissolve) or wipe transition, a frame memory clip (movie) is played back. Note The clip transition function is only supported on the MVS-8000A/8000G. Cut A cut switches instantaneously from the current video to the new video. When the next transition is a key transition, the key cuts in or out instantaneously. Executing a Transition There are two modes of executing a transition: an auto transition by button operation or a manual transition using the fader lever. 44 Transitions Chapter 1 MVS-8000 Functions It is also possible to combine both methods, taking control with the fader lever of an auto transition which has partly completed, or complete a transition started with the fader lever as an auto transition. By combining common transitions with independent key transitions, different transition types can be applied to the background and keys, for example allowing a key wipe combined with a background dissolve. (See “Executing a Transition” (page 351).) When the audio mixer is linked in setup, you can carry out an auto transition, and also switch the sound with the audio mixer. (See “Transition linked to the audio mixer” (page 342).) Auto transitions Cut A cut switches instantaneously from the current video to the new video. When the next transition is a key transition, the key cuts in or out instantaneously. Auto transition The transition from the current video to the new video is carried out automatically at a constant rate, using the transition effect selected as the transition type. You can set the transition rate in advance. (See “Setting the Transition Rate” (page 352).) Manual transitions Using the fader lever, you can manually control the progress of the transition. Moving the fader lever from one end of its travel to the other completes the transition. Flip-flop mode and bus fixed mode The following describes the difference between flip-flop mode and bus fixed mode, taking an M/E bank as an example; the functionality is the same, however, on the PGM/PST bank. Normally, when a background transition is carried out on an M/E bank, the signals selected on the A and B rows of cross-point buttons are interchanged at the end of the transition. That is to say, except during a transition, the background output is always from the background A bus. This is called “flipflop mode.” The alternative is known as “bus fixed mode,” in which there is no bus interchange. In this mode, when the fader lever is at the top of its travel the output from the A bus is always 100%, and when the fader lever is at the bottom of its travel the output from the B bus is 100%. Transitions 45 Flip-flop mode Chapter 1 MVS-8000 Functions A B A BLACK B BLACK Bus fixed mode BLACK Fader lever BLACK Buttons lit A BLACK B BLACK Flip-flop mode and bus fixed mode For details of fader lever operation in bus fixed mode, see page 361. Transition preview With the preview output of the M/E banks and PGM/PST bank, you can check the effect of a transition in advance. To carry out a transition preview, press the [TRANS PVW] button in the transition control block. (See “Transition Preview” (page 363).) Note In multi-program mode, DSK mode (page 199) or bus fixed mode (page 45), it is not possible to carry out a transition preview. Pattern limit When a wipe or DME wipe pattern is selected for the transition, you can specify the range of movement of the wipe pattern through the course of the transition, for each bank independently. When the pattern limit function is enabled, carrying out a transition results in the following effect for example settings. • When the limit value is set to 50%, the effect at the end of the transition is the same as when the fader lever is at the center position in the normal case (with the pattern limit function disabled); the wipe pattern does not complete. • When the limit value is set to 0%, the wipe effect is completely disabled, and carrying out the transition produces no change in the image. 46 Transitions • When the limit value is set to the maximum 100%, the image changes in exactly the same way as when the pattern limit function is off, but when the transition is completed, the cross-point selections on the background A and B buses do not interchange. You can specify the limit value either by entering a numeric value in the menu, or by operating the fader lever to set the fader lever position. (See “Pattern Limit” (page 355).) Chapter 1 MVS-8000 Functions Note The pattern limit function is not available in an independent key transition. Fade to black The PGM/PST bank provides a fade-to-black function, controlled with the [FTB] button in the fade to black control block. (See “Fade to Black” (page 369).) Note In multi-program mode or DSK mode, it is possible to carry out a fade-to-black on a number of programs simultaneously. You can also make a Setup menu setting such that a fade-to-black does not apply to particular programs. For details of the setting, see “Settings Relating to Video Switching (Transition Menu)” in Chapter 16 (Volume 2). Transitions 47 Keys Chapter 1 MVS-8000 Functions A key is an effect in which a part of the background image is replaced by an image or superimposed text. The signal determining how the background is cut out is termed “key source,” and the signal that replaces the cut-out part is termed “key fill.” The system component responsible for processing a key is referred to as a keyer. Each M/E bank and the PGM/PST bank has four keyers, and all of these keyers provide the same functions. Key Types The key type indicates the manner in which the key source signal is used to cut out the background. In each bank, you can use the following key types. You can select the key type using the key type selection buttons in the key control block, or by a setting in the Type menu for the keyer. (See “Key Type Setting” (page 379).) • Luminance key • Linear key • Color vector key • Chroma key • Wipe pattern key • Key wipe pattern key Luminance key The background is cut out according to the luminance (Y) of the key source signal, and at the same time the key fill signal is cut out and then added to the background signal. Linear key This is a type of luminance key, but there is a reduced variability in gain, allowing more precise adjustment. Color vector key The key signal is created from a combination of the luminance and chrominance components of the key source signal. When perfect keying is not possible with a luminance key, this allows a key signal to be created even if the luminance level is low, provided that the colors have high saturation. 48 Keys Chapter 1 MVS-8000 Functions Clean mode In a luminance key, linear key or color vector key, you can enable the clean mode. When the clean mode is on, the key source does not affect the key fill, which is added unchanged to the background. This improves the keyed image quality, but means that the part of the key fill signal which is not to be inserted must be completely black, or it will color the background. You set the clean mode with the Type menu of the respective keyer. (See “Setting the key type in a menu” (page 379).) Note that in the following situations, the clean mode goes off, and cannot be turned on. • When the key type is a pattern key • When key inversion is on • When the key fill is a matte • When the key edge is an outline • When the key edge is normal with soft edge being on • When fine key is on • When the key positioner is on Chroma key A key signal based on a particular color is used to cut out the background, and the key fill is then inserted. The inserted signal is also referred to as the foreground, and the composite image is called a chroma key image. Foreground Background Chroma key image Normal mix and additive mix In creating a chroma key image, either a normal mix or an additive mix can be used. To select which, use the Type >Chroma Adjust menu for the keyer. (See “Chroma Key Composition” (page 381).) Keys 49 Normal mix: The foreground is cut out with the key signal, and then combined with the background, which has also been cut out with the key signal. Additive mix: The background, which has been cut out with the key signal, is combined with the unshaped foreground. This is effective for a naturallooking composite when the scene includes glass or other translucent objects. Chapter 1 MVS-8000 Functions Plane function In an additive mix, the foreground is not shaped by the key signal, and variations in the (blue) background appear in the composite image. To prevent this, it is possible to set a particular luminance level for the background, and any parts below this level are cut forcibly. Methods of adjusting the composite obtained from chroma keying include automatic adjustment with the auto chroma key function, and manual adjustment carrying out the necessary processing separately. The optimum results will be obtained by first carrying out adjustments with the auto chroma key function, then making any fine adjustments as required. The following manual adjustments are possible. Key active When this function is off, only the foreground is output and you can make adjustments of color cancel (see the next paragraph). Color cancel If the foreground image includes shades of the background color, turn this function on to remove the color from the foreground image. Chroma key window You can adjust the range over which the key signal is determined as matching the specified hue. When this adjustment is off the default ranges are used. Chroma keying generates a key signal based on a particular color (reference color) in the foreground (typically a plain blue background), and the “window” refers to the range of colors which are regarded as matching this specified reference color to create the key signal. As seen on a vectorscope (that is, in the hue-saturation color space), the range for this matching corresponds to a truncated sector. This range is specified by two parameters: the “Angle” parameter, which determines the range of the hue parameter, and the “Crop” parameter, which determines the degree of truncation (see the following figure). 50 Keys Angle a) Chapter 1 MVS-8000 Functions Reference color specified by Hue setting Crop a) Range of colors remaining as foreground Range of colors creating the key signal (to be replaced by background signal) a) The Crop and Angle values do not change even if you use the auto chroma key function. Window adjustment Y balance In normal chroma keying, the key signal is based on the chrominance component only, and all elements of the foreground with the same hue are replaced by the background. Using the Y balance function, you can specify a luminance level range within which the key is active, and replace the specified part by the background. You can use the Y balance function independently on the key signal for the composition and the key signal for the color cancel function. When applied to the key signal for the composition, this produces the foreground with the color cancel effect applied. This can therefore be used to provide an impression of smoke, for example. When the Y balance function is applied to the color cancel key, the relevant part is output in its original color without canceling, and therefore it is possible to combine colors which are the same color as the background (i.e. typically blue) in the foreground. Chroma key shadow This function provides a more realistic treatment when the shadow of an object in the field of view falls on the blue background. Since parts of the blue background darker than a specified intensity are treated as shadows, there is no effect on cutting out of the foreground. Video signal adjustment You can vary the foreground signal gain, or change the hue. There are separate adjustments for the gain of the overall video signal, and Y and C components. Keys 51 For details of video adjustment operations and the adjustment items, see “Chroma Key Adjustments” (page 382). Wipe pattern key This uses the wipe pattern selected for a transition as the key source. Chapter 1 MVS-8000 Functions Key wipe pattern key This uses the wipe pattern selected for an independent key transition as the key source. Note on wipe pattern modifiers In a wipe pattern key or key wipe pattern key, you can apply various modifications, depending on the pattern used, and the modifiers in common with a wipe. However, modifiers which relate to the wipe direction and edge are not reflected. Key Modifiers Edge modifiers You can apply borders and other effects to the edge of the key. (See “Key Edge Modifications” (pages 390 and 410).) Normal This is the state with no key edge modifiers applied. 52 Keys Border This applies a uniform width border to the edge of the key. You can adjust the border width and density. You can also enable the separate edge function, and adjust the top, bottom, left, and right border widths separately. Chapter 1 MVS-8000 Functions Drop border This applies a border below and to the right for example, of the key. You can adjust the border width, position, and density. Shadow This applies a shadow below and to the right for example, of the key. You can adjust the shadow width, position, and density. Keys 53 Outline This uses the outline of the original key as the key. You can adjust the width and density of the outline. You can also enable the separate edge function, and adjust the top, bottom, left, and right outline widths separately. Chapter 1 MVS-8000 Functions Emboss This applies an embossing effect to the outline of the key. You can adjust the width and position of the embossing, and the density. You can adjust the density separately for key fill and key edge. When embossing is on, the Fine Key and zabton functions go off. Soft edge This softens the edge of the key. Zabton This inserts a translucent pattern behind a key. You can adjust the pattern size, softness, density and color. Edge type and key fill/key source position The key edge modification function has two modes: a mode (“key drop ON mode”) in which the key fill/key source position moves downward, and a mode (“key drop OFF mode”) in which it does not move downward. Key drop ON mode: The key fill/key source position moves downward by eight scan lines or four scan lines. When a drop border or shadow is selected, it is possible to apply a border to the top edge of the key. Key drop OFF mode: The key fill/key source position does not move. When a drop border or shadow is selected, it is not possible to apply a border to the top edge of the key. In the key drop ON mode, a menu setting selects between the mode (“4H mode”) in which the key fill/key source position is lowered by four scan lines, and the mode (“8H mode”) in which the key fill/key source position is lowered by eight scan lines. When Fine Key is on, the edge width is forced to the range 0.00 to 4.00. Note that in the following situations, the key drop mode is forcibly turned on. 54 Keys • When the edge type is border, outline, or emboss • When the edge type is normal with soft edge being on • When Fine Key is on To fix key fill / key source in key drop off mode In the Edge menu, switch frame delay mode on (see page 393). Regardless of the fine key and edge type settings, key fill and key source are fixed in key drop off mode. In this mode key image has a one-frame delay. Chapter 1 MVS-8000 Functions Notes • This function is only valid on the MVS-8000G/8000GSF. • This function uses the resizer, and therefore the normal effect of the setting is not obtained while using DME wipe or other effect that uses the resizer. Edge fill When a border, drop border, or shadow modifier is selected, you can select a signal to fill these edge effects. The edge fill may be either the signal from the dedicated color matte generator, or the signal currently selected on the utility 1 bus. In the case of an outline, there is no edge fill signal selection, because the key fill signal fills the outline, and the rest of the image remains as the background. For the emboss effect, in place of the edge fill signal, the emboss fill matte 1 and emboss fill matte 2 signals are used. Masks A mask is used to inhibit the effect of a key over a part of the image. This allows parts of the background which would otherwise be keyed to be protected, or to correct the key if it is not of the desired shape. For details of masking operations, see “Masks” (pages 397 and 414). Key mask and background mask There are two types of mask: a key mask and a background mask. Key mask: This masks out a part of the key, which will result in the background appearing. Keys 55 Background mask: This masks out a part of the background, which will result in the key fill appearing. Masked area (box) Chapter 1 MVS-8000 Functions Key mask Background mask Main mask and subsidiary (“sub”) mask Each keyer allows two masks to be used simultaneously, and these are referred to as the main mask and the sub mask. The signal that determines the mask shape and size is termed the mask source, and different sources are used for the main mask and sub mask. Main mask: This uses the signal from the dedicated box generator provided on each keyer, or the signal from the dedicated pattern generator as the mask source. When the box generator is selected, a rectangular mask is formed. You can adjust the positions of the four sides of the box separately. When the pattern generator is selected, you can select the pattern and apply modifiers. Sub mask: This uses the wipe generator signal or the signal selected on the utility 1 bus, as the mask source. When the wipe generator is selected, the patterns and the pattern modifiers are the same as in a wipe transition. Key Memory The key memory function allows the keyer settings on each cross-point button to be automatically stored, so that the next time the same cross-point button is selected these settings are recalled automatically. There are two modes for key memory: simple mode and full mode. The parameters stored in each mode are as follows. Simple mode: key type, clean mode (including the plane setting for chroma keying), key position, key inversion, and adjustment values for the particular key type (Clip, Gain, Density, Filter, etc. This includes color vector key, wipe pattern key, key wipe pattern key, and chroma key. However, in the case of a chroma key, it excludes color cancel, Y balance, foreground CCR, window, and shadow.) 56 Keys Full mode: All settings except transition (the same parameters as simple mode, Fine Key, key modifiers, main and sub mask settings, chroma key detailed settings, and so on) For the settings for these modes, see “Settings Relating to Keys, Wipes and Frame Memory (Key/Wipe/FM Menu)” in Chapter 16 (Volume 2). Chapter 1 MVS-8000 Functions Key Snapshots Key settings other than the key on/off status and the key priority can all be instantaneously saved in a dedicated register, for recall when required. A key snapshot comprises three values: a cross-point button number, key memory full mode, and independent key transition, and can be called in any combination. There are four key snapshot registers for each keyer. For details of key snapshot operations, see “Key Snapshots” (page 433). Blink The blink function provides the following effects. Key blink: The key is inserted and deleted at the specified frequency. You can also set the frequency and the proportion of the cycle for which the key is inserted. Edge blink: Key fill and key edge fill are interchanged at the specified frequency. You can specify both the frequency and the proportion of the cycle for which the interchange occurs. The blink settings are in the Transition menu for each key. (See “Blink Function” (page 404).) Key Default With a simple operation you can return the key adjustment values to their defaults. The adjustment values which can be returned to their default values are as follows. • Adjustment values for the particular key type (Clip, Gain, Density, Filter, etc.) In the case of chroma keying, all adjustment values return to their default values. • Key position • Key inversion Keys 57 • Clean mode For details, see “Returning the key adjustment values to their defaults” (page 418). For the menu operation to return the key adjustment values to their defaults, see “Returning to default state in function groupings” (page 324). Chapter 1 MVS-8000 Functions Key Modify Clear A simple button operation or a menu operation returns the key settings to the initial status settings. For details of the initial status, see “Selecting the State After Powering On (Start Up Menu)” in Chapter 16 (Volume 2). For the menu operation to return the key state to that set in initial status, see “Returning to default state in function groupings” (page 324). Resizer Resizer allows you to apply DME-like effects such as image shrinking, magnification and movement, as well as change of the aspect ratio, to the processed key. The following functions are available. • Two-dimensional transformations of keys • Resizer interpolation settings • Resizer crop/border settings • Resizer effect settings (wide key border, drop shadow, edge enhance, mosaic, defocus, mask) Notes • The resizer function is supported on the MVS-8000G only. • The image of the key manipulated by resizer has a one-frame delay. • Some effects of resizer are different from what you would expect of DME effects. Restrictions on the use of effects There are restrictions on combined use of resizer effects themselves and that with DME wipes. For details, see “Impossibility of simultaneous use within the same keyer” (page 432). 58 Keys Relation between resizer and other effects You cannot apply DME effects to a key for which the resizer function is enabled. When one of the three functions – resizer, DME wipe and DME effects – is enabled, the other two are disabled. Chapter 1 MVS-8000 Functions Keys 59 Wipes Chapter 1 MVS-8000 Functions A wipe is a transition from the current video stream to a new video stream, using a wipe pattern. Changing the background by means of a wipe is referred to as a “background wipe,” and inserting or deleting a key with a wipe is termed a “key wipe.” There are two types of wipe: those that can be selected in a common transition, and those that can be selected in an independent key transition. For details of independent key transitions, see page 37. Types of Wipe Pattern The patterns that can be used for a wipe are divided into a number of groups, as follows. Note that only the standard wipe patterns can be used for an independent key transition. For wipe patterns, see “Wipe Pattern List” in Appendix (Volume 1) (page 560). Standard wipe patterns Patterns consisting of straight lines vertically, horizontally, or diagonally, and circular patterns. Enhanced wipes More complex shapes such as hearts, stars, and round corners. Rotary wipes These patterns involve rotation of the image about a point. Mosaic wipe pattern This divides the image into small tiles. Random and diamond dust wipe patterns These patterns consist of small random tiles, or fine particles. 60 Wipes Pattern Mix You can create a new pattern by combining two selected patterns (main and “sub”). Note Chapter 1 MVS-8000 Functions It is not possible to apply a pattern mix to an independent key transition. For details, see “Pattern Mix” (page 441). Types of pattern mix There are four ways in which patterns can be combined in a pattern mix, as follows. Mix: The effect of the sub pattern is applied to the main pattern, modifying the outline or nature of the main pattern. Positive NAM (+Nam): Creates a pattern with an outline which contains all points within the outlines of either of the main pattern and the sub pattern. Negative NAM (–Nam): Creates a pattern with an outline which contains all points within the outlines of both of the main pattern and the sub pattern. Mix Positive NAM Negative NAM Morphing: As the transition progresses, the pattern morphs from the main pattern, through the “mix” combination, to the sub pattern. Wipes 61 Main pattern at 100% Sub pattern at 100% 0.00 Chapter 1 MVS-8000 Functions Start value Parameter settings Start: Point in the course of the transition at which the main pattern is at 100% End: Point in the course of the transition at which the sub pattern is at 100% Transition (0.00 - 100.00) Mix combination of main and sub patterns already begun Mix ends during transition, which ends with sub pattern at 100% End value 90.00 –10.00 Begins with main pattern at 100% Ends with sub pattern at 100% Mix begins after transition starts Transition ends with main and sub patterns still in mix combination 0.00 10.00 100.00 100.00 110.00 • A value of 0.00 corresponds to the beginning of the transition, and a value of 100.00 to the end of the transition. • A negative Start value signifies that the main and sub patterns are already combined when the transition starts. • An End value of 100.00 or more signifies that the main and sub patterns are still combined when the transition complete. • If the Start and End values are the same, the main and sub patterns are interchanged instantaneously at the corresponding point in the transition. • If End is less than Start, as the transition proceeds, it changes from the sub pattern to the main pattern. Dust mix You can apply the effect of a diamond dust wipe to a selected pattern. You can also apply the diamond dust wipe effect to the pattern resulting from a pattern mix. (See “Pattern Mix” (page 441).) When the pattern mix function is off, turning dust mix on results in the main pattern and the diamond dust pattern being mixed. This state is the same as a pattern mix when the diamond dust pattern is selected for the sub pattern. 62 Wipes Main and sub modifier link function When carrying out a pattern mix, it is possible to link the modifier settings for the main pattern and sub pattern. There are two modes for this function. Chapter 1 MVS-8000 Functions FULL LINK (fully linked) mode In this mode, all modifier settings are the same for the main pattern and sub pattern. Changing the modifier settings for one pattern automatically changes the settings for the other. SEMI LINK (semi-linked) mode Only the parameter settings of the modifiers are linked. The modifier on/off settings are not linked. When the parameter values for the modifiers of the main pattern and sub pattern are different, then after this link mode is selected, changing the value of a parameter for one pattern changes the value of the parameter for the other pattern to maintain the same difference between the two. Note When carrying out a wipe transition using a pattern mix, it is recommended that you set the modifier link function to “FULL LINK” mode. If the link function is off, or SEMI LINK mode is selected, the desired effect may not be obtained at the start or end of the transition. Wipe Pattern Variation and Modifiers You can carry out a wipe with the following variations and modifications to the selected pattern. For details, see “Setting Wipe Modifiers” (page 443). Wipes 63 Direction You can specify the direction of the wipe: the regular direction is referred to as “normal,” and the other direction as “reverse.” You can also select alternating directions each time the transition is completed (normal/reverse mode). Chapter 1 MVS-8000 Functions Normal Reverse Split This splits the pattern, making the parts of the wipe move in opposite directions. Split off Split on The parameter Split No specifies the number of splits. The parameter Spacing specifies the spacing between adjacent patterns. 64 Wipes Edge You can apply a border to the pattern, soften the edges, or soften the applied border. In an independent key transition, only the “Soft” setting is available. Chapter 1 MVS-8000 Functions Soft Border Soft border Border: You can adjust the border width. Soft: You can adjust the edge softness. Soft border: You can adjust the border width, and the softness of the inner and outer edges of the border. When a border or soft border is selected, the signal filling the border is called edge fill. For the edge fill, you can use a matte generated by the dedicated color matte generator, or the signal selected on the utility 2 bus. A matte can include color 1 and color 2, and a combination of the two colors (a “color mix”). Positioner You can move the wipe pattern to any position. Positioner off Positioner on • The parameter H Position controls the horizontal position of the pattern. A negative value moves the pattern to the left, and a positive value moves the pattern to the right. • The parameter V Position controls the vertical position of the pattern. A negative value moves the pattern down, and a positive value moves the pattern up. Rotation You can rotate the pattern. There are three rotation modes, as follows. Wipes 65 Angle This carries out a wipe with the pattern in a fixed angle. Chapter 1 MVS-8000 Functions Angle off Angle on The parameter Angle determines the angle of pattern rotation. A value of –100.00 of the parameter Angle corresponds to one whole turn counterclockwise; a value of +100.00 corresponds to one whole turn clockwise. With a value of 0.00 there is no rotation. Speed Through the course of the transition the wipe pattern rotates at a fixed specified speed. The parameter Speed determines the speed of pattern rotation. A value of –100.00 of the parameter Speed corresponds to one turn per second counterclockwise; a value of +100.00 corresponds to one turn per second clockwise. With a value of 0.00 the pattern is stationary. Magnitude Through the course of the transition the wipe pattern rotates through the specified angle. 66 Wipes The parameter Angle determines an angle of pattern inclination at the beginning of the transition. • A value of –100.00 corresponds to the angle rotated one whole turn counterclockwise. • A value of +100.00 corresponds to the angle rotated one whole turn clockwise. • With a value of 0.00 the pattern is stationary. Chapter 1 MVS-8000 Functions The parameter Magnitude determines an angle of pattern rotation through the course of the transition. • A value of –200.00 corresponds to a rotation of two turns counterclockwise. • A value of +200.00 corresponds to a rotation of two turns clockwise. • With a value of 0.00 the pattern is stationary. Aspect ratio You can freely change the aspect ratio of the pattern. Aspect off Aspect on A negative value of the parameter Aspect stretches the pattern vertically; a positive value stretches the pattern horizontally. Pattern replication (“Multi”) The same pattern can be repeated horizontally and vertically or both, up to 63 times. You can also change the orientation of alternate copies, or change the position. “Multi” off “Multi” on Wipes 67 • The parameter H Multi determines the number of pattern replications horizontally, and the parameter V Multi determines the number of pattern replications vertically. • The parameter Shift determines the manner of replication. At a value of –100.00, the pattern of the adjacent odd-numbered column on the left lines up with the central coordinate horizontally. At a value of +100.00, the pattern of the adjacent odd-numbered column on the right lines up with the central coordinate horizontally. Chapter 1 MVS-8000 Functions For an independent key transition wipe, you can use the “Invert Type” parameter to select from the following four types of replication pattern. 1 2 3 4 1: All replications in the same orientation 2: Even-numbered rows staggered 3: Even-numbered columns and rows inverted 4: Even-numbered columns and rows inverted, and even-numbered rows staggered Pairing This slits the pattern into multiple strips, making it like a venetian blind. Pairing off Pairing on H: Create slits in the horizontal direction. V: Create slits in the vertical direction. • The parameter Width determines the width of the slits. • The parameter H Offset determines the spacing in the horizontal direction. If a negative value is set, the even-numbered pairs of strip and slit move to the left, and the odd-numbered pairs move to the right. The value –100.00 represents the maximum movement. If a positive value is set, the even-numbered pairs of strip and slit move to 68 Wipes Chapter 1 MVS-8000 Functions the right, and the odd-numbered pairs move to the left. The value +100.00 represents the maximum movement. • The parameter V Offset determines the spacing in the vertical direction. If a negative value is set, the even-numbered pairs of strip and slit move upward, and the odd-numbered pairs move downward. The value –100.00 represents the maximum movement. If a positive value is set, the even-numbered pairs of strip and slit move downward, and the odd-numbered pairs move upward. The value +100.00 represents the maximum movement. Modulation The pattern signal can be modulated, giving waves on the horizontal or vertical edges, or radially. The parameter Shape determines the form of the modulation. 1: sine wave, 2: triangular wave, 3: rectangular wave Note When using 1080PsF mode in an HD system, the modulation function is not available. Horizontal modulation This modulates the pattern, applying waviness in the horizontal direction to edges. The parameter Speed determines the speed of waves. A value of –100.00 generates the maximum downward speed of waves, and a value of +100.00 the maximum upward speed. Wipes 69 Vertical modulation This modulates the pattern, applying waviness in the vertical direction to edges. Chapter 1 MVS-8000 Functions The parameter Speed determines the speed of waves. A value of –100.00 generates the maximum leftward speed of waves, and a value of +100.00 the maximum rightward speed. Fringe This modulates the pattern, applying waviness in the radial direction to edges. The parameter Speed determines the speed of waves. A value of –100.00 generates the maximum counterclockwise speed of waves, and a value of +100.00 the maximum clockwise speed. Spring As the transition progresses, the edge of the pattern is subjected to barrel or pincushion distortion. Spring off 70 Wipes Spring on A negative parameter value produces pincushion distortion, and a positive value produces barrel distortion. Spiral This deforms the pattern spirally. Chapter 1 MVS-8000 Functions Spiral off Spiral on • The parameter Magnitude determines the size and direction of the spiral. A value of –100.00 represents the maximum movement in the counterclockwise direction, and a value of +100.00 represents the maximum movement in the clockwise direction. • The parameter Wave Speed determines the speed of the lateral waves. A value of –100.00 represents the maximum speed to the left, and a value of +100.00 represents the maximum speed to the right. Wipe Snapshots You can snapshot and save a wipe pattern together with the current settings of its modifiers and pattern limit in a dedicated register for recall when required. There are 10 wipe snapshot registers on each M/E bank and the PGM/PST bank. Use the Flexi Pad control block in each switcher bank or the Menu control block to save and recall wipe snapshots. (For details, see “Wipe Snapshots” (page 460).) For simple transitions (see page 371), there are eight wipe snapshot registers on each M/E bank and the PGM/PST bank. Wipe Modify Clear By a simple operation, you can return the wipe state to that set in initial status. For details of the menu operation to return the wipe state to that set in initial status, see “Returning to default state in function groupings” (page 324). Wipes 71 DME Wipes Chapter 1 MVS-8000 Functions A DME wipe is a wipe transition that uses a DME effect to change from one video image to the next. There are two types of DME wipe: those which can be selected for a normal transition, and those which can be selected for an independent key transition. For independent key transitions, see page 37. Note On the MVS-8000G, it is also possible to carry out a DME wipe on a key using the resizer (see page 58). Types of DME Wipe Pattern The patterns used for a DME wipe fall into two broad classes. Preset patterns: predetermined fixed patterns User programmable DME patterns: patterns which you can create using keyframe effects DME wipe execution mode and pattern numbers that can be used There are three DME wipe execution modes, depending on the number of DME channels available: one-channel mode, two-channel mode and threechannel mode. The pattern numbers that can be used in these modes are as follows. Execution mode Preset pattern numbers User programmable DME pattern that can be used numbers that can be used One-channel mode 1000 series 1901 to 1999 Two-channel mode 2000 series 2901 to 2999 Three-channel mode 3000 series 3901 to 3999 DME wipe pattern groups The patterns used in DME wipes fall into the following groups. For each group (excluding user programmable DMEs), for schematic patterns and numbers, see “DME Wipe Pattern List” in Appendix (Volume 1) (page 566). The black part of the pattern represents the old video, and the white part the new video, with the wipe taking place in the direction of the arrow. 72 DME Wipes DME Wipes Chapter 1 MVS-8000 Functions Slide: The new video slides in over the old video. (Pattern numbers: 1001 to 1008 (one-channel mode), 2601 to 2608 (twochannel mode)) Squeeze: The new video appears squeezed over the old video, and progressively expands to cover it. (Pattern numbers: 1021 to 1031 (one-channel mode), 2621 to 2628 (twochannel mode)) Split: The old video splits, and the new video appears in the gap. (Pattern numbers: 1011 to 1013 (one-channel mode)) Door: The new video moves like a door closing, and progressively covers the old video. (Pattern numbers: 1041 to 1048 (one-channel mode)) Flip tumble: The old video rotates about an axis and is replaced by the new video. During the transition, the signal from the utility 2 bus of the M/E bank appears as the background. (Pattern numbers: 1101 to 1104, 1109, 1110, 1121, 1122, 1124, 1131 to 1133, 1135 (one-channel mode)) Mirror: The new video appears over the old video as a mirror effect slides in all four directions. (Pattern numbers: 1355 to 1358 (one-channel mode)) Sphere: The new video appears wrapped around a sphere over the old video, then returns to the original video while unwrapping. (Pattern number: 1365 (one-channel mode)) Character trail: The new video appears with a trail over the old video. Next this gradually returns to the original from the periphery. (Pattern numbers: 1371, 1372 (one-channel mode)) Wave: The new video appears with a wave-like effect over the old video. Next this returns to the original video as the effect reduces. (Pattern numbers: 1378, 1379 (one-channel mode)) Ripple: The new video appears over the old video like outwardly moving ripples. (Pattern number: 1381 (one-channel mode)) Page turn: The old video moves like a page turning, and the new video appears behind it. (Pattern numbers: 1301 to 1313, 1315 to 1318, 1341 to 1345 (one-channel mode), 2701 to 2713, 2715 to 2718, 2741 to 2745 (two-channel mode)) Page roll: The new video unrolls like a scroll over the old video. This is a type of page turn. (Pattern numbers: 1321 to 1333, 1335 to 1338, 1346 to 1350 (one-channel mode), 2721 to 2733, 2735 to 2738, 2746 to 2750 (two-channel mode)) Frame in-out: Completed in two transitions. In the first transition, the new video appears, then on the second transition the new video goes out and the old video returns. (Pattern numbers: 1201 to 1208, 1221 to 1224 (one-channel mode), 2851 to 2854, 2861 to 2864 (two-channel mode)) 73 Chapter 1 MVS-8000 Functions Picture-in-picture: The one-channel mode and two-channel mode differ as follows. In one-channel mode, this completes in two transitions. In the first transition, the old video shrinks, and the new video appears behind it. In the second transition, the old video expands again until it is its original size. (Pattern number: 1251 (one-channel mode)) In two-channel mode, in the first half of the transition, the old video shrinks, and the new video appears. In the second half of the transition, the new video expands, and the old video disappears. You can move the pattern from the current position by a relative amount. During the transition, the signal from the utility 2 bus of the M/E bank appears as the background. (Pattern numbers: 2651 and 2652 (two-channel mode)) 2D trans: The new video appears over the old video, while undergoing expansion, two-dimensional rotation and translation. (Pattern numbers: 1051 to 1058, 1061 to 1064, 1068 (one-channel mode)) 3D trans: In one-channel mode, the new video appears over the old video, while undergoing expansion, three-dimensional rotation and translation. (Pattern numbers: 1071, 1072, 1074, 1076, 1077, 1088, 1091 to 1094 (onechannel mode)) In two-channel mode, the old video changes to the new video while both undergo expansion, three-dimensional rotation and translation. (Pattern numbers: 2631 to 2634, 2642, 2644 (two-channel mode)) Sparkle: The new video appears over the old video with a nonlinear effect applied, such as broken glass, explosion, or melt. Next this returns to the original video as the effect gradually reduces. (Pattern numbers: 1391, 1393, 1394, 1396, 1398, 1399 (one-channel mode)) Split slide: The new video appears in strip form while sliding interleaved in the opposite direction over the old video. (Pattern numbers: 1384 to 1389 (one-channel mode)) Mosaic: In the first half of the transition, a mosaic is gradually applied to the old video, then at the 50% point the inner image changes to the new video. In the second half, the mosaic effect on the new video is gradually reduced, returning to the original image at 100%. (Pattern number: 1701 (one-channel mode)) Defocus: In the first half of the transition, the old video is gradually defocused, then at the 50% point the inner image changes to the new video. In the second half, the defocusing effect on the new video is gradually reduced, returning to the original image at 100%. (Pattern number: 1702 (one-channel mode)) Brick: In two-channel mode, a brick such that the side surface is visible slides in over the old video, then rotates so that the new video can be seen. (Pattern numbers: 2801 to 2804, 2811 to 2814 (two-channel mode)) 74 DME Wipes In three-channel mode, a brick appears over the old video as the image is expanding and rotating, and switches to the new video. (Pattern number: 3601 (three-channel mode)) User programmable DME: Using a DME keyframe effect created with a keyframe operation, this executes a DME wipe. (Pattern numbers: 1901 to 1999 (one-channel mode), 2901 to 2999 (twochannel mode), 3901 to 3999 (three-channel mode)) Chapter 1 MVS-8000 Functions For details of creating keyframe effects, see “Creating User Programmable DME Patterns” (page 483). Notes • To use the Split, Page Turn, and Page Roll effects on the MVE-8000 requires the optional MKS-8830M Nonlinear Effect Board. • In an independent key transition, the following patterns can be used. Execution mode DME wipe patterns that can be used One-channel mode Slide, split, squeeze, door, 2D trans, 3D trans, frame in-out, page turn, page roll, mirror, sphere, character trail, wave, ripple, split slide, sparkle, user programmable DME Two-channel mode Page turn, page roll User programmable DME in transition mode For the transition mode set when creating a keyframe effect for a user programmable DME pattern, the following can be used. • Single: single transition mode • Flip tumble (Flip Tumble): flip tumble transition mode • Dual: dual transition mode • Picture-in-picture (PinP): one-channel and two-channel picture-in-picture transition mode • Compress: a type of picture-in-picture, in which the new image is the background, and the currently visible image shrinks, and then expands to its original size. (See example in the next item.) • Frame in-out (Frame I/O): frame in-out transition mode. When the first transition completes, if you move the position of the image, you can move it both horizontally and vertically. • Frame in-out H (Frame I/O H): a type of frame in-out mode, which is specified when creating a transition effect in the horizontal direction. The image movement is reflected at both the transition start point and end point. (See page 77.) The operation is carried out according to DME wipe patterns 1202, 1203, or 1204. • Frame in-out V (Frame I/O V): a type of frame in-out mode, which is specified when creating a transition effect in the vertical direction. The image movement is reflected at both the transition start point and end point. (See page 78.) DME Wipes 75 Transition mode “Compress” The change in the image when the transition mode is set to “Compress” is as follows, in comparison to the case of “Picture-in-picture.” • Example of the image change in the transition mode “Picture-inpicture” (one-channel mode) Chapter 1 MVS-8000 Functions First stroke Second stroke • Example of the image change in the transition mode “Compress” First stroke Second stroke Transition mode “frame in-out” In this mode, when the first transition has completed, you can move the image with the positioner in both horizontal and vertical directions, but the image position at the transition start point and end point does not change. The description is of an example of creating an effect such as the following. Transition start First transition completion point Transition end Image created by interpolation Background A Effect execution 76 DME Wipes Background B At the first transition completion point, if you move the image with the positioner, the transition appears as in the following figure. Transition start First transition completion point Transition end Chapter 1 MVS-8000 Functions Image created by interpolation Background A Background B Effect execution State before modification Transition mode “frame in-out H” This mode is specified when creating a transition effect in the horizontal direction. In this mode, when the first transition has completed, you can move the image with the positioner in both horizontal and vertical directions. The image at the transition start point and end point also moves. The description is of an example of creating an effect such as the following. Transition start First transition completion point Transition end Image created by interpolation Background A Effect execution Background B At the first transition completion point, if you move the image with the positioner, the transition appears as in the following figure. DME Wipes 77 Transition start First transition completion point Transition end Chapter 1 MVS-8000 Functions Image created by interpolation Background A Effect execution Background B State before modification Transition mode “frame in-out V” This mode is specified when creating a transition effect in the vertical direction. In this mode, in the state at completion of the first transition, you can move the image with the positioner in both horizontal and vertical directions. The image at the transition start point and end point also moves. The description is of an example of creating an effect such as the following. Transition start First transition completion point Transition end Image created by interpolation Effect execution Background A Background B 78 DME Wipes At the first transition completion point, if you move the image with the positioner, the transition appears as in the following figure. Transition start First transition completion point Transition end Chapter 1 MVS-8000 Functions Image created by interpolation Effect execution Background A Background B State before modification Signals forming part of the background for a DME wipe For a two-channel mode page turn, page roll, brick, frame in-out, and so on, the part of the pattern shown in gray (see Appendix (Volume 2)) is filled with the signal selected on the DME external video bus. For three-channel mode brick, the part of the pattern shown in dark gray is filled with the DME external video signal, and the light gray portion with the signal selected as follows. For a DME dedicated interface When the DME channel used is 3 or 4, the signal selected on the DME utility 1 bus. For channel 7 or 8, the signal selected on the DME utility 2 bus. For an MVE-8000A or MVE-9000 SDI interface Signal selected on the AUX bus assigned in the Engineering Setup >Switcher >Device Interface >DME Type Setting >DME SDI interface menu. (The AUX bus is determined by which DME channel is being used.) DME Wipes 79 Note For the SDI interface on the MVE-8000A or MVE-9000, in some cases the AUX bus is used in place of the DME external bus. For details, see “Interfacing With External Devices (Device Interface Menu)” in “Setup Relating to Switcher Processor” section of Chapter 16 (Volume2). Chapter 1 MVS-8000 Functions DME Wipe Pattern Variation and Modifiers You can modify the selected DME wipe pattern in the same way as an ordinary wipe pattern, as follows. For the setting operations, see “Setting DME Wipe Modifiers” (page 469). Direction: You can set the DME wipe direction to normal, reverse, or alternating normal/reverse (page 64), except for a key transition, which is always in normal/reverse mode. However, a key transition can only be specified when the following patterns are selected, and when other patterns are selected, this is fixed, as normal/reverse. Patterns: 1204, 1207, 1221 to 1224 Edge: You can apply a border or soft border (see page 65). In the case of those user programmable DME patterns for keys in which an edge has already been applied to the effect, the bahavior is as follows. • When the DME wipe edge setting is on, only part of the edge applied in the effect is enabled, and that portion can be adjusted (page 470). • When the DME wipe edge setting is off, the edge applied in the effect is enabled as is. Note In an MVS-8000 system, edge cannot be used for a key DME wipe. Positioner: You can move the DME wipe pattern or center of the effect to an arbitrary position. Using the position select function, you can also instantaneously move the pattern. • 1031 When this pattern number is selected, with the progress of the transition the pattern center automatically moves initially from the set position toward the center of the screen (see page 65). In other words, the effect obtained is the same as in a normal wipe with the positioner set to “AUTO CENTER”. • 1201 to 1208, 1221 to 1224, 1251 When these pattern numbers are selected, you can set the pattern position when the first transition completes. 80 DME Wipes Chapter 1 MVS-8000 Functions • 1381, 1391, 1393, 1394, 1396 When these pattern numbers are selected, you can set the center of the transition effect. • 2651, 2652 When these pattern numbers are selected, you can move the pattern for each channel, or with values relative to the current position the two channels simultaneously. • 2801 to 2804, 2811 to 2814 When the these pattern numbers are selected, you can set the vertical position as the brick slides in. • 2851 to 2854, 2861 to 2864 When these pattern numbers are selected, you can set the pattern position for each channel setting when the first transition completes. Pattern limit: You can restrict the range of the transition as desired. However, this is not available for a DME wipe in the independent key transition control block. For more details, see “Pattern Limit” (page 355). Size: This can only be used when one of the following pattern numbers is selected. • 1201 to 1208, 1221 to 1224, 1251 • 2651, 2652, 2851 to 2854, 2861 to 2864 You can set the size of the image. Crop: You can crop the image. It is also possible in 16:9 mode to crop both sides, to convert the image to a 4:3 aspect ratio. For the execution of a DME wipe crop transition, you can select from the following three possibilities. • Cut • Last 5% • Linear When [Last 5%] is selected, you can set the [Release Transition] as follows. • Last 30% • Last 5% • Off Notes • When pattern numbers 1701 and 1702 are selected, crop cannot be used. • The MVS-8000 does not support the [Last 5%] setting for [Release Transition]. Relation Between DME Wipes and Other Effects The relations between DME wipes and other effects are as follows. DME Wipes 81 Relation to ordinary wipes • DME wipes do not use the wipe generator built into the switcher. Therefore, during the execution of a DME wipe, you can still use a pattern produced by the wipe generator as the source for a pattern key or mask. • A DME wipe pattern cannot be used as the source for a pattern key or mask. Relation to processed keys Chapter 1 MVS-8000 Functions When using the DME for a processed key, if you select a DME wipe, an available DME is automatically allocated to the DME wipe. If all of the DME channels are in use, then it is not possible to select a DME wipe. If in a Setup menu a setting has been made for DME allocation, that Setup menu setting takes precedence (see “Setting the assignments of DME channels to use on the individual M/E banks” in Chapter 16 (Volume 2). Relation to resizer (for MVS-8000G only) When resizer is enabled, it is not possible to select a DME wipe. For the key 1 and key 2, or key 3 and key 4 combinations, if one is used for a dual resizer effect, the other key cannot be used for a DME wipe. Number of DME wipes that can be used simultaneously on a single M/E bank DME wipes can be used in five places, including the four independent key transitions. When the DME dedicated interface is used, a maximum of two DME wipes can be used simultaneously, and when the SDI interface is used, only one DME wipe can be used at one time. Note When combining the SDI interface with the dedicated interface, it may be possible to use up to three wipes simultaneously. For details, see “Interfacing With External Devices (Device Interface Menu)” in “Setup Relating to Switcher Processor” section of Chapter 16 (Volume2). DME Wipe Snapshots You can snapshot and save a DME wipe pattern together with the current settings of its modifiers and pattern limit in a dedicated register for recall when required. There are 10 DME wipe snapshot registers for each of the M/E and P/P banks. 82 DME Wipes To save and recall these registers, use the Flexi Pad control block in each switcher bank or the Menu control block. (See “DME Wipe Snapshots” (page 482).) In the case of a simple transition system, there are eight DME wipe snapshot registers for each switcher bank. Chapter 1 MVS-8000 Functions DME Wipe Modify Clear By a simple operation, you can return the DME wipe state to that set in initial status. For details of the menu operation to return the DME wipe state to that set in initial status, see “Returning to default state in function groupings” (page 324). Resizer DME wipes Using the resizer, you can carry out key DME wipes. Note This function is supported by the MVS-8000G. DME wipe patterns available for resizer DME wipe You can use the following patterns of the DME wipe pattern one-channel mode that can be used in a resizer DME wipe. (7000-series numbers) • Slide (pattern numbers: 7001 to 7008) • Squeeze (pattern numbers: 7021 to 7031) • frame in-out (pattern numbers: 7201 to 7208, 7221 to 7224) Relation between resizer DME wipes and other effects The following relations hold between resizer DME wipes and other effects. Relation with processed keys It is not possible to select a resizer DME wipe for a key for which processed key is enabled. Relation with resizer A resizer DME wipe cannot be used for a key for which resizer is enabled. Additionally, a resizer DME wipe cannot be used for a key paired with a key for which the dual resizer effect is enabled. Paired keys refer to the DME Wipes 83 combinations of key 1 and key 2, or key 3 and key 4. For example, when a dual resizer effect is enabled for key 1, a resizer DME wipe cannot be used for key 2. Chapter 1 MVS-8000 Functions 84 DME Wipes Frame Memory Overview Chapter 1 MVS-8000 Functions Frame memory is a function whereby a frame of input video can be frozen and written to memory, for further use as material for editing. You can also play recorded frame memory clips (movies). Frame capacity The maximum number of images that can be written to memory is as follows. MVS-8000 system HD system: 58 frames (88 frames in 720P/59.94 format) SD system: 222 frames MVS-8000A system and MVS-8000G system HD system: (Without ancillary data) Video format Memory capacity 1080i/50 Approx. 1000 frames 1080i/59.94 Approx. 1000 frames 1080i/60 Approx. 1000 frames 1080PsF/24 Approx. 1000 frames 1080PsF/25 Approx. 1000 frames 1080PsF/29.97 Approx. 1000 frames 1080PsF/30 Approx. 1000 frames 720P/50 Approx. 2300 frames 720P/59.94 Approx. 2300 frames (With ancillary data) Video format Memory capacity 1080i/50 Approx. 700 frames 1080i/59.94 Approx. 800 frames 1080i/60 Approx. 800 frames 1080PsF/23.976 Approx. 600 frames 1080PsF/24 Approx. 600 frames 1080PsF/25 Approx. 700 frames Frame Memory 85 Video format Memory capacity 1080PsF/29.97 Approx. 800 frames 1080PsF/30 Approx. 800 frames 720P/50 Approx. 1400 frames 720P/59.94 Approx. 1700 frames Chapter 1 MVS-8000 Functions SD system: (Without ancillary data) Video format Memory capacity 480i/59.94 Approx. 5600 frames 576i/50 Approx. 4800 frames (With ancillary data) Video format Memory capacity 480i/59.94 Approx. 4700 frames 576i/50 Approx. 3900 frames Note For the MVS-8000A and MVS-8000G, up to two frame memory boards can be installed (MKS-8440A for the MVS-8000A, MKS-8442G for the MVS8000G). The above-stated maximum number applies when one frame memory board is installed. When two boards are installed, the figures are doubled, but of the two boards only one can be used for frame memory clips. Note that for the MVS-8000/8000SF, MVS-8000ASF and MVS-8000GSF, it is not possible to install two frame memory boards. For details of operations, see “Still Image Operations” (page 490). Types of image and terminology used The following types of image are handled in frame memory. Freeze image: An input image that has been frozen, but not saved to memory. Still image: A freeze frame that has been saved to memory as a file. Each file (still file) holds just one still image. Frame memory clip: A clip consists of a sequence of still images, which appears as a movie on playback. In this manual this is also referred to simply as a “clip.” The files (still files) constituting clips are referred to as a “clip file.” When the above distinctions are not being made, an image is simply referred to as an “image.” 86 Frame Memory About extended clips When two frame memory boards (MKS-8440A for the MVS-8000A, MKS8442G for the MVS-8000G) are installed, one is dedicated to clips. Such clips held in a frame memory board are called “extended clips.” Use of frame memory Chapter 1 MVS-8000 Functions There are eight frame memory channels, FM1 to FM8, and each channel independently allows a freeze image to be saved or recalled. By allocating FM1 to FM8 to cross-point buttons you can use the still image output or clip output from each channel as input material. Note On the MVS-8000A, an extended clip can only be recalled from FM1 or FM2. It is not possible to recall from FM3 to FM8. Note that this restriction does not apply to the MVS-8000G. Correspondence between input and output There are two buses for capturing frame memory material: the frame memory source 1 bus and the frame memory source 2 bus. These input buses are used by allocation to one of the pairs of output, FM1&2, FM3&4, FM5&6, and FM7&8. You can freeze a frame in each channel separately, or freeze in the two channels simultaneously. The source buses allocated to FM1 to FM8 are as follows. Input Frame memory source bus 1 Frame memory source bus 2 Output FM1 FM2 FM3 FM4 FM5 FM6 FM7 FM8 Pair mode By enabling the pair mode, you can link FM1 and FM2, FM3 and FM4, FM5 and FM6, and FM7 and FM8. For example, when a freeze or image processing is carried out on FM1, the same operation is carried out on FM2. The same applies to the other pairs. When a pair of images are captured in pair mode, the image frozen in FM1 (3, 5, or 7) is referred to as the main file and the other frozen in FM2 (4, 6, or 8) is referred to as the sub file. Frame Memory 87 Pair files and single files A file that can be recalled in pair mode is termed a “pair file.” A pair file can be created by setting pair mode and capturing an image, or by using the coupling function (see page 94) to combine two single files. A file other than a pair file is termed a “single file.” A single file can be created by switching off pair mode and capturing an image, or by using the separation function (see page 94) to split a pair file. Chapter 1 MVS-8000 Functions Operation modes The frame memory has the following operation mode. V/K mode: When the pair mode is active, the key signal is automatically selected on frame memory source bus 2. This is convenient for handling the video and key signals together in frame memory. For example, when you select a video signal on frame memory source bus 1, the key signal assigned to it is automatically selected on frame memory source bus 2. You can also use the signal automatically selected on frame memory source bus 2 as a key signal when processing keyframe memory 1. To change the pair mode or operation mode, use the Frame Memory menu. Frame memory folders Still images and clips can be managed in a maximum of twelve groups. Such a group is called a “frame memory folder.” Folders can be added or deleted, and can be given a name of up to 8 characters. Notes • This function is not supported on the MVS-8000. • When the system is powered off, the folder names are deleted. The folder names need to be saved on media. • The following names cannot be used for folders. Flash1, Flash2 CON, PRN, AUX, CLOCK$, NUL, COM0, COM1, COM2, COM3, COM4, COM5, COM6, COM7, COM8, COM9 LPT0, LPT1, LPT2, LPT3, LPT4, LPT5, LPT6, LPT7, LPT8, LPT9 A folder named “Default” is provided, and this folder cannot be renamed or deleted. • Still images and clips in different frame memory folders cannot have the same name. 88 Frame Memory Still Image File Functions Chapter 1 MVS-8000 Functions The frame memory functions provides the following still image file functions. • Freezing an input image • Saving a still image • Recalling a still image • Processing an image • Image output • Continuously capturing images (record) • Recalling a continuous sequence of images (animation) Capturing an input image (freeze) As the input material for the frame memory, you can use the signal selected on the frame memory source bus. For this signal you can use video processing (video levels or hue value adjustment) or masking. Allocating a frame memory source bus signal to one of FM1 to FM8, then carrying out a freeze captures a still image in the corresponding frame memory output image, and saves it in temporary memory. For a freeze, an image can be captured either as video frame (a “frame freeze”) or a video field (“field freeze”). Note When the system is powered off, any freeze images written to temporary memory are lost. Saving a still image (store) You can save an image in temporary memory which has been placed with the freeze function as a file in memory. You can save a single image in a single file and apply a name of up to eight characters to the file. Note The following names cannot be used: CON, PRN, AUX, CLOCK$, NUL, COM0, COM1, COM2, COM3, COM4, COM5, COM6, COM7, COM8, COM9 LPT0, LPT1, LPT2, LPT3, LPT4, LPT5, LPT6, LPT7, LPT8, LPT9 When the system is powered off, all the files saved in memory are erased. Freeze and store mode When this mode is set to On, the freeze and store operations occur simultaneously. You can set it to On in the Frame Memory >Still >Freeze/Store menu (see page 498). This function is not supported on the MVS-8000. Frame Memory 89 Recalling a still image (recall) You can recall an image file saved in memory, and allocate to any of the FM1 to FM8 outputs. Processing an image Chapter 1 MVS-8000 Functions You can combine the background image (a still image file allocated to any of FM1 to FM8, a freeze image written to temporary memory, or a black signal) and the input signal. The following types of processing are available. Pattern key: Using the signal from a dedicated pattern generator, you can cut out the background image and insert the signal selected on the frame memory source bus or a color matte signal. You can adjust the size and position of the pattern, and add modifiers. External key: When processing an image in FM1 (3, 5, 7), you can use the signal selected on the frame memory source bus 2 to cut out the background image, and fill with the signal selected on the frame memory source bus 1, or a color matte signal. When processing an image in FM2 (4, 6, 8), you can use the signal selected on the frame memory source bus 2 to cut out the background image, and fill with a color matte signal (always white). Note An external key can only be used when the pair mode is enabled (see page 87). MIX: Mix the background image with the signal selected on the frame memory source bus or color matte signal. The mix ratio can be set. NAM: Non-additive mix the background image with the signal selected on the frame memory source bus or color matte signal. Image output Moving the output image (reposition function) For up to two channels of FM1 to FM8 (one from FM1, FM3, FM5 and FM7 and the other from FM2, FM4, FM6 and FM8), you can move the output image with respect to the screen. The area of the screen around the image that has been moved is filled with black. There are two ways of carrying out this repositioning. Normal mode: Movement in the horizontal direction is in two-pixel increments. Black and white mode: Movement in the horizontal direction is in one-pixel increments, and for each pixel moved the color is inverted. 90 Frame Memory Note It is not possible to save an image moved with the reposition function directly to frame memory. Chapter 1 MVS-8000 Functions Fixing the output image selection (lock function) For the output of each of FM1 to FM8, this fixes the image at the current output. When this lock is enabled, even if the output is recalled in a snapshot or keyframe, the images output to FM1 to FM8 are preserved. Continuously capturing still images (record) You can continuously capture (freeze) a sequence of input video frames and store the sequence of the still images over a specified time interval. The name of each image recorded in this way consists of a first character string followed by a second string. First character string: A common part of name assigned to all the still images captured in one record operation. This string includes a maximum of four characters, which can be specified using a menu before carrying out the capture. The first string is automatically used as the clip name when the images are treated as a frame memory clip. Second character string: A four-digit number (0000 or greater), which is incremented each time a still image is captured. Notes • When using the record function to continuously capture frames, it is not possible to use the mask function. • On the MVS-8000, the image file name is “anmxxyyy” (“anm” is constant, “xx” is a two-digit number from 00 to 99 incremented by 1 for ever recording operation, and “yyy” is a three-digit number from 000 to 999, incremented by 1 for each captured image). Recalling a continuous sequence of still images (animation) You can use a continuous sequence of images captured with the record function as keyframes to create an effect. By executing this effect you can recall the continuous sequence (animation). Notes • For example, to create an effect using FM1, FM1 must be assigned to a user region. (For details of user region settings, see “Settings for Switcher Configuration (Config Menu)” in Chapter 16 (Volume 2).) • To execute the effect, you must assign the user region to which FM1 is assigned to a region selection button in the numeric keypad control block. (For details of assigning to region selection buttons in the numeric keypad Frame Memory 91 control block, see “Overall Control Panel Settings (Config Menu)” in Chapter 16 (Volume 2).) In the Frame Memory menu, effect creation follows the image file names. Of the eight characters in the file names, if files have the same characters except for the last three characters they are treated as an image file group, and the effect is created with the last three (numeric) characters in sequence. Chapter 1 MVS-8000 Functions Note When creating the effect in pair mode (see page 87), the files used must be main files and sub files with the same last three (numeric) characters in the file name. Frame Memory Clip Function The frame memory clip function is not supported on the MVS-8000. What is a “frame memory clip”? Movies can be read into frame memory, and recalled and played back. A movie held in frame memory is called a “frame memory clip.” A frame memory clip can be named using up to four characters. (For details of frame memory clip names, see “Continuously capturing still images (record)” (page 91).) Ancillary data In a frame memory clip, in addition to the video image, you can also record and play back ancillary data which can be used as embedded audio (MVS-8000A and MVS-8000G only). To record the ancillary data, in the Setup menu the frame memory saving mode must be set to “save with ancillary data” (see “Saving a frame memory clip including ancillary data” in Chapter 16 (Volume 2)). Notes • With this setting, the saving mode for still images also changes to “save with ancillary data,” but when playing back a still image the ancillary data is never played. • When you change the saving mode, the frame memory is initialized, and any existing recorded frame memory data is lost. When the frame memory saving mode is set to “save with ancillary data,” the following ancillary data status information is added to a frame memory clip. 92 Frame Memory • Disable(d) In this state the ancillary data is not played. This is the status when the [Ancillary Enable] button in the Frame Memory >Clip menu is set to Off. • Enable(d) In this state, ancillary data is present, and can be played back. This is the status when the [Ancillary Enable] button in the Frame Memory >Clip menu is set to On. This is the status after a clip recording operation. Chapter 1 MVS-8000 Functions This status information is saved in a file, and is followed when the file is recalled. Frame memory clip settings For frame memory clips, you can make the following settings using a menu or device control block (trackball/search dial/joystick). • Start point • Stop point • Loop On/Off The above settings can be saved in a snapshot register as snapshot attributes, and recalled. Note On the MVS-8000A, it is only possible to replay extended clips as output from FM1 or FM2. Clip transitions A frame memory clip (movie) is played back, linked to a transition using a mix (dissolve) or wipe. Note The clip transition function is only supported by the MVS-8000A/8000G. The following restrictions apply to the use of a clip transition. • Key frame capture is not possible. • It is not possible to apply a pattern limit. • Transitions executed in two strokes, such as a preset color mix with the stroke mode set to Normal, or a DME wipe with a picture-in-picture pattern, will not execute correctly. • It is not possible to vary the transition rate of a clip transition. • Transition preview cannot be used. • The clip transition settings cannot be copied or swapped among the M/E and PGM/PST banks. • No instantaneous state of a clip transition can be saved as a snapshot. Frame Memory 93 • When recalling a snapshot including a clip transition during executing another clip transition, the follow-on transition does not operate properly. Be sure to complete the transition before recalling a snapshot. Image Data Management Chapter 1 MVS-8000 Functions Frame memory folder editing Create: Create a new folder. Delete: Specify a folder and delete it. You can also delete all folders together in a single operation. Rename folder: Rename a specified folder. File management The following operations are possible on files created to hold images. Delete: Specify a file to be deleted. It is also possible to delete all files simultaneously in a single operation. Rename file: Change the name of the specified file. Move file: Move a file from one folder to another. Backup: Save all files to hard disk in a single operation. Restore: Restore the files which have been backed up. Pair file processing Couple: You can create a pair file from two single still image files or clip files. Separate: You can also separate a pair file into two single still image files or clip files. Note This function is not supported on the MVS-8000. Image Data Transfer Files, including ancillary data, can be transferred between such devices as a hard disk and memory card. In the File menu, files can be saved and recalled. It is possible to import images such as BMP files or convert frame memory files into a different format and save them in an external device. For details, see Chapter 17 “Files” (Volume 2). 94 Frame Memory Notes on transferring multiple still images together • Transferring all of the still image files within frame memory together fails if the capacity of the memory card is too small to hold all of the images. In this case, replace with a larger capacity memory card, or delete still images until saving is possible. The following table roughly shows the relation between memory card capacity and number of images that can be saved. 256 MB Number of images that can be saved SD system HD system a) 214 46 Chapter 1 MVS-8000 Functions Memory card capacity a) For all available signal formats except 720P Note that when transferring to the hard disk, there is ample capacity, so that problems such as this do not occur. • If you cancel the operation during a data transfer between frame memory and hard disk or memory card, then an image which was not completely transferred will not be reproducible. Avoid canceling such operations. • When loading a still image file from hard disk or memory card, if [Freeze Enable] in the Freeze menu is on, the loaded still image file may sometimes be overwritten by the frame memory input image. To avoid this when loading a file, ensure that [Freeze Enable] is turned off. Notes on saving or recalling a frame memory still image for or by a snapshot/keyframe • The saving and recalling of frame memory images for snapshots and keyframes is restricted to the still images or clips on the eight frame memory outputs. The settings made for frame memory images in the Freeze menu, Composite menu or other menus do not apply to snapshots or keyframes. • To reproduce a frame memory still image or a clip of them by recalling a snapshot or keyframe, you must have the same images that were present in the frame memory when you saved the snapshot or keyframe. Therefore, when saving a snapshot or keyframe using frame memory, you must also save the images to a storage media such as the hard disk. Note on transferring ancillary data Ancillary data is recorded when the frame memory saving mode is set to “save with ancillary data,” and can be saved to an external storage device such as a hard disk or memory card, and recalled. However, the ancillary data can only be saved or recalled when the frame memory saving mode is set to “save with ancillary data,” and when ancillary data is present in the saved or recalled frame memory file, and moreover when the system signal format is the same as the signal format in the file. Frame Memory 95 External Hard Disk Drive Access Chapter 1 MVS-8000 Functions In an MVS-8000A system and MVS-8000G system, you can connect a hard disk drive to the IEEE1394 port of the switcher processor, to carry out the following operations. Format: Format the hard disk. Backup: Batch saving of files from frame memory to the hard disk. Restore: Restoring frame memory from files saved on the hard disk. 96 Frame Memory Color Backgrounds The dedicated generators generate color signals, and these can be used as color backgrounds in video effects. Chapter 1 MVS-8000 Functions Color background selection There are two color backgrounds, color background 1 and color background 2, which you use by assigning to cross-point buttons. Color combinations (“color mix”) The color generators can output the result of combining two colors, which are color 1 and color 2. Using a pattern from a dedicated pattern generator, color 1 and color 2 can be combined in the boundary region, forming a color gradation. This is referred to in the menu system as “color mix.” You can also apply modifiers to the selected pattern. When the “color mix” function is not used, the result is a flat color, and color 1 is always output. For details of operations, see “Color Background Setting Operations” (page 538). Color Backgrounds 97 Copy and Swap Chapter 1 MVS-8000 Functions You can copy and swap the settings among the M/E-1 to M/E-3, and PGM/PST banks or between keyers. The following settings can be copied or swapped. • Overall settings for the M/E-1 to M/E-3, and PGM/PST banks • Keyer settings • Wipe settings in a transition control block • Wipe settings in an independent key transition control block • DME wipe settings in a transition control block • DME wipe settings in an independent key transition control block • Matte data (color 1, color 2, and how to compose them) • Color settings • DME channel settings • Format converter input settings (copy only) • Format converter output settings (copy only) You can carry out copy operations with a simple button operation. Swap operations, and copy operations on DME data can only be done with a menu operation. For details of the operations, see Chapter 9 “Copy and Swap” (page 543) and for color correction settings, “Copy and Swap Operations” in Chapter 19 (Volume 2). M/E copy and M/E swap You can copy and swap the overall bank settings among the M/E-1 to M/E-3, and PGM/PST banks. Target bank Target data M/E-1 M/E-2 M/E-3 PGM/PST Bank settings excluding the following data items: • Setup data • Flexi Pad settings • Snapshots • Keyframe effects • Key snapshots • Key memory Note If a DME is being used on the source M/E bank, then if for example there are insufficient DME channels, it may not be possible to select the DME. There are no such restrictions on a swap. 98 Copy and Swap Keyer copy and keyer swap You can carry out copy and swap operations among the 16 keyers listed in the following table. Target keyer Target data M/E-1 M/E-2 M/E-3 Keys 1 to 4 PGM/PST Downstream keys 1 to 4 Key settings excluding the following data items: • Setup data • Key snapshots • Key memory Chapter 1 MVS-8000 Functions Target bank Note If a DME is being used on the source keyer for a copy or either keyer for a swap, then if for example there are insufficient DME channels, or the limit on using DME channels within an M/E bank is exceeded, it may not be possible to select the DME. Wipe copy and wipe swap You can copy and swap the wipe settings among the banks listed in the following table. Target bank Target data M/E-1 M/E-2 M/E-3 PGM/PST Wipe settings. It is not, however, possible to carry out copy or swap involving independent key transition wipe settings. Wipe copy and wipe swap in the independent key transition control block You can copy and swap the wipe settings among the 16 keyers listed in the following table. Target bank Target keyer Target data M/E-1 M/E-2 M/E-3 Keys 1 to 4 PGM/PST Downstream keys 1 to 4 Wipe settings in the independent key transition control block. It is not, however, possible to copy or swap wipe settings to or from an external downstream keyer. DME wipe copy and DME wipe swap You can copy and swap the DME wipe settings among the banks listed in the following table. Copy and Swap 99 Target bank Target data M/E-1 M/E-2 M/E-3 PGM/PST DME wipe settings. It is not, however, possible to carry out copy or swap involving independent key transition DME wipe settings. Chapter 1 MVS-8000 Functions DME wipe copy and DME wipe swap in the independent key transition control block You can copy and swap the DME wipe settings among the 16 keyers listed in the following table. Target bank Target keyer Target data M/E-1 M/E-2 M/E-3 Keys 1 to 4 DME wipe settings in the independent key transition control block. PGM/PST Downstream keys 1 to 4 Matte data copy and swap You can copy or swap the matte data among the 38 color generators listed in the following table. Target bank Target keyer and data M/E-1 M/E-2 M/E-3 PGM/PST • Keys 1 to 4 • Downstream keys 1 to 4 Color background • Matte data for color background 1 • Matte data for color background 2 • Matte data for key fill • Matte data for key edge fill Matte data for wipe border edge Color data copy and swap You can copy or swap the color data among the 152 color generators listed in the following table. Target bank Target keyer and data M/E-1 M/E-2 M/E-3 PGM/PST • Keys 1 to 4 • Downstream keys 1 to 4 • Colors 1 and 2 for key fill • Colors 1 and 2 for key edge fill • “Zabton” color data Colors 1 and 2 for wipe border Color data for preset color mix 100 Copy and Swap Color background • Colors 1 and 2 for color background 1 • Colors 1 and 2 for color background 2 Frame memory • FM1 color • FM2 color Target bank Target keyer and data DME ch1 to ch8 • • • • • • • Background Border Sepia Light Shade Drop shadow (other than DME ch4 and DME ch8) Trail Chapter 1 MVS-8000 Functions DME channel copy and swap You can copy and swap the channel data among DME channels 1 to 4 or DME channels 5 to 8. It is not possible to copy or swap the channel data between DME channels 1 to 4 and DME channels 5 to 8. Copying format converter data On the MVS-8000G, you can copy data from one format converter input to another or from one output to another. Copy and Swap 101 Side Flags Overview Chapter 1 MVS-8000 Functions The term “side flags” refers to the areas to left and right of an image with aspect ratio 4:3 embedded within a 16:9 frame, when these areas are filled with a separate image selected from the utility 1 bus. (See following figure.) You can adjust the width of the side flag area. Image to fill the side flag areas (selected from utility 1 bus) Side flag area Input source with aspect ratio Turn the side flag function on Side flag area Note The side flag function is only supported on the MVS-8000A/8000G. Side Flag Settings To use the side flags, the following settings are required. 102 Side Flags Input source aspect ratio, auto side flags, and auto crop settings Aspect ratio 4:3 setting Set the input signal to aspect ratio 4:3. If set to 16:9, the side flags are disabled. Chapter 1 MVS-8000 Functions Auto side flag setting This function automatically applies side flags when a 4:3 signal is selected in the cross-point control block. Auto crop setting When carrying out a DME wipe, this function automatically crops the image during transition to 4:3. Adjusting the width of the side flag area You can set the left and right sides separately. For the operation for the above setting, see “Settings for Switcher Configuration (Config Menu)” in Chapter 16 (Volume 2). Side flag enable/disable setting Using the Misc menu or a button operation, you can enable or disable the side flags for the background bus of each of the M/E-1 to M/E-3 and PGM/PST banks. For more details, see “Side Flag Settings” (page 550). Assigning the side flag function to a cross-point button To switch the side flags on and off with a button operation, it is first necessary to assign [SIDE FLAG] to the rightmost cross-point buttons. For more details, see “Cross-Point Settings (Xpt Assign Menu)” in Chapter 16 (Volume 2). Wipe Action on Images With Side Flags When a wipe is carried out on an image with side flags, all wipe patterns can be used. The following illustration shows the action in a wipe. Side Flags 103 Wipe from a 4:3 image to a 16:9 image Side flag areas 16:9 image Chapter 1 MVS-8000 Functions 4:3 image (Side flags on) Wipe from a 4:3 image to another 4:3 image (when side flags are on for both images) Side flag areas 4:3 image (Side flags on) Side flag areas The circles indicate the position of the wipe pattern edge when the transition is half finished. DME Wipe Action for an Image With Side Flags When a DME wipe is carried out on an image with side flags, all wipe patterns can be used. Depending on the setting (On/Off) of [Auto Crop] in the Engineering Setup >Switcher >Config menu, the appearance of the 4:3 image changes. Notes • When using the MVE-9000/MVE-8000A through SDI interface with [Auto Crop] being off, side flags are not added to the new image during DME wipe. • For signals with the following DME wipe pattern selected on the DME external video bus (gray part shown in the pattern illustration), side flags are not applied when auto side flags are set to Off. – Two-channel page turn – Two-channel page roll 104 Side Flags – Two-channel frame in-out – Two-channel brick – Three-channel brick The following illustration shows the action in a DME wipe. DME wipe from a 4:3 image to a 16:9 image Chapter 1 MVS-8000 Functions Wipe action using slide (No. 1001) Side flag area Auto crop off Side flag areas Auto crop on 16:9 image 4:3 image (Side flags on) Side Flags 105 DME wipe from a 4:3 image to another 4:3 image (when side flags are on for both images) Wipe action using squeeze (No. 1031) Side flag areas a) Auto crop off Chapter 1 MVS-8000 Functions Side flag areas Side flag areas Auto crop on 4:3 image (Side flags on) 4:3 image (Side flags on) a) When using the MVE-9000/MVE-8000A through SDI interface, side flags are not added during a DME wipe. 106 Side Flags Video Process Chapter 1 MVS-8000 Functions The term “video process” is applied to adjustments to the luminance and hue of the input video signal. There are two types of adjustment, depending on the application: • Adjustment of an individual primary input signal • Image effects on a particular bus Note These types of adjustment may be carried out independently. However, since they are implemented by the same hardware, if the same signal is subjected to processing twice, there may be limitations on the range of effects obtained in the final result. Video Process Adjustments of a Primary Input Signal For each of primary inputs 1 to 80, you can switch video process adjustments on or off, and can adjust the parameters (Video Gain, Y Gain, C Gain, Hue Delay, and Black Level) in the Setup menu. The adjustments do not, however, apply to the output video on the MON (monitor) bus. For details of the settings, see “Signal Input Settings” in Chapter 16 (Volume 2). Video Process Adjustments on a Particular Bus Buses to which the adjustments apply For each of the following buses, you can switch video process adjustments on or off, and adjust the parameters. • Following buses in the M/E-1 to M/E-3, and PGM/PST banks – Key fill buses for keys 1 to 4 – Background A and background B buses – Utility 1 and utility 2 buses • Frame memory source 1 and frame memory source 2 buses • Aux 1 to 48 buses These settings also apply to keyframes and snapshots. Video Process 107 Making the adjustments Adjust VIDEO GAIN, Y GAIN, BLACK LEVEL, C GAIN, and HUE DELAY in the following menus. Applicable bus M/E-1 to M/E-3 banks Menu used for operation See page Chapter 1 MVS-8000 Functions Key fill buses for keys 1 to 4 M/E-1 to M/E-3 menus page 405 Background A and B buses Video Process menu page 557 Key fill buses for DSK1 to DSK4 PGM/PST menu page 405 Background A and B buses Video Process menu page 557 Frame memory source 1 and 2 buses Frame Memory menu page 498 Aux 1 to 48 buses AUX/MON menu page 555 Utility 1 and 2 buses PGM/PST bank Utility 1 and 2 buses Video Process Memory When using video process adjustments for an image effect on a bus, this function saves the final values for each pair number for the signals. The video process on/off setting is not saved. When you change the adjustments the values are automatically saved, and these last values are recalled when the pair number is selected. In other words, by switching video process memory on, regardless of the video process information for each bus, you can carry out video process adjustments for each input signal. The parameters saved are as follows. VIDEO GAIN, Y GAIN, BLACK LEVEL, C GAIN, HUE DELAY Switch the video process memory on or off in the Setup menu. For details of setting operations, see “Settings Relating to Keys, Wipes and Frame Memory (Key/Wipe/FM Menu)” in Chapter 16 (Volume 2). 108 Video Process Digital Multi Effects (DME) Chapter 1 MVS-8000 Functions DME allows you to add three-dimensional effects such as image movement, rotation, magnification and shrinking, as well as a wide variety of special effects. DME is the general name for all of these effects. You can use up to eight channels as dedicated DME channels. Each channel can be used on its own or in combination with other channels, which allows you to create advanced effects with more complexity. Functions that can be used differ with the models of DME. For details, see “Functional Differences With Models of DME” in the Appendix (Volume 2). MVE-8000A Multi Format DME Processor The MVE-8000A is a “Digital Multi Effects” with multi-format support. For the MVE-8000A, a dedicated interface (MKE-9020M) is available to enable the MVE-8000A to be used in an MVS-8000 series switcher. Installation of an optional MKE-8021A Input/Output Board in the MVE8000A provides an SDI interface. Note When using the SDI interface, the following operations are required. • Setting the interface between the MVE-8000A and the switcher. See “Setting the interface between the DME and the switcher” in Chapter 16 (Volume 2). • Setting the input signals from the switcher to the MVE-8000A (AUX bus outputs), and signals returned to the switcher as primary inputs (reentry inputs). However, “Ext In” cannot be set for the DME channel. See “Setting the AUX bus output and reentry input” in Chapter 16 (Volume 2). • Selecting the combiner channels not in the key control block, but in the Global Effect menu. See “Combiner Settings” in Chapter 11 (Volume 2). MVE-9000 Multi Format DME Processor The MVE-9000 is a “Digital Multi Effects” with multi-format support. Two interfaces are available for the MVE-9000: a dedicated interface (MKE9020M) for use in an MVS-8000 series switcher, and an SDI interface (MKE9021M). Digital Multi Effects (DME) 109 Note When using the SDI interface, the following operations are different from when using the dedicated interface. • Setting the input signals from the switcher to the MVE-9000 (AUX bus outputs), and signals returned to the switcher as primary inputs (reentry inputs). Chapter 1 MVS-8000 Functions See “Setting the AUX bus output and reentry input” in Chapter 16 (Volume 2). • Selecting the combiner channels not in the key control block, but in the Global Effect menu. See “Combiner Settings” in Chapter 11 (Volume 2). Three-Dimensional Transformations Transformation is the process of placing a video image in a three-dimensional DME coordinate space and subjecting it to manipulations such as movement, rotation, magnification or shrinking. Three-dimensional coordinate space Source coordinate space and target coordinate space Images are placed in one of two types of coordinate space: source coordinate space and target coordinate space. • The source coordinate space is a three-dimensional coordinate space with reference to the image itself. The x- and y-axes are defined parallel to the plane of the image, and the z-axis is defined perpendicular to the plane of the image. When you move the image, the coordinate axes also move. • The target coordinate space is a three-dimensional coordinate space with reference to the output monitor screen. The x- and y-axes are defined parallel to the plane of the monitor screen, and the z-axis is defined perpendicular to the plane of the monitor screen. The coordinates do not move even if the image moves. 110 Digital Multi Effects (DME) Y Z Y X X Z Chapter 1 MVS-8000 Functions Source coordinate space Target coordinate space Source coordinate space and target coordinate space For example, as shown in the following figure, the image moves in a different direction when you move it along the x-axis of the source coordinate space and along the x-axis of the target coordinate space. Source coordinate space Target coordinate space Movement along the x-axes of the source coordinate space and target coordinate space Local coordinate space and global coordinate space The coordinates of an individual DME channel are called its local coordinate space. The coordinates common to all channels are called the global coordinate space. By switching from local to global coordinate space, you can add new movement to the movement of images in individual channels, and also apply transformation effects to multiple channels that have been combined by Global effects (page 152). Digital Multi Effects (DME) 111 Rotation around y-axis in local coordinate space Chapter 1 MVS-8000 Functions Rotation around y-axis in global coordinate space Local coordinate space and global coordinate space Three-dimensional parameters Three-dimensional parameters are x, y, and z values which define the position of an image, its axis of rotation, the position of an imaginary point of view on the image, and so on. The standard values of parameters are as follows, depending on the aspect ratio of your monitor (4:3 or 16:9). Values for 4:3 mode • Origin at center of image (source coordinate space) or center of monitor (target coordinate space) x = 0.00, y = 0.00, z = 0.00 • Upper right corner of image or monitor When using SD format signals: x = 4.00, y = 3.00, z = 0.00 When using HD format signals: x = 12.00, y = 9.00, z = 0.00 112 Digital Multi Effects (DME) • Lower left corner of image or monitor When using SD format signals: x = – 4.00, y = –3.00, z = 0.00 When using HD format signals: x = –12.00, y = –9.00, z = 0.00 y-axis z-axis + +3(+9) a) Chapter 1 MVS-8000 Functions x-axis –4(–12) a) +4(+12) a) x-axis –3(–9) a) z-axis – y-axis The plus direction on the z-axis is depth into the image or monitor screen. a) The value in parentheses is for HD format. Values for x-, y-, and z-axes (4:3 mode) Values for 16:9 mode • Origin at center of image (source coordinate space) or center of monitor (target coordinate space) x = 0.00, y = 0.00, z = 0.00 • Upper right corner of image or monitor When using SD format signals: x = 4.00, y = 2.25, z = 0.00 When using HD format signals: x = 16.00, y = 9.00, z = 0.00 Digital Multi Effects (DME) 113 • Lower left corner of image or monitor When using SD format signals: x = −4.00, y = −2.25, z = 0.00 When using HD format signals: x = −16.00, y = −9.00, z = 0.00 y-axis z-axis + +2.25 (+9.00)a) Chapter 1 MVS-8000 Functions x-axis –4.00 (–16.00)a) +4.00 (+16.00)a) x-axis z-axis – –2.25 (–9.00)a) y-axis The plus direction on the z-axis is depth into the image or monitor screen. a) The value in parentheses is for HD format. Values for x-, y- and z-axes (16:9 mode) Limits of three-dimensional parameters The following table shows the limits of three-dimensional transformation parameters. The three-dimensional parameters of an image change when you use the trackball or Z-ring to execute a transformation. You can also execute a transformation by entering parameter values from the numeric keypad control block. Operation mode Location XYZ Limits of three-dimensional transformation parameters HD format: SD format: Rotation, Spin Axis Location –333.3333 to +333.3333 16:9 –250.0000 to +250.0000 –999.9999 to +999.9999 HD format: SD format: –999.9999 to +999.9999 4:3 –333.3333 to +333.3333 16:9 –250.0000 to +250.0000 Location Size 0.0000 to +999.9999 Aspect 0.0000 to +2.0000 Perspective (x, y) HD format: SD format: Perspective (z) 114 –999.9999 to +999.9999 4:3 Digital Multi Effects (DME) –999.9999 to +999.9999 4:3 –333.3333 to +333.3333 16:9 –250.0000 to +250.0000 0.0000 to 999.9999 Operation mode Limits of three-dimensional transformation parameters Skew –9.9999 to +9.9999 Detents Chapter 1 MVS-8000 Functions The system defines points called detents at regular intervals on the threedimensional space. Pressing the [CTR] button in the device control block sets the current three-dimensional parameter values to the closest detent points. (For details, see “Three-Dimensional Transformation Operations” in Chapter 11 (Volume 2).) The following table shows the interval between successive detents for each transformation operation mode (see page 116). Operation mode Detent interval Location XYZ 1.0000 Rotation, Spin 0.2500 Axis Location 1.0000 Location Size 0.2500 Aspect 1.0000 a) Perspective (x, y) Perspective (z) 1.0000 1.0000 a) Skew 0.1000 a) When a value is smaller than 1, 1/Aspect or 1/Perspective (z) is adjusted to an integral value. Three-dimensional parameter default values Each of the transformation operation modes has default values for threedimensional parameters. If required, you can return the current value to the defaults by pressing the [CTR] button in the device control block twice in rapid succession. (For details, see “Three-Dimensional Transformation Operations” in Chapter 11 (Volume 2).) The following table shows the default parameter values for each transformation operation mode. Operation mode Default value Location XYZ 0.0000 Rotation, Spin 0.0000 Axis Location 0.0000 Location Size 1.0000 Aspect 1.0000 Digital Multi Effects (DME) 115 Operation mode Default value Perspective (x, y) Perspective (z) 0.0000 1.0000 Skew 0.0000 Resetting of parameter values set in the source coordinate space Chapter 1 MVS-8000 Functions In some transformation operation modes, if you switch to the target coordinate space after setting up a three-dimensional transformation in the source coordinate space, the setting values in the source coordinate space (threedimensional parameter values) are converted to values in the target coordinate space (source/target conversion). Once a conversion has taken place, the original source coordinate space parameters do not return to their original values when you switch back to the source coordinate space. They are reset to zeros. Source/target conversion occurs in the following operation modes: • Location XYZ • Rotation Transformation Operation Modes The following operation modes are available for three-dimensional DME transformations. These operations are carried out in the device control block (trackball or joystick). (For details, see “Three-Dimensional Transformation Operations” in Chapter 11 (Volume 2).) Location XYZ Moves the image on the x-axis, y-axis, or z-axis. The direction of movement differs depending on whether you are manipulating the image in the source coordinate space or the target coordinate space. Image movement in the source coordinate space Movement on the x-axis 116 Digital Multi Effects (DME) Movement on the y-axis Movement on the z-axis Image movement in the target coordinate space Movement on the y-axis Chapter 1 MVS-8000 Functions Movement on the x-axis Movement on the z-axis Rotation Rotates the image on the x-axis, y-axis, or z-axis. The type of rotation differs depending on whether you are manipulating the image in the source coordinate space or the target coordinate space. Image rotation in the source coordinate space Rotation around the y-axis Rotation around the x-axis Rotation around the z-axis Image rotation in the target coordinate space Rotation around the y-axis Rotation around the x-axis Rotation around the z-axis Spin When rotating the image in Rotation mode, it may not always be possible to achieve the kind of rotation around an axis that you want. Combining Rotation mode with Spin mode creates an effect that rotates the image around a specified axis. The type of rotation differs depending on whether you are manipulating Digital Multi Effects (DME) 117 the image in the source coordinate space or the target coordinate space. (The way the image rotates around an axis is the same as in Rotation mode.) Axis Location Moves an axis of rotation in the source coordinate space. Axis movement Chapter 1 MVS-8000 Functions Z Y Z' Y' Z' Z Y X Y' X X' X' Movement on the x-axis Movement on the y-axis Movement on the z-axis Location Size Changes the size of the whole image. • Because shrinking and magnification of the image in the source coordinate space is done in three-dimensional space, magnifying the image emphasizes the sense of perspective. • Because shrinking and magnification of the image in the target coordinate space is a conversion of the two-dimensional image displayed on the monitor, shrinking and magnification does not change the shape of the image. Magnification and shrinking in the source coordinate space 118 Digital Multi Effects (DME) Magnification and shrinking in the target coordinate space Chapter 1 MVS-8000 Functions Aspect In the source coordinate space, changes the aspect ratio in the x-axis direction and y-axis direction, either independently or simultaneously. Change of aspect ratio in x-axis direction Change of aspect ratio in y-axis direction Simultaneous change aspect ratio in x-axis direction and y-axis direction Perspective In the target coordinate space, changes the perspective on the image by changing an imaginary view point, without changing the position of the image. The x-axis and y-axis values define the position of the view point. The z-axis value defines its distance from the image. Change of view point on x-axis Change of view point on yaxis Change of distance from view point to image Digital Multi Effects (DME) 119 Skew In the source coordinate space, change the skew of the image on the x-axis or y-axis. Chapter 1 MVS-8000 Functions Change of skew on x-axis Change of skew on y-axis Graphics Display Graphics display is a function that allows you to display wire frames, coordinate axes and a grid over the current DME image, to make it easier to create effects in three-dimensional coordinate space. Graphics displayed by this function can also be output to the monitor output connector. Note On the MVE-8000 and the MVE-8000A (when using the DME dedicated interface), these graphics cannot be output to the monitor output connector. To make graphics display settings, use the DME menu. (For details, see “Graphics Display” in Chapter 11 (Volume 2).) You can display the following kinds of graphics. Wire frames A wire frame displays an image enclosed in a frames, so that you can check the position and size of the image. If there is a shadow (see page 157), a frame is shown for the shadow as well. Coordinate axes This is a three-dimensional display of coordinates in local or global coordinate space. You can check the origin of the axes and the directions of the x-, y-, and z-axes. 120 Digital Multi Effects (DME) Y Z Wire frame X 1F Chapter 1 MVS-8000 Functions Channel ID This displays the channel number so that you can check which channel you are using, a useful feature when you are working with multiple channels. Channel IDs are displayed differently in local and global coordinate space. • In local coordinate space, the channel number is displayed along with “F” or “B” to indicate whether you are looking at the front (F) or back (B) of the current wire frame. For example, “1F” means the front of the wire frame on channel 1 in local coordinate space. • In global coordinate space, the channel number is displayed along with “G” to indicate global. For example, “G2” means channel 2 in global coordinate space. Local coordinate space axes Channel ID Wire frame, local coordinate space axes, and channel ID Grid This is a grid pattern representing the whole of the monitor screen. The grid makes it easy to set the position of an image in two-dimensional coordinates. –4 –3 –2 –1 0 +1 +2 +3 +4 +3 +2 +1 0 –1 –2 –3 Grid (SD format, 4:3 mode) Shrinking the graphics display You can shrink the graphics display so that you can see beyond the range displayed on the normal monitor screen. This makes it possible to visually set the location of images in a larger space. The range displayed on a normal monitor screen is indicated by a frame. Digital Multi Effects (DME) 121 Chapter 1 MVS-8000 Functions Range displayed on normal monitor screen Wire frame To automatically erase the graphic display Turn Auto Erase on. The graphic display is erased automatically whenever a keyframe is executed. It is displayed again after the keyframe ends, after the time set in Recovery Time. Flex Shadow center axis When using the Flex Shadow function (see page 125), turn Flex Shadow Axis on to display the Flex Shadow center axis. This is an effective aid in making settings for this function. Note The Flex Shadow center axis function is not supported on the MVE-8000/ 8000A. Three-Dimensional Parameter Display You can display a three-dimensional parameter list for the currently controlled image. When more than one DME channel is selected, the status of the reference channel is displayed. For the method of displaying a parameter list and an example display, see “Three-Dimensional Parameter Display” in Chapter 11 (Volume 2). DME Special Effects You can use DME to add a variety of special effects. To add effects, use the DME menu. (See “DME Special Effect Operations” in Chapter 11 (Volume 2).) 122 Digital Multi Effects (DME) Border This effect adds a border to the image frame. You can adjust the width (or thickness) of the border, its color, and the softness of the border edges. Chapter 1 MVS-8000 Functions Crop This effect crops away the edges of the image. You can crop the top, bottom, left, and right sides individually or all together. You can also soften the cropped edges. Defocus Defocuses the whole image. The degree of defocusing can be set simultaneously or separately for video and key signals. (However, when the DME dedicated interface is used, the degree of defocusing can be set for video signals only.) You can also cancel the black level leaking that occurs at the edge of the screen when the Defocus effect is used. Digital Multi Effects (DME) 123 Blur Applies a rounded blurring to the whole image. Beveled Edge This gives an image a beveled edge. You can set the edge width and color. The inner edge softness and edge boundary softness can also be set. Chapter 1 MVS-8000 Functions Light Color Key Border This effect adds borders to keys or gives a key consisting of an outline only. Note The Key Border function is not supported on the MVE-8000/8000A. Art Edge Adds edges to the inner and outer side of the input image. The following items can be set. • Art edge width and position • Separate softening of the art edge inner and outer sides • Color of art edges 124 Digital Multi Effects (DME) Examples of Art Edge source Rainbow Matte Chapter 1 MVS-8000 Functions Gradation Matte Radial Gradation Radial Rainbow Example effect using Art Edge source [Rainbow Matte] Note The Art Edge function is not supported on the MVE-8000/8000A. Flex Shadow This effect allows a shadow to be added to the image using only one DME channel. The following settings can be made for the shadow. • The signal to use for the shadow – External: Generate shadow using input key signal. Digital Multi Effects (DME) 125 • • • • • – Internal: Generate shadow using an internally generated, full-size DME key signal. Shadow shrinking and magnification Shadow position Shadow color and density Center axis of deformation Shadow slant and perspective Chapter 1 MVS-8000 Functions External Internal Note The Flex Shadow function is not supported on the MVE-8000/8000A. Wipe crop This effect crops the video image to be visible inside or outside a wipe pattern. Background Video image When Invert is On Note The Wipe Crop function is not supported on the MVE-8000/8000A. 126 Digital Multi Effects (DME) Color mix This is a combination of two colors with a pattern generator. This color mix signal can be used to fill parts such as a background or border. Color 2 Chapter 1 MVS-8000 Functions Color 1 Note The Color Mix function is not supported on the MVE-8000/8000A. Multi Move Shrinks the image and lines up a number of copies vertically and horizontally. You can specify the center point of the shrinking, the shrinking ratio, and the aspect ratio of the image screen. Sepia Overlays a specified color onto the image. You can adjust the sepia color that is overlaid, and specify the degree of mixing between the original image and the sepia image. Mono Converts the image into a monochrome image. Digital Multi Effects (DME) 127 Posterization Coarsens the luminance gradations of the image, for a painting-like effect. You can specify the degree of luminance coarsening. Solarization Chapter 1 MVS-8000 Functions Like the Posterization effect, creates a painting-like effect, but does so by coarsening the chroma gradations of the image. You can specify the degree of chroma coarsening. Nega Reverses the luminance and/or chroma of the image. Contrast Changes the contrast of the luminance and/or chroma of the image. Mosaic Divides the image into small tiles so that it looks like a mosaic. You can specify the size and aspect ratio of the tiles. 128 Digital Multi Effects (DME) Sketch Provides a sketch-like effect based on the outlines of the image, using different touches such as sketch, edge color, drawing, relief, and sharp. Chapter 1 MVS-8000 Functions Sketch Note The Sketch function is not supported on the MVE-8000. Metal Provides a metallic gloss like that from gold, silver, or a rainbow colored surface. A metallic gloss can also be given to a freely selected color. Note The Metal function is not supported on the MVE-8000. Digital Multi Effects (DME) 129 Dim and Fade Dim makes the picture progressively dimmer into its depths. Fade progressively makes the depths of the picture fade into the background. Chapter 1 MVS-8000 Functions Fade Note The Dim and Fade functions are not supported on the MVE-8000/8000A. Glow Softens the edges of highlights, giving an effect like being struck by a soft light. Note The Glow function is not supported on the MVE-8000. Mask Masks part of the image so that special effects are applied only inside a selected pattern. The mask function is applied in units made up of the following groups. The Mask effect can be applied using effect group 1 and effect group 2 simultaneously. Effect group 1: Posterization, Solarization, Nega, Sepia, Mono, Contrast, Mosaic, Sketch, Metal Effect group 2: Defocus, Blur, Glow 130 Digital Multi Effects (DME) Video image Effect video image (Mosaic) Effect video image (Mosaic) Video image Chapter 1 MVS-8000 Functions Mask (normal) Mask (invert) Notes • The Mask function is not supported on the MVE-8000. • On the MVE-8000A, the Mask function cannot be applied to both effect group 1 and effect group 2 simultaneously. Freeze Freezes the input video. The following types are available: Hard Freeze: Freezes the input video at an arbitrary timing. Time Strobe: Freezes the input video at specified intervals for a specified length. Film: Slows the apparent frame rate, for an effect like film. You can specify the ratio of advancement. For Hard Freeze and Time Strobe, you can select the first field or the frame as the freeze timing. Nonlinear Effects You can add a variety of effects, including effects that change the shape of the image as a whole. The following nonlinear effects are available. For more information about settings and operations with nonlinear effects, see “Nonlinear Effect Settings” in Chapter 11 (Volume 2). Note It is not possible to apply two or more nonlinear effects at the same time. Turning any nonlinear effect on automatically turns all other nonlinear effects off. Wave Produces a wave-like effect in the image. Digital Multi Effects (DME) 131 There are two modes: H&V and Size. You can set the size and frequency of the waves, the wave form, the amount of wave movement, and the range. In H&V mode, you can also set the wave angle. Chapter 1 MVS-8000 Functions Note When 720P/59.94 signal format is used, the wave effect is not supported on the MVE-8000. Mosaic Glass Makes the image rougher and finer at a specified interval. There are two modes: H&V and Size. You can set the size and frequency of waves in the image, the wave form, the amount of wave movement, and the range. In H&V mode, you can also set the wave angle. . Flag Applies an effect like a flag waving in the wind. There are two modes: H&V and Size. You can set the size and frequency of waves in the image, the wave form, the amount of wave movement, and the range. In H&V mode, you can also set the wave angle. 132 Digital Multi Effects (DME) Twist Twists the image. You can twist the image in the horizontal or vertical direction. You can set the size and frequency of waves in the image, the wave form, the amount of wave movement, and other parameters. Chapter 1 MVS-8000 Functions Ripple Applies an effect like ripples moving across the image. There are four modes: Radial, Angular, Both, and Shape. The direction of modulation differs depending on the mode. You can set the size and frequency of the ripples, their direction and speed, their center point, and other parameters. In Shape mode, you can select ripple shapes other than circles (stars, etc.). Rings Partitions the image into rings that rotate while moving in the same direction. You can set the degree of transition, the degree of randomness in the distance moved by each block, the amount of movement, the width of the partitions, the degree of randomness in partition width, the center point, the starting angle, and other parameters. Digital Multi Effects (DME) 133 Broken Glass Partitions the image like broken glass, with shards flying outward. You can set the degree of transition, the degree of randomness in the distance moved by each block, the amount of movement, the width of the partitions, the degree of randomness in partition width, the center point, the starting angle, and other parameters. You can also fix the direction in which shards scatter. Chapter 1 MVS-8000 Functions Flying Bar Divides the image into bars which peel off in two blocks as they move. You can set the degree of transition, the degree of randomness in the distance moved by each block, the direction of movement, the width of the partitions, the degree of randomness in partition width, the partition angle, and other parameters. Blind Divides the image into bars or wedges, with blocks rotating like the slats of venetian blinds. There are two modes: Bar and Wedge. You can set the number of rotations by blocks, the perspective, the width and position of blocks, the direction, the center position, and other parameters. 134 Digital Multi Effects (DME) Split Splits the image upper and lower, left and right. You can set the degree to which the image is split, the split positions, and other parameters. Chapter 1 MVS-8000 Functions Split Slide Divides the image into bars which slide alternately in reverse directions. You can set the degree of transition, the degree of randomness in the distance moved by each block, the degree of sliding, block width, block angle, and other parameters. Mirror Partitions the image vertically and horizontally, creating an image like a reflection in a mirror. You can choose to reflect in the directions left to right, right to left, bottom to top, top to bottom, or any combination of directions. You can also set the position of the border between original and reflections. Multi Mirror Divides the image into originals and reflections, lining them up vertically and horizontally. Digital Multi Effects (DME) 135 You can set the width of the original, the center position of the original, the offset of the image with fixed mirrors, the direction of the mirrors, and other parameters. Chapter 1 MVS-8000 Functions Kaleidoscope Creates an image like a view into a kaleidoscope. You can set the number of blocks, the partition reference point and angle, horizontal and vertical offsets, a reflection position, and other parameters. Lens Creates an image like a view through a lens. You can set the shape and aspect ratio of the lens, the angle, the magnification ratio, the curve ratio, the size, the center position, and other parameters. You can also choose to display only the portion of the image that is seen through the lens. Circle Makes a circle with the image. 136 Digital Multi Effects (DME) You can set the size of the circle, and make the axis of modulation vertical. Chapter 1 MVS-8000 Functions Panorama Curves the upper and lower edges of the image to emphasize the sense of perspective. You can set the horizontal and vertical curve ratio, and the curve center position. Page Turn Turns the image like a turning page. There are four modes: H&V, H, V, and Off. You can select the turn position, the radius of the turned portion, the amount and angle of turning, and the input video for the front and back pages. Roll Rolls the image up. Digital Multi Effects (DME) 137 There are four modes: H&V, H, V, and Off. You can select the turn position, the radius of the turned portion, the amount and angle of turning, and the input video for the front and back pages. Chapter 1 MVS-8000 Functions Cylinder Winds the whole image onto a cylinder. You can set the degree of winding onto the cylinder, the radius, the horizontal position of the wound image, and front and back side output for the image. Sphere Winds the whole image onto a sphere. You can set the degree of winding onto the sphere, the radius, the horizontal position of the wound image, and front and back side output for the image. Note You cannot monitor the part of a rotating sphere that corresponds to its axis on the monitor screen. Explosion Divides the image into fragments which expand as they fly out. 138 Digital Multi Effects (DME) You can set the pattern shape and aspect ratio, the center position, the amount of movement by fragments, the curvature of the transition path, and other parameters. Chapter 1 MVS-8000 Functions Swirl Swirls the image. You can set the amount of swirl, the swirl region, the amount of rotation, and the swirl center position. Melt Melts the image away from a specified part. You can set the degree of transition, the degree of extension in the image, the jaggedness of the melting sections, and the amplitude, frequency, amount of movement, and speed of the melting sections. You can also set the slant of the borders, the shape of the sections that begin to melt, and other parameters. Character Trail Extends the edge of the image like a trail. Digital Multi Effects (DME) 139 You can set the effect starting position, the degree of expansion, the slant angle of the effect region, and trail direction, the degree to which the image disappears, the trail type and amount of stardust, and other parameters. Chapter 1 MVS-8000 Functions Lighting Provides the effect of light striking the image. You can specify the intensity and color of the light and the lighting pattern. The following lighting patterns are available: Plane: Illumination of the entire screen. Bar: Bar illumination. You can specify the width and angle of the bar, and its softness. Preset: Lighting pattern suitable for nonlinear effects. When Bar is selected, the following modes can be selected. Normal Specular Mat Normal: Emphasizes the bar highlight area. Specular: An effect like light striking a surface with metallic reflections. Mat: An effect like light striking paper, cloth, or another diffusively reflective surface. Note The function for setting the bar mode of the lighting area is not supported on the MVE-8000/8000A. 140 Digital Multi Effects (DME) Combine Shadow When there are several images, adds a flex shadow in the depth of an image or overlays multiple flex shadows. Example 1: When Flex Shadow is enabled on both of two channels. Video Chapter 1 MVS-8000 Functions Over Video Under Shadow Shadow No combine shadow is set. Over Under Combine shadow is enabled. Density is set to 100.00. Over Under Combine shadow is enabled. Density is set to 0.00. Digital Multi Effects (DME) 141 Example 2: Flex Shadow is enabled on one channel only. Video Over Video Under Chapter 1 MVS-8000 Functions Shadow No combine shadow is set. Over Under Combine shadow is enabled. Density is set to 100.00. Over Under Combine shadow is enabled. Density is set to 0.00. Trail Recursively freezes the input video at regular intervals so that a trail of afterimages is created. You can make the afterimages stardust trails. Note Of the three effects of trail, motion decay and keyframe strobe, only one can be on at a time. When one of them is on, turning another of them on automatically turns off the one that has been on. Motion Decay Blurs the motion of a moving video by creating afterimages of the moving video. (See “Note” in the preceding section “Trail.”) 142 Digital Multi Effects (DME) You can make the afterimages stardust trails. Chapter 1 MVS-8000 Functions Keyframe Strobe Freezes the video each time the effect passes a keyframe. (See “Note” in the section “Trail.”) You can make the afterimages stardust trails. Wind This effect strobes the image at regular intervals, and moves the frozen image in a fixed direction, leaving an afterimage. Note The Wind function is not supported on the MVE-8000/8000A. Spotlighting Creates the effect of a spotlight striking the surface of the image. You can set up to three light sources (lights 1 to 3). Notes • The Spotlighting function is not supported on the MVE-8000/8000A. • The BZDM-9050 Texture Lighting Software (for MVE-9000) is required to set lights 2 and 3. Digital Multi Effects (DME) 143 Chapter 1 MVS-8000 Functions Adjustments to the image surface The following adjustments can be made to the image surface struck by the light. • Adjusting the brightness of the whole image • Selecting the image surface effect Flat: The image surface is unchanged, causing the selected light source to appear as the effect. Texture: A texture appears on the surface of the image. Textures can be selected from among 30 patterns. See the appendix “Texture Patterns” (Volume 2) for the texture patterns. Non Linear: Spotlighting effect is applied to an area to which a DME nonlinear effect is applied. Note The BZDM-9050 is required to enable Texture and Non Linear settings. • Test sphere function A test sphere is a translucent sphere virtually embedded in the center of the input picture to provide an intuitive way for you to check the position and direction of the spotlight. When you change the position or direction of a light source, the side of the sphere closest to the light source grows brighter. You can easily check the position and direction of the light source by viewing the test sphere. For more information about test sphere, see “Relation between test spheres and parallel rays” (page 148). • Adjusting the bumpiness of the image surface • Coordinate axis on surface of image Specify where to apply the texture or test sphere on the image surface. Move: The texture moves together with the DME image. Image before movement Coordinate axis = Move Texture moves together with DME image. Fix: The texture does not move, even if the DME image moves. 144 Digital Multi Effects (DME) Image before movement Chapter 1 MVS-8000 Functions Coordinate axis = Fix Texture does not move, even if DME image moves. • Texture deformations You can change the texture pattern, position, and size, and use the repetition function. The following figure shows examples of a texture pattern repeated in the X and Y directions. Original image Repetition in X direction Repetition in Y direction Repetition in X and Y directions Setting lights • Light source types The following type of light sources are available (see figure). Parallel: Parallel light source Point: Point light source. As the light source is placed further away, the illuminated range becomes wider and the light become weaker. Line: Line light source Whole: Non-directional light source which illuminates the whole image. Digital Multi Effects (DME) 145 Light source Chapter 1 MVS-8000 Functions Parallel Light source Point Light source Line Whole • Linking and unlinking image and spotlight The spotlight can move together with a DME image, or be fixed in place. Source: Place the light source in source coordinate space. The spotlight is linked and moves when the image moves. Target: Place the light source in target coordinate space. The spotlight does not move, even when the image moves. Spotlight Image before movement Coordinate axis = Source Spotlight moves together with DME image. Coordinate axis = Target Spotlight does not move, even if DME image moves. • Selecting the lighted area You can select the area lit by the spotlight. FRGD: The light strikes the image foreground. BKGD: The light strikes the image background. Both: The light strikes both foreground and background. 146 Digital Multi Effects (DME) Background Foreground FRGD selected BKGD selected Chapter 1 MVS-8000 Functions No effect Spotlight Both selected • Surface Flat For the currently selected light source only, you can forcibly make the image surface effect flat. This is effective when you have selected texture as image surface effect and want a flat effect for one light source only. • Light shape Creates the light shape. – Select the shape pattern For shape patterns, see the appendix “Shape Patterns” (Volume 2). – Set the size, degree of deformation, softness, and rotation. • Ring settings Shines the light with a hole in the middle, like a doughnut. Adjust the following parameters. Offset: Distance to move the center of the ring from the initial position (the position set when selecting the light source in thegroup). Radius: Inner side radius of the ring. Angle: When an Offset is set, the rotation angle of the ring around the initial center position. Angle: Rotation angle Initial center position Angle Radius Offset Digital Multi Effects (DME) 147 • Fill blending modes Specifies the way in which the light is blended with the image. Mix: Light as if reflected from a mirror. The light can be given a color. Multiply: Light as if reflected from a dull surface (diffuse reflection). Chapter 1 MVS-8000 Functions Relation between test spheres and parallel rays The following figure shows an example of the effect of parallel rays on a test sphere. Test sphere Ray The direction of a ray is defined by longitude and latitude. • Longitude: A direction (angle), expressed as a plus value for clockwise rotation in the plus direction with respect to the X axis of the input picture. • Latitude: Latitude The following figure shows the relationships between the longitude and latitude of parallel rays, input picture, and test sphere. Z-axis Latitude=+0.25 Parallel rays Latitude X-axis 0.00 Longitude Input picture Test sphere 148 Digital Multi Effects (DME) Y-axis Latitude=−0.25 0.00 The unit of these direction parameters is the number of rotations, with 360° (1 rotation) expressed as 1.00, in the same way as 3D rotation parameters. The following relationships apply in the example shown in the figure. Parameter Setting Angle Longitude 0.12 45° Latitude 0.12 45° Chapter 1 MVS-8000 Functions The fractional part of the setting after the decimal point corresponds to an angle 0 to 360°. If the fractional parts of two setting values are the same, the effect is the same even if the integral parts are different. The integral part of a setting value is used when moving a light source with keyframes. For example, when the longitude of a light source rotates in the clockwise direction from 0.88 (315°) to 0.12 (45°), it rotates in the counterclockwise direction (the angle grows smaller) if the above values are used. In this case, the value of the second keyframe can be set to 1.12 (330° + 45°). KF1 = 0.88 KF2 = 0.12 Test sphere KF2 = 1.12 Keyframe trajectory User texture pattern In the spotlighting function, a user generated texture pattern can now be selected for the pattern with which the light falls on the image surface. To add a texture pattern, create a texture package from a bitmap file, and install it. The installed texture pattern can be selected in the same way as the texture patterns provided by default. Digital Multi Effects (DME) 149 Note The user texture pattern function is not supported on the MVE-8000/8000A. For details of spotlighting, see page 143. For details of how to create a user texture pattern, see “Adding user texture patterns” in Chpater 16 (Volume 2) , and for how to select a pattern once created, see “To select a texture pattern” in Chapter 11 (Volume 2). Chapter 1 MVS-8000 Functions Background Adds a color or inputs an external signal to the background of the image. Note Signal selection for this purpose is not supported on the MVE-8000/8000A. Separate Sides Applies separate video signals and key signals to the front and back of the image. Back Front Front and back sides Shaped Video For each of the front and back sides of the image, specifies whether to handle input video from the switcher as shaped video (key processed signals). Note The shaped video function can only be used with the MVE-8000A/9000 (SDI interface). 150 Digital Multi Effects (DME) Invert Inverts the input video signal and/or key signal horizontally or vertically. You can make separate settings for the front and back. Input signal Chapter 1 MVS-8000 Functions Horizontal inversion Vertical inversion Inversion of input signal Interpolation Specifies the methods used for interpolation processing of input video signals and input key signals. For input video signals, you can select from the following four methods. • Detect changes in the luminance and chrominance signals separately, and switch automatically between fields and frames. You can select the degree of change detection. • Detect changes in the luminance signal separately, and switch automatically between fields and frames. You can select the degree of change detection. • Do interpolation in field units. • Do interpolation in frame units. For input key signals, you can select from the following three methods. • Detect changes in the luminance signal separately, and switch automatically between fields and frames. You can select the degree of change detection. • Do interpolation in field units. • Do interpolation in frame units. You can also select the number of pixels used in interpolation processing, and select the method used to show the picture reduced or expanded. Further, you can apply an anti-moire filter to reduce the moire patterns created by interpolation. Notes • Interpolation processing is possible for the following signal formats and DME systems. Digital Multi Effects (DME) 151 – MVE-8000/8000A: 480i/59.94, 576i/50 – MVE-9000: 480i/59.94, 576i/50, 1080i/59.94, 1080i/50, 1080i/60 • The anti-moire filter function is only effective when the MVE-8000/8000A is used in an HD system. Key Density Adjustment Chapter 1 MVS-8000 Functions You can adjust the key density for the key signal input to the DME. Key Source Selection You can select either the key signals received from the switcher or the key signals generated in the DME for application to the front and back of the image (see page 150). Global Effects Global effects are special effects created by combining the images of successive channels. The Global Effect menu is used to add these effects. For details of this menu, see “Global Effect Operations” in Chapter 11 (Volume 2). The following types of global effects are available. Combiner When multiple channels are selected on one keyer or for one transition, the Combiner automatically combines the selected images. Up to four channels can be combined. You can also control the way in which the combination is carried out, as a mix or an overlap with priority set automatically. For a mix, you can control the relative amounts of each channel. Images can also be crossed in three dimensions. Note Three-dimensional image crossing is not supported on the MVE-8000/8000A. 152 Digital Multi Effects (DME) Combination of channel 1 (Ch1) and channel 2 (Ch2) Ch1 1 Combiner Ch1 2 Ch3 3 Ch3 Ch4 4 Ch4 Chapter 1 MVS-8000 Functions Ch2 2 1 3 4 Combination of Ch1, Ch2, and Ch3 Ch1 1 Ch2 2 Ch3 3 Ch4 4 Ch1 1 2 Ch4 4 Combiner 3 Digital Multi Effects (DME) 153 Combination of Ch1 and Ch2 / combination of Ch3 and Ch4 Ch1 1 Combiner Chapter 1 MVS-8000 Functions Ch2 2 Ch3 3 Ch4 4 1 Combiner 2 2 Ch1 1 Ch3 3 4 Combination of Ch1, Ch2, Ch3, and Ch4 Ch1 1 2 1 Ch1 Ch2 2 3 4 Combiner Ch3 3 Ch4 4 Mixing Ch1 and Ch2 Ch1 1 Ch1 Mix1 Ch2 2 Ch2 If the Mix1 setting is 70, the proportion of the channels in the mixed portion in the previous illustration is as shown in the following table. 154 Digital Multi Effects (DME) Combination Indication in figure Ch1 and Ch2 Ch1 Ch2 30% 70% Mixing Ch1, Ch2, and Ch3 Chapter 1 MVS-8000 Functions Ch1 Ch1 1 Mix1 Ch2 Ch2 2 Ch3 Mix2 Ch3 3 If the Mix1 setting is 70 and the Mix2 setting is 40, the proportions of the channels in the mixed portions in the previous illustration are as shown in the following table. Combination Indication in figure Ch1 Ch2 Ch3 Ch1 and Ch2 30% 70% – Ch2 and Ch3 – 60% 40% Ch1 and Ch3 30% – 70% Ch1, Ch2, and Ch3 30% 42% 28% Pairwise mixing of Ch1 and Ch2, and Ch3 and Ch4 Ch1 1 Ch1 Mix1 Ch2 2 Ch3 3 Ch2 Ch3 Mix2 Ch4 4 Ch4 Digital Multi Effects (DME) 155 If the Mix1 setting is 70 and the Mix2 setting is 40, the proportions of the channels in the mixed portions in the previous illustration are as shown in the following table. Combination Ch1 Ch2 Ch3 Ch4 Ch1 and Ch2 Indication in figure 30% 70% – – Ch3 and Ch4 – – 60% 40% Chapter 1 MVS-8000 Functions Ch1 crossed with Ch2 Ch1 1 Depth Ch2 2 Brick This effect creates a rectangular parallelepiped from 3 successive channels. The Brick effect can combine Ch1, Ch2, and Ch3, or combine Ch2, Ch3, and Ch4. The three images are displayed as shown in the following figure. Z Y Upper side X Height Side V Side H An example of the Brick effect Combinations of Ch1, Ch2, and Ch3 Upper side: Ch1 image Side V: Ch2 image Side H: Ch3 image 156 Digital Multi Effects (DME) Combinations of Ch2, Ch3, and Ch4 Upper side: Ch2 image Side V: Ch3 image Side H: Ch4 image You can adjust the height of the brick, the overlap between the three images and the way to insert the side images. Chapter 1 MVS-8000 Functions Shadow This effect gives the image a shadow. The effect uses two successive channels. You can adjust the position and density of the shadow with respect to the image, and the color of the shadow. The channel with the largest number (for example, Ch2 in the case of Ch1 and Ch2) becomes the shadow. Digital Multi Effects (DME) 157 External Devices Chapter 1 MVS-8000 Functions In this system, you can operate while controlling the following types of external device: • Devices supporting P-Bus (Peripheral II protocol) (referred to as “P-Bus devices” in the manual) • Devices supporting GPI • VTRs • Disk recorder (Sony disk 9-pin protocol and video disk communications protocol) • Extended VTR (Abekas A53 protocol) The following is an outline of external device control. For external device control operations, see Chapter 12 “External Devices” (Volume 2). For details on the devices that can be connected, consult your Sony representative. Shared Functions for External Device Control Keyframe functions There are 99 registers, numbered 1 to 99, holding external device control data as keyframe data. The following are the keyframe functions that can be used. • RECALL (1-99), STORE (1-99), RECALL UNDO, STORE UNDO, empty register search, AUTO SAVE, RECALL MODE (RECALL, RECALL & REWIND) • EDIT ENABLE, EDIT UNDO • CONST DUR, EFF DUR, KF DUR, DELAY, PAUSE, INSERT BEFORE, INSERT AFTER, MODIFY, DELETE, COPY, PASTE BEFORE, PASTE AFTER, FROM TO, ALL • PREV KF, NEXT KF, GOTO TC, GOTO KF, RUN, REWIND, FF, STOP NEXT KF, NORMAL, JOG, KF FADER Note Actions set in a keyframe are executed only when the keyframe effect is executed in the normal direction. Take care when executing simultaneously with a switcher or DME keyframe effect, since the actions are not executed in the reverse direction. 158 External Devices The following keyframe functions cannot be used. • KF LOOP, EFFECT LOOP, REVERSE, NORMAL/REVERSE • PATH Saving to registers Chapter 1 MVS-8000 Functions Set the data for controlling external devices in the Device menu. You can save the set data in keyframe, snapshot, or shotbox registers. You can recall the register in which the data is saved, and carry out operations on it with the keyframe control block. For details, see Chapter 12 “External Devices” (Volume 2). Editing registers You can carry out the following operations on the registers in which the data for controlling external devices is saved. • Copy • Move • Swap • Merge (this cannot be carried out for registers holding VTR, disk recorder, or Extended VTR control data.) • Lock • Name File related functions As effect data, you can save and recall, using the File menu. Control of P-Bus Devices You can control P-Bus devices from this system through the 9-pin serial port of a DCU. P-Bus device control modes There are two modes of P-Bus device control, as follows. P-Bus trigger mode: Operating a previously specified button outputs the command for an action assigned to that button. P-Bus timeline mode: Carrying out a keyframe effect under the control of the center control panel controls external devices. In the setup, select which of P-Bus trigger mode and P-Bus timeline mode to use. External Devices 159 P-Bus trigger mode actions The actions that can be used in P-Bus trigger mode are as follows. • Store • Recall • Trigger For details of the buttons assigned to each action, see Chapter 12, “External Devices” (Volume 2). Chapter 1 MVS-8000 Functions P-Bus timeline At a keyframe point on the P-Bus timeline, you can set an action (setting what action command is output to which device). At any single keyframe point you can set actions for a maximum of 24 devices. P-Bus timeline mode actions The actions that can be used in P-Bus timeline mode are as follows. • Store • Recall • Trigger For the action setting (or P-Bus timeline editing), use the Device menu. You can save the data set in the Device menu in keyframe effect registers. Recalling the register starts execution of the keyframe effect, and when this reaches the keyframe point at which actions are set, action commands are output to external devices through the 9-pin serial port assigned to P-Bus. For details, see Chapter 12 “External Devices” (Volume 2). Control of GPI Devices You can control GPI devices from the control panel of this system, or through the GPI output port of a DCU. GPI timeline For a keyframe effect controlled from the center control panel, the GPI timeline allows you to set an action (setting a trigger output from a particular GPI output port) at a keyframe point on the GPI timeline. At any keyframe point, you can make a maximum of eight GPI output port settings. GPI timeline actions The actions that can be used on the GPI timeline are as follows. • Control panel GPI output port • DCU GPI output port For the GPI output settings (keyframe editing), use the Device menu. 160 External Devices The data set in the Device menu are saved in a keyframe effect register. When you recall this register and start execution of the keyframe effect, and advance the effect to the keyframe point for which the GPI output is set, a trigger pulse is output to the external device from the specified GPI output port. VTR/Disk Recorder/Extended VTR Control Chapter 1 MVS-8000 Functions In this system, for up to 12 VTRs, disk recorders or Extended VTRs connected to a DCU, you can carry out the following manual operations and timeline settings. • Controlling manually from the device control block (trackball or search dial) • Saving a start point, stop point, start delay time, variable speed and so on in a data register, then recalling the register to control automatically from the keyframe control block. (Cueup & Play and VTR/disk recorder/Extended VTR timeline) • In the Device menu, you can check the following VTR, disk recorder and Extended VTR information: – Device name – Register number – VTR/disk recorder/Extended VTR status – Current time – Start point – Stop point – Variable speed – Start delay time – Loop setting – Recue setting Manual operation In the device control block, you can carry out the following operations manually. • VTR, disk recorder or Extended VTR selection • Tape transport and disk drive control: You can use the following tape transport and disk drive control buttons: REC, REW, PLAY, FF, CUE UP, VAR PLAY, SHTL, JOG, STANDBY OFF, STOP, and ALL STOP. (For details of the operation of the buttons, see “Device Control Block (Trackball)” (page 271), “Device Control Block (Joystick)” (page 277) and “Device Control Block (Search Dial)” (page 278).) Depending on the settings made in the Setup menu, the CUE UP, PLAY and STOP operations can be carried out from the transition control block. (For details of the operation of the buttons, see “Transition Control Block External Devices 161 • • • Chapter 1 MVS-8000 Functions • • (Standard Type)” (page 260) and “Transition Control Block (Compact Type)” (page 310). Setting a start point: For each selected VTR/disk recorder/Extended VTR you can set the start point timecode value as keyframe data. Setting a stop point: For each selected VTR/disk recorder/Extended VTR you can set the stop point timecode value as keyframe data. Setting a start delay time: For each selected VTR/disk recorder/Extended VTR you can set the start delay as key frame data. Recording to VTR or disk recorder: Record video to the selected VTR/ disk recorder. Loop/recue 1) setting: You can select loop or recue as the playback mode. These operate as follows. When loop is selected: Playback repeats from the start to the end of the currently recalled file. When recue is selected: When playback reaches the stop point, automatically cue up to the start point. 1) EVS XT server (EVS Broadcast Equipment) dedicated function Cueup & Play By saving the start point timecode, stop point timecode, start delay time, and so on for a VTR, disk recorder or Extended VTR in an effect register, and recalling this register, you can operate the following buttons in the keyframe control block to automatically control the VTR, disk recorder or Extended VTR. [REWIND] button: Cue up to the start point timecode [RUN] button: Play With this function you can also stop the VTR, disk recorder or Extended VTR used for playback at the stop point timecode recalled from the same register. Disk recorder (video disk communications protocol) operation when loop /recue is set When loop is set: playback repeatedly between the start point and stop point. When recue is set: when playback reaches the stop point, automatically cue up to the start point. VTR/disk recorder/Extended VTR timeline For a keyframe effect controlled from the center control panel, the timeline allows you to set a VTR, disk recorder or Extended VTR action at a keyframe point on the timeline. Timeline actions The actions that can be used on the timeline are as follows. • Start 162 External Devices • Stop • Cue up • Variable speed Notes Chapter 1 MVS-8000 Functions • For a disk recorder, the maximum number of files for a single register is eight. • The timeline does not support loop and recue. For the action settings (VTR/disk recorder/Extended VTR timeline editing), use the Device menu. The data set in the Device menu are saved in a keyframe effect register. When you recall this register and start execution of the keyframe effect, and advance the effect to the keyframe point for which the action is set, an action command is output to the external device through the 9-pin serial port assigned to the VTR, disk recorder or Extended VTR. Recalling disk recorder/Extended VTR files Material held on a disk recorder/Extended VTR is managed in units of files. You can recall a file to play it back. (In the case of an Extended VTR, the register number is recalled.) Accessing the file list Before playback and suchlike operations on a disk recorder/Extended VTR, it is first necessary to display a list of the disk recorder files on the DCU. The file list includes the following information. • File name • Date of last update 1) • Duration of recorded material 1) To recall the file list, use the Device menu. 1) Not displayed in the case of an Extended VTR Recalling a file In the recalled list of files, select the file you want to play back, and open the file. File list sharing You can connect multiple DCU serial ports to a single disk recorder/Extended VTR. You can share the recalled list of files between serial ports connected to the same disk recorder/Extended VTR. For settings relating to file list sharing, see “Serial Port Settings (Serial Port Assign Menu)” in Chapter 16 (Volume 2). External Devices 163 File creation To record a new file on the disk recorder, use the Device menu to create a new file. Note In the case of an Extended VTR, it is not possible to record a new file. Chapter 1 MVS-8000 Functions 164 External Devices Regions and Registers Regions Chapter 1 MVS-8000 Functions The term “region” refers to some sort of functional block of the system. When saving or recalling snapshot registers and effect registers, or creating or editing effects, you first select the region to which the operation applies. You can also select multiple regions simultaneously. Classification of the regions The regions are classified as follows. • Master region • The following 36 regions – Switcher: M/E1 to M/E3, PGM/PST, User1 to User8 – DME: DME ch1 to DME ch8 (inclusive of Global) – External devices: P-Bus, Router, Device 1 to Device 12, GPI, Macro Only the regions assigned to the region selection buttons of the numeric keypad control block can be used simultaneously. For details of the region assignment to the region selection buttons, see “Overall Control Panel Settings (Config Menu)” in Chapter 16 (Volume 2). Regions applicable to keyframe operations Thirty-five regions, that is, the above 36 regions less the Router region. Regions applicable to snapshot operations Twenty-one regions, that is, the above regions less the external devices’ regions (P-Bus, Device 1 to Device 12, and GPI) and the Macro region. “User” regions You can optionally assign the following regions to the regions User1 to User8. The User regions shown in parenthesis are the default assignments. • Color backgrounds 1 and 2 (User1) • AUX1 to AUX48 (User2) • Monitor 1 to 8 (User3) • Frame Memory 1 to 8 (User4) • Color correctors 1 and 2 For details of the User1 to User8 region assignment, see “Overall Control Panel Settings (Config Menu)” in Chapter 16 (Volume 2). Regions and Registers 165 Chapter 1 MVS-8000 Functions Reference region When multiple regions are selected, only one region appears in the displays for menu and numeric keypad operations. This is called the “reference region.” The reference region is determined according to the following precedence. M/E1 >M/E2 >M/E3 >P/P >User1 > User2 > User3 >User4 >User5 >User6 >User7 >User8 >DME ch1>DME ch2 >DME ch3 >DME ch4 >DME ch5 >DME ch6 >DME ch7 >DME ch8 >Device1 >Device2 >Device3 >Device4 >Device5 >Device6 >Device7 >Device8 >Device9 >Device10 >Device11 >Device12 >P-Bus >GPI >Router >Macro Master region The regions saved in a master snapshot register or master timeline register and the register numbers saved in such regions can be recalled at a time as the master region. The master region can be saved or recalled using the numeric keypad control block. Registers A register is an area of memory in a device which holds a snapshot, keyframe, macro, and so on. For details of macros, see page 210. Keyframe effect registers Dedicated effect registers There are 99 dedicated registers for keyframe effects in each region, numbered 1 to 99. Shared user-programmable DME registers In addition to the 99 DME registers for each region (i.e. each channel), there are also shared registers for each processor as shown in the following table. These are used for user-programmable DME. Register number Register allocation 101 to 199 Shared register for one-channel effects 201 to 299 Shared register for two-channel effects 301 to 399 Shared register for three-channel effects Note When operating with these shared registers, be sure to select the appropriate regions depending on the number of channels. When recalling registers in the 166 Regions and Registers 200 range, select two consecutive channels for the regions, as for example [DME1] and [DME2]. Similarly, for registers in the 300 range, select three consecutive registers. Chapter 1 MVS-8000 Functions Work register This is a temporary register used when editing keyframes. When you recall an effect, it is read from the effect register into the work register, and when you save, the contents of the work register are written to the effect register. Master timeline registers There are 99 master timeline registers, numbered 1 to 99, for each control panel. They store keyframe effect regions and the register numbers saved in the regions. Snapshot registers These are registers for snapshots, and there are 99, numbered 1 to 99 for each region. Master snapshot registers There are 99 master snapshot registers, numbered 1 to 99, for each control panel. They store snapshot regions and the register numbers saved in the regions. Regions and Registers 167 Keyframes A keyframe represents an instantaneous state of an image; it can be saved and recalled for reuse. Chapter 1 MVS-8000 Functions Effects By arranging a number of keyframes on the time axis, and interpolating between successive keyframes, you can create an effect in which there is a continuous change from each keyframe to the next. The following figure shows three keyframes created with a wipe pattern (the circle) in different positions. This is interpolated to create the effect shown. Background A Background B Keyframe 1 Interpolated images Keyframe 2 Keyframe 3 Effect execution Example of keyframes and effect execution You can save the sequence of keyframes representing a single effect in a register. Then by recalling this register, you can replay the same effect. For details of keyframe effect registers, see “Regions and Registers” (page 165). 168 Keyframes Saving and Recalling Effects Chapter 1 MVS-8000 Functions To create a new effect, first recall an empty register, then create the keyframes one at a time in this register. To run an effect, it is also necessary to set the time and the path. To edit an existing effect, recall the register holding the effect, then make the changes. When you have finished creating or editing the effect, save it in the recalled register or another specified register. Auto save function When you recall an effect, the currently recalled effect is automatically saved in a register. This is called the auto save function. You can disable this function in a Setup menu. Effect Attributes An individual effect may also have attached special conditions relating to switcher or DME operation when the effect is recalled. These conditions are called “attributes” of the effect, and can be added when the keyframe effect is saved or recalled. Type of attribute The attribute that can be attached to an effect is as follows. Effect dissolve: The transition from the state before the effect recall to the state at the effect start point is carried out smoothly, by a dissolve. The dissolve duration can be set in the Effect menu. Temporary attributes When a keyframe is recalled, independently of the attributes held in the register, you can also enable or disable temporary attributes. These temporary attributes are set when the keyframe effect is recalled. Effect Editing For editing operations such as to insert, delete, or modify a keyframe, it is necessary to stop the effect at the corresponding point on the time axis. This is termed an “edit point.” Keyframes 169 Chapter 1 MVS-8000 Functions You can edit either on a keyframe within the effect, or at any point between keyframes. Insert: Insert the current image as a keyframe. Inserting a keyframe in an existing effect may change the duration of the effect (see page 172). Modify: Modify a keyframe. You can modify a single keyframe or a range of keyframes in the effect together. Delete: Delete a keyframe. You can delete a single keyframe or a range of keyframes in the effect together. Deleting keyframes from an effect reduces the duration of the effect (see page 173). After deleting a keyframe, you can reinsert the keyframe with a paste operation. Copy: Copy a keyframe. You can copy a single keyframe or a range of keyframes in the effect together. Paste: Paste the keyframe last copied or deleted anywhere within the effect. Pause: You can set a pause on a particular keyframe, so that when the effect is run it pauses on this keyframe. You can make this setting on any number of keyframes. To restart the paused effect, repeat the operation to run the effect. KF Loop: Execute the effect the specified number of times through the keyframes in the specified range. Undo an edit operation: Undo the effect of the last operation to insert, modify, delete, or paste a keyframe. Duration modes In keyframe editing, there are two duration modes; switch between them in the keyframe operation section. (See “Time Settings” in Chapter 13 (Volume 2).) Variable duration mode: In this mode, inserting or deleting a keyframe increases or reduces the duration. Constant duration mode: In this mode, inserting or deleting a keyframe does not change the duration. This is useful for keyframe editing of an effect with a fixed duration. In the variable and constant duration modes, the keyframes to which a modify operation applies, and the effect of a paste operation are different. Difference in keyframes to which a modify operation applies Effect position Variable duration mode Constant duration mode On a keyframe Applies to currently selected keyframe Applies to currently selected keyframe Between two keyframes Applies to previous keyframe Modify operation not possible a) a) A new keyframe is inserted at the effect position. 170 Keyframes Difference in the effect of a paste operation Variable duration mode: The copied keyframe is inserted at the specified position. Constant duration mode: The copied keyframe is written over the specified position. Transition mode Chapter 1 MVS-8000 Functions You can use an effect created with keyframes as a DME wipe pattern on the switcher. In this case, it is necessary to set the transition mode (the way in which the effect behaves). For details of the setting, see “User Programmable DME Transition Mode” (page 483). Time Settings Keyframe duration and effect duration You can determine the execution time of an effect by setting either the keyframe durations or the effect duration. Keyframe duration: This is the time from the keyframe to the next keyframe. You can set this time in the keyframe control block. (See “Time Settings” in Chapter 13 (Volume 2).) In constant duration mode (see page 170), it is not possible to change the keyframe duration setting. Effect duration: This is the total execution time of the effect, from the first keyframe to the last. You can set this time in the keyframe control block. (See “Time Settings” in Chapter 13 (Volume 2).) When you change the effect duration, the keyframe duration for each keyframe in the effect is automatically recalculated proportionally. Keyframe duration Keyframe number 1 2 3 4 5 Effect duration Schematic view of keyframe duration and effect duration Keyframes 171 The effect duration may also be changed by inserting or deleting keyframes. Changes in the effect duration caused by inserting a keyframe • When the effect is stopped on a keyframe, inserting a keyframe increases the effect duration by the duration of the inserted keyframe. • When the effect is stopped between two keyframes, inserting a keyframe does not change the effect duration. Chapter 1 MVS-8000 Functions Note In constant duration mode (see page 170), the duration of the current keyframe is reduced to zero, and the new keyframe is inserted with the previous duration of the current keyframe. Thus the effect duration does not change. Insertion position Insertion before the first keyframe Change in effect duration 0 1 2 1 Insertion between two keyframes Insertion at an existing keyframe Insertion at the last keyframe 2 1 2 1 2 3 1 2 3 1 2 1 2 3 1 2 3 3 3 4 3 4 3 4 4 5 5 4 4 5 4 4 Keyframe insertion position and the change in effect duration 172 Keyframes 5 Changes in the effect duration caused by deleting a keyframe • When the effect is stopped on a keyframe, a delete operation deletes the keyframe, and reduces the effect duration by the duration of the deleted keyframe. • When the effect is stopped between two keyframes, a delete operation deletes the preceding keyframe, and reduces the effect duration by the duration of the deleted keyframe. Chapter 1 MVS-8000 Functions Note In constant duration mode (see page 170), the duration of the keyframe before the deleted keyframe is increased by the duration of the deleted keyframe. Thus the effect duration does not change. Deletion position Change in effect duration Deletion of the first keyframe 1 1 Deletion of an intermediate keyframe 1 1 Deletion between two keyframes 3 2 3 2 2 1 1 Deletion of the last keyframe 2 1 1 3 4 3 2 2 2 2 4 3 4 3 3 4 3 Keyframe deletion position and the change in effect duration Keyframes 173 Delay setting You can set the delay from the time of executing an operation to run the effect, and the effect actually starting (that is, the delay until the first keyframe). You can make this setting in the keyframe control block. (See “Time Settings” in Chapter 13 (Volume 2).) Note that changing the delay does not alter the duration of the effect. Chapter 1 MVS-8000 Functions Paths The term “path” refers to the specification of how interpolation is carried out from one keyframe to the next. For details of the path setting procedure, see “Path Settings” in Chapter 13 (Volume 2). Switcher path settings Carry out path settings in the Key Frame menu. For each menu, the following settings are available. M/E-1 to M/E-3, and P/P menus Item Paths that can be set M/E1 to M/E3, P/P All For each M/E and PGM/PST, path settings for the following items are made simultaneously. Key1 to Key4 Overall path settings for items relating to keys 1 to 4 are made simultaneously. Key 1 All to Key 4 All Source Key source path for keys 1 to 4 Fill Key fill path for keys 1 to 4 Proc Proc path for keys 1 to 4 Trans Transition path for keys 1 to 4 Bkgd/Util All Overall path settings for items relating to backgrounds and utility buses are made simultaneously. Bkgd A Path for background A Bkgd B Path for background B Util 1 Path for utility 1 Util 2 Path for utility 2 DME 2nd Video Path for video to be used for second DME channel Bkgd/Util 174 Keyframes Item Paths that can be set Wipe/DME Wipe Overall path settings for items relating to wipes and DME wipes are made simultaneously. Wipe Wipe Path for wipes DME Wipe Path for DME wipes – Transition path for each M/E and P/P bank Chapter 1 MVS-8000 Functions Trans Wipe/DME Wipe All User1 to User8 menus The items that can be adjusted depend on the settings in the Setup menu. For details, see “Overall Control Panel Settings (Config Menu)” in Chapter 16 (Volume 2). Item Paths that can be set User1 All to User8 All Overall path settings for the following items for each “User” are made simultaneously. FM All Overall path settings for frame memory items are made simultaneously. FM Src FM Src All Overall path settings for frame memory source items are made simultaneously. FM Src1 Path for frame memory source 1 and video process FM Src2 Path for frame memory source 2 and video process FM Proc FM Proc All Overall path settings relating to the signal processing other than frame memory source and frame memory freeze outputs are made simultaneously. FM Proc1 Path for frame memory signal processing 1 FM Proc2 Path for frame memory signal processing 2 FM Still Store FM Still Store All FM Still Store 1 to 8 Aux Aux All Aux 1 to 48 Mon Mon All Mon 1 to 8 Overall path settings for frame memory freeze image output are made simultaneously. Paths for frame memory freeze image outputs 1 to 8 Overall path settings for AUX buses are made simultaneously. Paths for Aux 1 to 48 Overall path settings for monitor buses are made simultaneously. Paths for monitor buses 1 to 8 Keyframes 175 Item Paths that can be set Color Bkgd Overall path settings for color backgrounds are made simultaneously. Color Bkgd All Color Bkgd 1 Paths for color background 1 Color Bkgd 2 Paths for color background 2 CCR Overall path settings for color corrector Chapter 1 MVS-8000 Functions CCR All CCR 1 Path for color corrector 1 CCR 2 Path for color corrector 2 Paths relating to DME DME 3D Trans Local menu Item Paths that can be set 3D Trans Local All Overall path settings for local channel threedimensional transform items are made simultaneously. Loc Size Overall path settings for items relating to image size changes and movement are made simultaneously. Loc Size All Size Path for image size Post Loc X, Post Loc Y Paths for movement in the x- and y-axes Post Size Path for size Loc XYZ Loc XYZ All Loc X, Loc Y, Loc Z Rot Rot All Rot X, Rot Y, Rot Z Spin Spin All Overall path settings for items relating to image rotation are made simultaneously. Paths for the x-, y- and z-axes Overall path settings for items relating to spin are made simultaneously. Paths for the x-, y- and z-axes Spin X, Spin Y, Spin Z Paths for the x-, y- and z-axes Asp All Rate X, Rate Y Keyframes Paths for the x-, y- and z-axes Spin Src X, Spin Src Y, Spin Src Z Asp 176 Overall path settings for items relating to image movement are made simultaneously. Overall path settings for items relating to aspect ratio are made simultaneously. Paths for the x- and y-axes Item Paths that can be set Skew Overall path settings for items relating to skew are made simultaneously. Skew All Skew X, Skew Y Paths for the x- and y-axes Aspect Path for aspect ratio Pers Chapter 1 MVS-8000 Functions Pers All Overall path settings for items relating to perspective are made simultaneously. Pers X, Pers Y, Pers Z Paths for the x-, y- and z-axes Axis Loc Axis All Overall path settings for items relating to image rotation axis are made simultaneously. Axis X, Axis Y, Axis Z Paths for the x-, y- and z-axes DME 3D Trans Global menu Item Paths that can be set 3D Trans Global All Overall path settings for three-dimensional transform items in the global channel are made simultaneously. Loc Size Loc Size All Overall path settings for items relating to image size changes and movement are made simultaneously. Size Path for image size Post Loc X, Post Loc Y Paths for movement in the x- and y-axes Post Size Path for size Loc XYZ Loc XYZ All Loc X, Loc Y, Loc Z Rot Rot All Rot X, Rot Y, Rot Z Spin Spin All Overall path settings for items relating to image movement are made simultaneously. Paths for the x-, y- and z-axes Overall path settings for items relating to image rotation are made simultaneously. Paths for the x-, y- and z-axes Overall path settings for items relating to spin are made simultaneously. Spin Src X, Spin Src Y, Spin Src Z Paths for the x-, y- and z-axes Spin X, Spin Y, Spin Z Paths for the x-, y- and z-axes Pers Pers All Overall path settings for items relating to perspective are made simultaneously. Pers X, Pers Y, Pers Z Paths for the x-, y- and z-axes Keyframes 177 Item Paths that can be set Axis Loc Overall path settings for items relating to image rotation axis are made simultaneously. Axis All Axis X, Axis Y, Axis Z Paths for the x-, y- and z-axes DME Effect menu Chapter 1 MVS-8000 Functions Item Paths that can be set Effect All Overall path settings for DME effect items are made simultaneously. Edge Edge All Border Path for border Crop/Edge Soft Path for crop/edge softness Beveled Edge Path for beveled edge Key Border Path for key border a) Art Edge Path for art edge a) Flex Shadow Path for flex shadow a) Wipe Crop Path for wipe crop a) Color Mix Path for color mix a) Video Modify Video Modify All 178 Keyframes Overall path settings for edge items are made simultaneously. Overall path settings for video modify items are made simultaneously. Defocus/Blur Path for defocus/blur Multi Move Path for “multi-move” Color Modify Path for color modify Mosaic Path for mosaic Mask Path for mask b) Sketch Path for sketch b) Metal Path for metal b) Dim/Fade Path for dim/fade a) Glow Path for glow b) Freeze Path for freeze Non-Linear Path for nonlinear effects Item Paths that can be set Light Overall path settings for lighting items are made simultaneously. Light All Lighting Path for lighting Spot Lighting Path for spotlighting a) Path for trails In/Out Overall path settings for items relating to input/ output are made simultaneously. In/Out All Bkgd Path for background Video/Key Path for video/key Chapter 1 MVS-8000 Functions Trail a) This cannot be used on the MVE-8000/8000A. b) This cannot be used on the MVE-8000. DME Global Effect menu Item Paths that can be set Global Effect All Overall path settings for DME global effect items are made simultaneously. Combine Path for combiner Shadow Path for shadow Brick Path for brick Types of path Path types for Curve There are five types, as follows. OFF: Executing the effect causes no change. Step: There is no interpolation between keyframes, so that the effect parameters are updated each time a keyframe is passed. Linear: Linear interpolation between keyframes, resulting in constant speed movement. S-Curve: The rate of change accelerates and decelerates before and after a keyframe, so that the rate of change is maximum midway between two keyframes. Spline: The effect follows a smooth curved path from each keyframe to the next. Path types for Hue There are four types, as follows. Keyframes 179 CW: The hue changes in a clockwise direction as seen on a Vectorscope. CCW: The hue changes in a counterclockwise direction as seen on a Vectorscope. Short: The hue changes in whichever of the clockwise and counterclockwise directions is shorter. Long: The hue changes in whichever of the clockwise and counterclockwise directions is longer. Chapter 1 MVS-8000 Functions Path types for Xpt There are two types, as follows. Xpt Hold off: When replaying a keyframe, change the inputs to the settings saved in memory. Xpt Hold on: When replaying a keyframe, do not change the inputs. Effect Execution By pressing the [RUN] button in the keyframe control block, you can replay the effect as a continuous sequence of images. This is referred to as effect execution. It is also possible to execute effects from the device control block (see page 271), the Flexi Pad control block (see page 264) or the transition control block (see page 260). Range of execution Each time the [RUN] button is pressed, the range of execution of the effect is from timecode 01:00:00:00 or the current time (the position at which the current effect is stopped) to the end point of the effect. However, if there is a pause set on a keyframe, the execution range is up to that point. Pressing the [RUN] button again resumes the effect, which then runs to the next pause point or the end of the effect. Run mode setting You can select from the following run modes for when the effect is executed. DIRECTION: Specify the effect execution direction. STOP NEXT KF: Run the effect, and stop at the next keyframe. EFFECT LOOP: Repeat the effect in an endless loop. Make these settings in the keyframe control block. (See “Run Mode Setting” in Chapter 13 (Volume 2).) 180 Keyframes Master Timelines Chapter 1 MVS-8000 Functions You can save the regions selected for a keyframe effect and the register numbers saved in the regions in a master timeline register so that operation can be applied to two or more regions at a time. To save master timeline registers, use the numeric keypad control block or menu; to recall them you can use the numeric keypad control block, menu, or the Flexi Pad control block. For more details, see “Creating and Saving a Master Timeline” in Chapter 13 (Volume 2). Keyframes 181 Snapshots Chapter 1 MVS-8000 Functions The term “snapshot” refers to a function whereby the various settings required to apply a particular effect to an image are saved in memory as a set of data, for recall as required, to recover the original state. You can carry out snapshot operations using the numeric keypad control block, the Flexi Pad control block in each of the M/E-1 to M/E-3 and PGM/PST banks, and the Snapshot menu. Note If the M/E bank has the Inhibit setting (see “Overall Control Panel Settings (Config Menu)” in Chapter 16 (Volume 2)), it is not possible to recall a snapshot on that M/E bank. For details of snapshot operations, see Chapter 14 “Snapshots” (Volume 2). Snapshot Types Snapshots are divided as follows. Snapshots applying to a particular region (functional block of the switcher or DME) The term “snapshot” alone usually refers to this type of snapshot. This only applies to regions assigned to region selection buttons in the numeric keypad control block. Master snapshot: This applies to the selected regions and the register numbers saved in the regions. A master snapshot can be saved and recalled using the numeric keypad control block. Snapshots applying only to particular functions This type of snapshot includes the following. Key snapshot: This includes the key on/off state and all key settings other than key priority for each keyer. (See “Key Snapshots” (page 57).) Wipe snapshot: This includes the wipe settings of each of the M/E-1 to M/E3 and PGM/PST banks. (See “Wipe Snapshots” (page 71).) DME wipe snapshot: This includes the DME wipe settings of each of the M/ E-1 to M/E-3 and PGM/PST banks. The rest of this section describes the snapshots that apply to a particular region or regions. 182 Snapshots Snapshot Attributes An individual snapshot may also have attached special conditions relating to switcher or DME operation when the snapshot is recalled. These conditions are called “attributes” of the snapshot, and can be added when the snapshot is saved or recalled. Chapter 1 MVS-8000 Functions Types of attribute There are five snapshot attributes, as follows. Cross-point hold: When the snapshot is recalled, the cross-point button selection remains unchanged. This can be set independently for each bus. Key disable: When the snapshot is recalled, the key settings remain unchanged. This can be set independently for each keyer. A Setup menu allows you to select whether or not the key on/off state should also remain unchanged. For details of the setting operation, see “Settings Relating to Keys, Wipes and Frame Memory (Key/Wipe/FM/CCR Menu)” in the Chapter 16 (Volume 2). Effect dissolve: The transition from the state before the snapshot recall to the snapshot settings is carried out smoothly, by a dissolve. The dissolve duration can be set in the Snapshot menu. Auto transition: An auto transition starts the instant the snapshot is recalled. The auto transition setting is valid only for M/E-1, M/E-2, M/E-3, and PGM/PST. Note If both effect dissolve and auto transition are selected as attributes, the auto transition takes precedence. GPI output: A GPI output is sent to the allocated GPI port the instant the snapshot is recalled. The trigger type depends on the switcher GPI output settings made in the Setup menu. For details, see “Interfacing With External Devices (Device Interface Menu)” under “Setup Relating to Switcher Processor” in Chapter 16 (Volume 2). Clip event: Recall a frame memory clip immediately after the snapshot is recalled. Snapshots 183 Note Clip events are not supported on the MVS-8000. Auto play: Play a frame memory clip immediately after the snapshot is recalled. Table of available attributes Chapter 1 MVS-8000 Functions The attributes that can be used depend on the region, as follows. Yes: Can be used No: Cannot be used Attribute Region M/E-1, M/E-2, M/E-3, and PGM/PST User 1 to User 8 DME ch 1 to DME ch 8 Cross-point hold Yes Yes Yes Key disable Yes No No Effect dissolve Yes Yes Yes Auto transition Yes No No GPI outputs Yes Yes No Clip event No Yes No Auto play No Yes No Attribute display You can view the attributes of a snapshot in the Snapshot menu. For more details, see “Snapshot Operations in the Menus” in Chapter 14 (Volume 2). Temporary attributes When recalling a snapshot, you can temporarily apply attributes distinct from the attributes set for each register. These are called “temporary attributes.” You can set temporary attributes when recalling a snapshot. For details of snapshot operations, see Chapter 14 “Snapshots” (Volume 2). Bus override If you recall a snapshot while holding down an A or B bus button, the selection of the signal on the A or B bus does not change when the snapshot is recalled. This function is called “bus override.” This function is effective when cross-point hold is off, and you want to temporarily maintain the cross-point setting. When cross-point hold is on, the above operation is not necessary. 184 Snapshots Utility Chapter 1 MVS-8000 Functions The utility function refers to a function whereby you can assign an arbitrary action or a shortcut for frequently used menu to a particular button, then instantly recall the action or menu by pressing the button. The functions you can assign include menu shortcuts, enabling/disabling functions (recalling utility commands), and recalling (shotbox registers or macro registers). Carry out the button assignment in the Setup menu. For details of the operation, see “Setting Button Assignments (Prefs/Utility Menu)” in Chapter 16 (Volume 2). You can carry out the utility function in the utility/shotbox control block (see page 298), in the cross-point control block (see page 256), or using the user preference buttons in the menu control block (see page 294). Utility 185 Shotbox Chapter 1 MVS-8000 Functions The term “shotbox” refers to a function whereby for each specified region any snapshot or keyframe effect can be recalled simultaneously. The simultaneous recall setting data such as region names, snapshot numbers and keyframe effect numbers are stored in “registers.” There are 99 registers for each control panel. Register #1 Register #2 M/E-1: Snapshot #1 User2: Effect #5 DME ch3: Effect #1 M/E-1: Snapshot #1 DME ch1: Snapshot #15 GPI: Effect #1 M/E-1: Effect #1 P/P: Effect #90 User1: Effect #1 Register #3 P/P: Effect #2 DME ch1: Snapshot #1 Register #99 Auto Run: On Auto Run: Off Auto Run: Off Auto Run: On Shotbox registers The previous figure shows schematically the settings in the 99 shotbox registers. Each register may contain any combination of the regions to which the register applies, with the snapshots or effects to be recalled. The Auto Run function is an attribute which can be set for each register. When this is set to On, an effect recalled by a shotbox operation is automatically run. • When register 1 is executed, this recalls M/E-1 snapshot 1, User2 effect 5, and DME ch3 effect 1. For register 1, auto run is On, and therefore the User2 and DME ch3 effects are run as soon as they have been recalled. • When register 3 is executed, M/E-1 effect 1, P/P effect 90, and User1 effect 1 are recalled. For register 3, auto run is off, and therefore to run the recalled effects, press the [RUN] button in the keyframe control block. Shotbox settings and execution Carry out shotbox register settings from the Shotbox menu or using the numeric keypad control block. You can carry out shotbox execution using the numeric keypad control block, the Flexi Pad control block, the utility/shotbox control block, or the cross-point control block buttons. For details of operation, see Chapter 15 “Shotbox” (Volume 2). 186 Shotbox Setup Overview of Setup Chapter 1 MVS-8000 Functions Various settings are required, in order to operate the switcher, control panel, DME, external devices, and so on, connected together in a single system. This is referred to as “setup,” and you can carry out the setup operations from the Engineering Setup menu. For details of the operations, see Chapter 16 “Engineering Setup” (Volume 2). The settings in the Engineering Setup menu are grouped under the following headings. • System setup (System): Settings relating to the whole system (see the following section “System Setup.”) • Panel setup (Panel): Settings particular to the control panel (see page 195) • Switcher setup (Switcher): Settings particular to the switcher processor (see page 198) • DME setup (DME): Settings particular to the DME processor (see page 202) • DCU setup (DCU): DCU input and output settings (see page 202) • Router/tally setup (Router/Tally): Router interface and tally settings (see page 203) System Setup The system setup settings apply to the whole system. Here the “whole system” refers to all devices connected on the Control LAN. The DCU is connected through the control panel, but is also included in the “whole system.” You can make the following settings. Network configuration (Network Config) This provides automatic configuration of all devices connected to the Data LAN (excluding the DCU), and displays a list of them. System configuration (System Config) Specify the overall system operation mode and the hierarchical relationship of the devices. Setup 187 Operation mode setting • Single Proc mode: The control panel controls a single switcher and up to two DMEs. • Single Simul mode: See “Special system setting (Single Processor Simul mode)” (page 188). • Dual Simul mode: The control panel controls two switchers and DMEs simultaneously. Chapter 1 MVS-8000 Functions Device hierarchical relationship setting • Panel Assign: Specify the switcher controlled by a control panel. • Switcher Assign: Specify the DME connected to a switcher. Special system setting (Single Processor Simul mode) When using a combination of a 4M/E switcher processor and a 4-channel DME processor in an HD system, the Single Processor Simul mode is available. In this mode, M/E-1 on the switcher processor is linked to M/E-3, and M/E-2 is linked to P/P. As a result, the M/E-1 and M/E-2 panel buttons go off, and cannot be operated. In this mode, the screen aspect ratio is fixed, as follows. Processor Bank or channel Switcher processor DME processor Screen aspect ratio M/E-3 and P/P 16:9 M/E-1 and M/E-2 4:3 Channels 1 and 2 16:9 Channels 3 and 4 4:3 Relation between switcher and DME: Operations are linked with the screen aspect ratios the same. Notes • The waveforms for wipe pattern numbers 23, 24, 26, and 27 are the same in 4:3 and 16:9 modes. • Color backgrounds, frame memory, and other functions used on the whole switcher operate at 16:9. Note on creating a user programmable DME: The keyframe registers used for creating a user programmable DME are divided by screen aspect ratio as shown in the following table. 188 Setup Register numbers Screen aspect ratio Switcher bank Channel 101 to 149, 201 to 249, 301 to 349 16:9 M/E-3 Ch1 P/P Ch2 Register numbers Screen aspect ratio Switcher bank Channel 151 to 199, 251 to 299, 351 to 399 4:3 M/E-1 Ch3 M/E-2 Ch4 Chapter 1 MVS-8000 Functions The actual operation is linked between the top and bottom rows of the table (e.g. M/E-3 and M/E-1), but the common setting values cannot be used between the two screen aspect ratios. The edges of the screen, for example, differ between 16:9 and 4:3. For image operations in the device control block, first make the settings separately on the different channels. Recalling a user programmable DME: When recalling a user programmable DME, select pattern numbers 1901 to 1949, 2901 to 2949, or 3901 to 3949. The effects for the 16:9 and 4:3 screen aspect ratios will be recalled linked together. Signal format settings (Format) Make the following settings. Signal format Specify the signal format to be handled by the devices. The combinations of signal formats that can be selected are as follows. System HD system Field frequency Effective number of scan lines 50 1080i 59.94 60 23.976 1080PsF 24 25 29.97 30 50 720P 59.94 SD system 59.94 480i 50 576i Software options for multi-format To use the MVS-8000G with multi-format support requires the following software options. Setup 189 Product name Model No. Switcher Switcher Upgrade Software BZS-8500M MVS-8000G BZS-8510M MVS-8000GSF The following software options are also required depending on the number of M/E banks. Chapter 1 MVS-8000 Functions Product name Model No. Switcher Mix/Effect Upgrade Software BZS-8520M MVS-8000GSF 2M/E system or MVS-8000G 3M/E system BZS-8520M and BZS-8530M MVS-8000G 4M/E system To use the software, you are required to input an install key. For the method of inputting an install key, see “Installation and Device Setup (Install/Unit Config Menu)” in Chapter 16 (Volume 2). Format converter (for MVS-8000G only) Installing the MKS-8450G Format Converter Board in the switcher enables the following signal video format conversions. • Up-conversion: from SD (4:3) to HD (16:9) • Down-conversion: from HD (16:9) to SD (4:3) • Cross-conversion: from HD (720P) to HD (1080i), or from HD (1080i) to HD (720P) The maximum number of input signals for which format conversion is possible is 16 (or 8 when only one MKS-8450G board is installed), and the maximum number of output signals is 4 (2 for output on the MVS-8000GSF). Notes • After format conversion, input and output signals have one-frame delays with respect to the reference signals. • It is not possible to apply the safe title function to output signals subjected to format conversion. • When the input reference signal for HD system is set to Tri Sync, the format converter function is not available. For details, see “Setting the Signal Format (Format Menu)” in Chapter 16 (Volume 2). Format combinations allowing conversion The supported combinations of switcher signal format and format converter (inputs 1 to 8 and inputs 9 to 16) are as follows. 190 Setup Switcher Format converter signal format setting signal format FC Input 1-8 FC Input 9-16 setting 720P/59.94 1080i/59.94 1080PsF/29.97 720P/59.94 1080i/59.94 1080PsF/29.97 576i/50 720P/50 1080i/50 1080PsF/25 720P/50 1080i/50 1080PsF/25 720P/50 576i/501080i/50 576i/501080i/50 720P/59.94 480i/59.94 1080i/59.94 480i/59.94 1080i/59.94 1080i/50 576i/50 720P/50 576i/50 720P/50 1080i/59.94 480i/59.94 720P/59.94 480i/59.94 720P/59.94 1080PsF/25 576i/50 576i/50 1080PsF/ 29.97 480i/59.94 480i/59.94 Format selected for FC Input 1-8 Chapter 1 MVS-8000 Functions 480i/59.94 FC Output 1-4 Screen aspect ratio Switch the screen aspect ratio to 4:3 or 16:9. Changing the input reference signal in an HD system This changes the input reference signal. • Tri Sync: tri-level sync for an HD system • BB (Black Burst): black burst or sync for an SD system The following table shows the relation between signal format and the frequency of a signal that can be used as the input reference signal. Signal format Input reference signal Tri Sync Black burst 1080PsF/29.97, 1080i/59.94 59.94 Black Burst 59.94 Sync 59.94 1080PsF/25, 1080i/50 50 Black Burst 50 Sync 50 1080PsF/23.976 47.952 Black Burst 59.94 a) Sync 59.94 a) 1080PsF/30, 1080i/60 60 – 1080PsF/24 48 – 720P/59.94 59.94 Black Burst 59.94 Sync 59.94 720P/50 – Black Burst 50 Sync 50 a) Interlock mode Setup 191 Selecting the start up state (Start Up) Set the initial state of the devices when the system is powered on. For each device, you can select Resume mode or Custom mode. Resume mode This resumes the setting state at the previous power-off operation. This setting is only available for the switcher processor and panel. Chapter 1 MVS-8000 Functions Custom mode This uses the settings saved in non-volatile memory or ROM within the device. In this mode, there are Setup and Initial Status settings which can be set separately. • Setup mode: Select the setup state to be used after powering on from the following. User: Start up using the user data previously saved with [Setup Define]. Factory: Start up with the factory default settings. • Initial status mode: Select the state of each device after powering on (excluding the settings to which “setup” applies). User: Start up using the user data previously saved with [Initial Status Define]. For the control panel, this applies to the key bus delegation buttons only. Factory: Start up with the factory default settings. For details of saving and recalling setup data, see “Saving and Recalling Setup Data” (page 194) and the appendix “Data Saved by [Setup Define] and [Initial Setup Define]” (Volume 2). Autoload function Switch on or off the function to automatically load predetermined register data or frame memory image data at power on. Set the data to be read in the File menu. System reset and memory initialization (Initialize) • Reset: Reset to state after powering on. • All Clear: Clear the memory, and carry out initialization. The Network Config, System Config, Format, and Start Up setup values are set by reference to data stored in non-volatile memory, and the system automatically starts up. It is not necessary to reset the Date/Time settings. For more details, see “Saving and Recalling Setup Data” (page 194). Installation and device settings (Install/Unit Config) This installs the software and firmware in all devices (including the DCU) connected to the Data LAN. 192 Setup Install: Automatically detects the software that can be installed on each device, and installs the selected software. Chapter 1 MVS-8000 Functions There are also the following functions. Detail Information: Gives details of the software and firmware installed in each device. Unit Config: Carries out device settings. Switches the color corrector function of the switcher processor between secondary color correction and spot color adjustment, sets the field polarity of frame memory images, and so on. License: Makes the license valid or invalid. Device management (Maintenance) • • • • • • Date and time setting Formatting a memory card Primary settings for USB external storage device Reloading a USB driver Formatting the hard disk Locking setup menu operations – For each VF button group, selecting a set of candidate menus to be locked, then locking all of the candidates using a password. Except for list scrolling, moving menus, and similar operations, menu operations for all settings can be locked. – Changing the password Setup 193 Saving and Recalling Setup Data Hard disk / memory card User setup data Chapter 1 MVS-8000 Functions Load Save File menu: [Save] File menu: [Load] RAM Current setup data (If in Resume mode, settings data is saved.) Store In Custom mode, power on or reset Initialize Setup menu: [Setup Define] Non-volatile memory User setup data Setup menu: [All Clear] ROM Factory default setup data Concept of saving and recalling setup data Updating the switcher or control panel setup data saves the updated setup data in RAM in each device. • In Resume mode (see page 192), even if devices are reset or powered off, the data is preserved in RAM, and recalled when the power is turned back on. Note The Resume mode cannot be used for DMEs and DCUs. • In Custom mode (see page 192), the user-defined settings (user setup data) saved in non-volatile memory or factory default setup data held in ROM in 194 Setup each device is recalled when a reset is made or the power is turned back on. (See “Selecting the start up state (Start Up)” (page 192).) Note that the setup data in RAM can also be saved to the control panel hard disk or memory card. Panel Setup Chapter 1 MVS-8000 Functions In panel setup, you carry out settings particular to the control panel. You can make the following settings. For details of the operations, see “Setup Relating to Operations From the Control Panel” in Chapter 16 (Volume 2). Panel settings (Config) • M/E Assign: Set the logical configuration of the M/E and P/P banks. • M/E Operation: For each of the M/E and P/P banks, make operations possible, not possible, or disabled (Enable/Disable/Inhibit). • Dual M/E Assign: Using two M/E banks, assign the shift and non-shift button rows of a single M/E bank. • Dual M/E Xpt Swap: When a setting has been made for Dual M/E Assign, swap the shift and non-shift button rows. • DSK Fader Assign: Carry out fader function assignment and key delegation for the key delegation buttons, in each of the maximum of four downstream key control blocks. • External Bus Link: Make link settings relating internal switcher buses to routing switcher destinations. • Key Trans Link: Select whether or not to link transitions between keyers, and if so which keyer to link to. You can set the links between keyers for each M/E bank separately. • Reference Module: When a trackball module and a joystick module are both connected as device control blocks, select which is used as the reference. • 10 Key Region Assign: Assign any regions to the region selection buttons in the numeric keypad control block. Also used for setting the regions included in the selection when the [All] button is pressed. • Program Button: Make assignments for buttons of some control blocks such as assigning the buttons in a transition control block for controlling a VTR and assigning the Flexi Pad control block to macro operation. • Compact Key Module Assign: You can select which keys can be operated with an independent key transition control block (simple type). • M/E Operation Inhibit: For each M/E or P/P bank, enable or inhibit utility 2 bus and key-related operations. Setup 195 Cross-point button settings (Xpt Assign) Chapter 1 MVS-8000 Functions • Xpt Assign: For each control block or bus, display and set the assignments to the main table and tables 1 to 14. You can also carry out settings to link switcher signal selection to the audio mixer. • Main, V/K Pair Assign: Make cross-point settings for the main table. – Assign video/key sources for button numbers 1 to 128. – For each table, specify whether the rightmost cross-point button in each row is used as a shift button, and the operation mode when it is used as a shift button. – For the [SHIFT] button in the cross-point control block and for each table, select the mode in which this is a shift button dedicated to the source name displays, or the mode in which it is a shift button for all buses. – Disable cross-point buttons to work. • Mixer Xpt Assign: Assign audio mixer cross-points to cross-point buttons in the main table. • Table Button Assign: Create tables 1 to 14 in the same way as the main table. • Src Name: Set source names of up to 16 characters. • LCD Color: Set the LCD color for source name display. • Table Copy: Copy table contents from the main table to tables 1 to 14 or between tables 1 to 14 (it is not possible to copy tables 1 to 14 to the main table). • Name Export: This function sends the source name and destination name to the S-Bus. • Side Flags Button Assign: Assign the rightmost button in the background A/B row to the side flag function (inserting a selected image on both sides of a 4:3 image). Auxiliary bus control block settings (Aux Assign) • Aux Assign: Assign the AUX delegation buttons in the auxiliary bus control block to any bus. • Shift Mode: Specify whether the rightmost button of the AUX delegation buttons is used as a shift button, and when it is used as a shift button, the operation mode. • RTR Mode Setting: Carry out the following settings for using the auxiliary bus control block for router control. – Assigning destinations – Setting the shift operation in the destination selection button rows – Source table settings – Setting the shift operation in the source selection button rows – Assigning levels to the level selection buttons – Setting destination selection buttons to be used for snapshots 196 Setup Button assignment settings (Prefs/Utility) Chapter 1 MVS-8000 Functions Assign the [PREFS 1] to [PREFS 16] buttons in the menu control block, the utility/shotbox control block buttons, and the cross-Point control block. This assigns recalling frequently used menus (menu shortcuts), enabling/ disabling functions (recalling utility commands) and recalling shotbox registers or macro registers. • User Preference: Make the settings for the user preference buttons in the menu control block. • Utility Module Assign: Make the utility/shotbox control block settings. • KEY 2/4 Bus Button Assign: Make the settings for the key 2 row buttons in the cross-point control block. External device connections (Device Interface) • GPI Input: Set the GPI input ports and trigger type, and make the action settings. • GPI Output: Set the GPI output ports and trigger type, and make the action settings. • P-Bus Control: Set the control mode for P-Bus devices. • DCU Serial Port Assign: Assign the devices (disk recorder/VTR/Extended VTR) connected to a DCU and accessible from the control panel to the [DEV1] to [DEV12] buttons which become operative when you press the [DEV] button on the device control block. For a disk recorder or Extended VTR, you can also make settings relating to sharing of file lists. Further, you can make settings for devices (disk recorder/VTR/Extended VTR) operable from an editing keyboard. • Editor Port Assign: When the BZS-8050 license is valid, make settings for the SCU editor panel port. Operation settings (Operation) • Button Tally: Set whether or not the system tally generation results are reflected in the panel tally. • Trans Rate Display: Select whether the transition rate display mode is in frames or timecode units. • S-Bus Name Link: Copy the S-Bus description name to the source name. • Effect: For keyframe effects, you can make the following settings. (See Chapter 13 “Keyframe Effects” (Volume 2).) – Recall mode – Automatically turning off the [EDIT ENBL] button when an effect is recalled – Automatic insertion of a first keyframe when an empty register is recalled – Effect Auto Save – Default KF Duration – Setting whether or not to replay the first keyframe after rewinding a GPI/ P-Bus/disk recorder/VTR/Extended VTR/Macro effect Setup 197 Chapter 1 MVS-8000 Functions • Source/Dest Name: For the Source/Dest (source/destination) names used by the system, select one of the following: – Source name set by cross-point assignment or fixed bus name – Description name set on routing switcher – “Type + Num” name set on routing switcher Names assigned with Xpt Assign can be replaced later with description names. • Name Display: Specify the number of characters for display of the names selected in Source/Dest Name above, as two characters, four characters, or Auto. • Flexi Pad: Carry out Flexi Pad settings. Specify the delegation selection coupling, and display mode for the LCD buttons. You can also make menu settings for wipe snapshots. • Custom Button: Set the following button operation modes. – [ALL] button for next transition selection – [AUTO TRANS], [TAKE] or [FTB] button during auto transition execution – [RUN] button during keyframe execution – [AUTO TRANS] and [CUT] button replacement – [TRANS PVW] button – [UTIL] button – [XPT HOLD] button in key rows – Selection of signal assigned to the auxiliary bus control block key source bus (either key signal only, or either video signal or key signal selectable) • Sensitivity: Adjust trackball, joystick and double-click sensitivity, or set the relationship between the angle of the search dial and the playback speed. • Main Split Fader: When the split fader is active, specify whether the fader to control other than mix is the left side or the right side. • Macro: Set the macro execution mode and the mode in which to edit macros using the standard type Flexi Pad control block. Screen saver and other settings (Maintenance) • • • • • Screen Saver: Make the menu screen saver settings. LCD Brightness: Adjust the LCD brightness. LED Brightness: Adjust the LED brightness. Switch Brightness: Adjust the switch brightness. Touch Beep: Select whether or not to sound a beep when a menu operation is carried out. • Touch Panel Calibration: Calibrate the touch panel. • Initial Menu Set: Specify the menu to be displayed at menu startup. Switcher Setup In switcher setup, make settings particular to the switcher processor. 198 Setup You can make the following settings. Settings relating to overall switcher configuration (Config) Chapter 1 MVS-8000 Functions • System Phase: Adjust the switcher internal reference phase. • Switch Timing: Specify the timing of video switching. • M/E Config: Set the program configuration for the M/E and P/P outputs. – Standard mode: Fix the maximum of four outputs (Out1 to 4) and program output configuration as follows. Out1: Program output Out2: Preview output Out3: Clean output Out4: Key preview output Program output: Clean output + key 1 + key 2 + key 3 + key 4 – Multi-program mode: Increase the number of M/E or P/P programs, and assign any of the following to the maximum of six outputs (Out1 to 6). (M/ E Output Assign) Program outputs 1 to 4, preview output, key preview outputs 1 and 2, clean output. Further, you can select the program background from Clean or Utility2, and change the combination of signals from which it is configured. (PGM Config) – DSK mode: Treat P/P as four DSKs, with no background transitions. Of backgrounds 1 to 4, set one to configure the program output. (PGM Config) The signals which can be selected as the background are limited to Out1 to 6 from M/E-1 to M/E-3. Regardless of the current M/E Config mode, you can set the key preview configuration to be video mode or key mode. In key mode, select whether to link the key state to the on/off operation, or have it always on. (K-PVW Config) • User 1 to 8 Config: Assign the User regions, being color backgrounds 1 and 2, AUX1 to 48, monitor 1 to 8, frame memory 1 to 8, and color correctors 1 and 2, to any of User1 to User8. • Logical M/E Assign: Make settings for handling PGM/PST hardware logically as an M/E. • DME Config: Set the DME channel assignments used on the individual M/E and PGM/PST banks. • Side Flags: Make settings relating to the side flag function (inserting a selected image on both sides of a 4:3 image). Input signal settings (Input) • Input Phase Adjust: Carry out phase adjustment for each primary input. • Through Mode: Set through mode for the input side. This applies only to the primary inputs, and can be set independently for each primary input. Setup 199 • Video Process: Switch video processing on or off for each input signal, and adjust the brightness, hue and so forth. • Matte Illeg. Color Limit: Switch the illegal limiter on or off for the signal generated by the switcher internal matte generator. • FC Adjust (for MVS-8000G only): Set the format converter inputs. Output signal settings (Output) Chapter 1 MVS-8000 Functions • Output Assign: Assign the signals output from the Output1 to 48 ports. • Video Clip: Adjust the clip levels (White Clip, Dark Clip, and Chroma Clip) for the output signals from each of the Output1 to 48 ports. • V Blank: Adjust the vertical blanking width for the output signals from each of the Output1 to 48 ports. The setting is the number of scan lines from the reference blanking position of field 1 for the particular format which should be masked. • Through Mode: Enable or disable through mode. Through mode can be enabled for AUX1 to 48 outputs, M/E and PGM/PST program outputs, and clean output. • Safe Title: Enable or disable safe title, and carry out settings for box 1 and 2, cross and grid (for the MVS-8000G only). • Ref. Output Phase: Set the reference output mode and phase adjustment (for the MVS-8000/8000A only). • 4:3 Crop: Set the actual video image to be cropped to a 4:3 aspect ratio when an HD system has a screen aspect ratio of 4:3. • FC Adjust (for MVS-8000G only): Set the format converter outputs. Settings relating to video switching (Transition) • Transition Preview: Specify the operation mode for transition preview for each of the M/E and P/P banks. • Key Transition: Specify the operation mode for independent key transitions. • Bus Toggle: Switch the bus toggle for each of the M/E and P/P banks on or off. • Split Fader: When the bus toggle is off, the split fader settings are enabled. For each of the M/E and P/P banks, select enable or disable. • Fade To Black: Enable or disable fade-to-black for each final program output. • Preset Color Mix: Set the stroke mode for a preset color mix, the key status for a transition including a key, and the mode in which the transition type after a transition ends returns to the previous setting. • Transition Curve: Set the relationship when carrying out a transition, between the fader lever position and the advancement state of the transition. Key, wipe and frame memory settings (Key/Wipe/FM/CCR) • Key Memory: Set the key memory operation mode for each of the M/E and P/P banks. 200 Setup Chapter 1 MVS-8000 Functions • Video Proc Memory: Enable or disable video process memory. • Show Key: Enable or disable show key for edit preview, M/E and P/P Pvw/ K-Pvw. • Key Auto Drop: For each switcher bank (M/E-1 to M/E-3, PGM/PST), specify a key to be turned off automatically when you press a cross-point button for the bus to be output as the background. • Mask/Border Process: Set the processing order of masks and borders for each M/E or P/P bank. • Key Priority: Set the key priority operation mode for each of the M/E and P/P banks. In DSK mode, the key priority is fixed. • Xpt Hold mode: Set the operation mode for the cross-point hold button provided on the key bus for each of the M/E and P/P banks. • Pattern Limit Transition: Set the operation mode when the pattern limit is released for each of the M/E and P/P banks. • Wipe Edge Default: Adjust the wipe edge softness for each of the M/E and P/P banks. • CCR Internal Signal Enable: Select whether signals generated internally to the switcher can be select as input material to the color corrector. (MVS8000G/8000GSF only) • FM Auto Store: Switch on or off the function to automatically attach a name and save in frame memory. Link settings (Link) • Internal Bus Link: Make a setting of the bus link function that links together two buses internal to the switcher. • GPI Link: Make settings for linking any cross-point buttons or [CUT] and [AUTO TRANS] buttons in the cross-point control block and GPI output ports. • M/E Link: Make settings to link together two M/E banks. • Key Trans Link: Make settings to link key transitions. External device connections (Device Interface) • Remote Assign: Set the use of the four 9-pin ports. • GPI Input: Set the GPI input ports and trigger polarities, and make the action settings. • GPI Output: Set the GPI output ports and trigger polarities, and make the action settings. • Aux Control: Set whether operations on the AUX buses from the four 9-pin ports are inhibited. • DME Type Setting: When the DME is an MVE-9000 or MVE-8000A, carry out interface settings, and for an SDI interface set the AUX bus outputs and reentry inputs. Setup 201 DME Setup In DME setup, carry out settings particular to the DME processor. You can make the following settings. Input signal settings (Input) Chapter 1 MVS-8000 Functions • Initial Crop: Make the initial crop setting. • Matte Illeg. Color Limit: Switch the illegal limiter for the signal generated by the DME internal matte generator on or off. • System Phase: Adjust the operation timing of the whole system with respect to the reference signal. • TBC Center: Set the TBC window center position. Output signal settings (Output) These settings are possible only when the DME is an MVE-9000 or SDIinterfaced MVE-8000A. • Monitor Output: Set the signals output from the four monitor output connectors. • Clip Adjust: Adjust the clip levels of DME1 and DME2 outputs. Interface with external devices (Device Interface) • Editor Protocol: Set the protocol to be used on the Editor port. • Editor Port Setting: Make settings relating to the control of the four editor ports installed in the DME. • GPI Input: Set the GPI input ports and trigger polarities, and make the action settings. • GPI Output: Set the GPI output ports and trigger polarities, and make the action settings. Setup Relating to DCU Input/Output In DCU setup, carry out settings particular to the DCU. You can make the following settings. • Input Config: Assign GPI inputs to Parallel input ports. • GPI Input Assign: Make GPI input settings. • Output Config: Assign GPI outputs to parallel output ports inserted in an option slot. • GPI Output Assign: Make GPI output settings. • Serial Port Assign: Set the protocol to match the devices connected to a 9pin serial port. You can also select the control panel used to control each device. 202 Setup Setup Relating to the Router Interface and Tally Interface Carry out settings relating to the interface with the routing switcher, and settings relating to the tally interface. You can make the following settings. Chapter 1 MVS-8000 Functions Router interface setup (Router) These settings are common to the parallel tally and serial tally. • Matrix Size: Assign the switcher matrix of each switcher processor to S-Bus space, and select the matrix size and positioning level, source address settings, and so on. • External Box: To obtain the signal selection status of external devices with a parallel input, assign a matrix as an external selector in the S-Bus space. Make the matrix size, assignment level, source address, and other settings. • Alias Name Gp: Set the group number for an S-Bus description name to be displayed in the source name displays for a cross-point operation. Tally interface setup (Tally) Group tally settings (Group Tally) • Tally Group: Select the group tally (Gp1 to 4 or Gp5 to 8) which can be used. (For the parallel tally, all groups can be used regardless of this setting.) • S-Bus Tally Enable: Specify S-Bus tally enabled or disabled. Wiring information input (Wiring) Input the information which specifies the physical wiring between switcher and routing switcher or between two routing switchers. These settings are common to the parallel tally and serial tally. Tally enable settings (Tally Enable) Specify the destination to be the reference for tally generation, and make various settings. These settings are common to the parallel tally and serial tally. • Tally Type: Specify the tally type. • Destination: Specify the address and level. • Tally Enable: Specify the timing at which a tally is enabled. Enable: Always enabled. Disable: Always disabled. Tally Input: Follow the tally input status. Setup 203 Copy (Tally Copy) Copy the tally information pertaining to a particular source to a different source. These settings are common to the parallel tally and serial tally. Chapter 1 MVS-8000 Functions Parallel port settings (Parallel Tally) Make the parallel port settings for output of tally information pertaining to sources and destinations. For each of the tally output terminal numbers, specify the tally type, and source address or destination level and address. Serial tally settings (Serial Tally) Make the serial tally settings, including tally type and source address for each serial tally port. Simple Connection to MKS-8080/8082 AUX Bus Remote Panel (Option) To connect the MKS-8080/8082 AUX Bus Remote Panel to a CCP-8000 Center Control Panel using an S-Bus data link requires a BKPF-R70A Routing Switcher Controller Board or similar primary station and various settings for connection. However, using a simple connection, the need for an S-Bus data link primary station is avoided, and direct connection to the MKS-8080/8082 is possible. A simple connection is possible if the following conditions are met: • There are no devices other than the CCP-8000 and MKS-8080/8082 connected on the S-Bus data link. • There are no more than 16 MKS-8080/8082 units connected on the S-Bus data link. For details of the connection procedure, see “Procedure for Simple Connection” in Chapter 16 (Volume 2). 204 Setup Files Chapter 1 MVS-8000 Functions You can save register data, including setup information and snapshot information, as a file on a hard disk or memory card, and recall it as required. You can operate on individual files or registers, or together in a batch. Regarding frame memory, it is possible to capture image data stored in an external device into frame memory. You can also convert the format of image data in frame memory into a different format and save it in an external device. Files that can be manipulated The following files can be saved and recalled. • Operation mode setup data for system as a whole and individual devices • Device status data for system startup • Key memory setting data • Video process memory setting data • Keyframe effect setting data • Snapshot setting data • Wipe snapshot setting data • DME wipe snapshot setting data • Key snapshot setting data • Shotbox setting data • Macro setting data • Macro attachment data • Menu macro setting data • Frame memory image data File operations You can carry out the following file operations. When operating on individual files or registers Save: Save the data in a register to the hard disk or memory card. Load: Load a file from the hard disk or memory card. Copy: Copy a file within a directory or from one directory to another. When a remote panel is used, this function applies to it, too. Rename: Rename a file on the hard disk or memory card. Delete: Delete a file from the hard disk or memory card. When operating on files or registers in a batch The Save, Load, Copy and Delete operations are performable. Files 205 Importing or exporting files to or from frame memory Import: Import a file in a different format from hard disk or memory card into frame memory after changing its format. Export: Export a file in a register to hard disk or memory card after changing its format. You can import TIFF, BMP, and TARGA files as follows into frame memory. Chapter 1 MVS-8000 Functions File type Format File name Notes TIFF file RGB uncompressed format Maximum eight characters, plus extension .tif required • Layers cannot be used. • If an alpha channel is present, two files are created as a pair. BMP file Windows a) 24bit format Maximum eight – characters, plus extension .bmp required TARGA file RGB uncompressed/ compressed format Maximum eight characters, plus extension .tga required • Layers cannot be used. • If an alpha channel is present, two files are created as a pair. a) Windows is a registered trademark or trademark of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and/or other countries. Note This functionality has been tested and confirmed to work with TIFF files created by Photoshop, but it may not be possible to use TIFF files created with some other software. (Photoshop is a trademark of Adobe Systems Incorporated.) About import image size Pay attention to the following, depending on the signal format which you use. SDTV (480i) Images 720 × 487 pixels in size are exactly the size which fills the full screen. The following figure shows how an import image is processed when the 480i/ 59.94 format is used. Images are placed with the upper left of the screen as the origin. When an image is smaller than the screen, the remainder of the screen is filled with black. When it is larger, parts which extend beyond the screen are discarded. 206 Files 720 pixels 487 pixels Chapter 1 MVS-8000 Functions Position of small picture Parts discarded when image is too large Section filled with black for a small picture No pixel ratio conversion is performed when images are imported for the SDTV format. When the signal format is 480i/59.94, if you create an image with a size of 720 × 540 on a computer and then import it just as it is, the image will be too tall. To maintain the shape of the image, first create it as a 720 × 540 image and then use computer software tools to compress the vertical dimension to 487 pixels before importing it. HDTV (1080i) Images of 1920 × 1080 pixels in size are exactly the size which fills the full screen. Like SDTV, images are placed with the upper left of the screen as the origin. When an image is smaller or larger than the screen, processing is the same as for SDTV. Since the pixel ratio of the HDTV format is 1:1, files created on computers are imported in their original shapes. The following table shows the image sizes which exactly fill the full screen for the various signal formats. Signal format Image size (H 480i/59.94 720 × 487 576i/50 720 × 576 × V) Files 207 Signal format Image size (H 1080i/50 1920 × 1080 1280 × 720 × V) 1080i/59.94 1080PsF/23.976 1080PsF/24 1080PsF/25 Chapter 1 MVS-8000 Functions 1080PsF/29.97 720P/50 720P/59.94 Importing 720P movie material To import movie material in 720P format, it is necessary to treat each frame as a separate image file. Directory operations You can create a new directory within a hard disk or memory card, and carry out other operations, such as renaming and deleting. For details of operations, see “Directory Operations” in Chapter 17 (Volume 2). File copying between different unit IDs Switcher and DME files within the hard disk or memory card are managed by unit ID. To copy files between different unit IDs, use the Unit ID Copy menu. For details of operations, see “Copying Files Between Different Unit IDs” in Chapter 17 (Volume 2). Saving data recalled by autoload At power on, you can automatically recall data previously stored on the hard disk. (Autoload function) The following data can be loaded by the autoload function. • Keyframe effect setting data • Snapshot setting data • Wipe snapshot setting data • DME wipe snapshot setting data • Key snapshot setting data • Shotbox setting data • Macro setting data • Macro attachment data 208 Files • Frame memory image data To use the autoload function, the data required must first be saved. For the on/off setting of the autoload function, see “Selecting the State After Powering On (Start Up Menu)” in Chapter 16 (Volume 2). Files Chapter 1 MVS-8000 Functions For details of saving operations, see “Saving Files Recalled by Autoload” in Chapter 17 (Volume 2). 209 Macros Overview Chapter 1 MVS-8000 Functions The term “macro” refers to the function whereby a sequence of signal selections and other operations on the control panel is saved as data in memory, so that it can be recalled as required to automatically execute the same sequence of operations. To record menu operations in memory, use a menu macro (see page 222). For details of macro operations, see “Macros” in Chapter 18 (Volume 2). Macro registers The area of memory that holds a macro is termed a “macro register.” For each control panel there are 99 macro registers, numbered 1 to 99. Events The individual control panel operations constituting a macro are termed “events.” One macro can contain a maximum of 99 events. The following table shows the operations for each control block of the control panel that can be saved as events in a macro. Control block Event Auxiliary bus control block Cross-point selection Cross-point selection in router control mode Cross-point control block 210 Macros • Cross-point selection • Recalling a function assigned to a key 2 row button Control block Transition control block Event • Auto transition and cut for the transition execution section • Auto transition and key on/off for the independent key transition execution section a) • Next transition setting • Transition type selection • Pattern limit on/off • Key snapshot recall • VTR/disk recorder/Extended VTR /frame memory clips playback b) • VTR/disk recorder/Extended VTR /frame memory clips stop b) • VTR/disk recorder/Extended VTR /frame memory clips cue-up b) simple type • Transition execution section take • Tansition type selection • Pattern limit on/off compact type • Transition execution section auto transition and cut • Independent key transition execution section auto transition a) • Next transition setting • Transition type selection • Pattern limit on/off • VTR/disk recorder/Extended VTR /frame memory clips playback b) • VTR/disk recorder/Extended VTR /frame memory clips stop b) • VTR/disk recorder/Extended VTR /frame memory clips cue-up b) Independent key transition control block (simple type) • Independent key transition execution section take and key on/off a) • Key snapshot recall • Selection of independent key transition type Flexi Pad control block standard type Recalling the following data • Snapshots • Wipe snapshots • DME wipe snapshots simple type Recalling the following data • Snapshots • Wipe snapshots • DME wipe snapshots Numeric keypad control block Chapter 1 MVS-8000 Functions standard type Recalling the following data • Effects • Snapshots • Shotbox • Master snapshots • Master timeline Macros 211 Chapter 1 MVS-8000 Functions Control block Event Keyframe control block • • • • Device control block (trackball) (joystick) (search dial) c) • VTR/disk recorder/Extended VTR/frame memory clips start point setting • VTR/disk recorder/Extended VTR/frame memory clips playback • VTR/disk recorder/Extended VTR/frame memory clips stop • VTR/disk recorder/Extended VTR/frame memory clips cue-up • VTR/disk recorder/Extended VTR/frame memory clips fast forward • VTR/disk recorder/Extended VTR/frame memory clips rewind • VTR/disk recorder record • Frame memory clip loop setting Downstream key control block • Independent key transition execution section auto transition and cut a) • Key snapshot recall Effect rewind Effect execution Effect fast forward Selection of effect execution direction Fade to black control block Execution of fade to black transition Menu control block • Disk recorder/Extended VTR file recalling • Recalling the functions assigned to [PREFS 1] to [PREFS 16] buttons • Execution of a menu macro • Recalling frame memory clips Utility/Shotbox control block Recalling the functions assigned to memory recall buttons a) In the case of an event that inserts or deletes a key, the key state at the time of event registration (inserted or not inserted) is also saved in the macro. When the macro is executed, the event is only replayed if the key state matches the saved state. (Example: For a macro with an event that deletes a key, when the macro is executed, if the key is inserted it is deleted, but otherwise nothing occurs as concerns keying.) b) Function valid only when [PLAY], [STOP], and [CUEUP] have been set in the Setup menu. c) When using the device control block (search dial), this operates as a reference module. When not used, this operates on the module selected in the Panel >Config menu. For details of reference module selection, see “Overall Control Panel Settings (Config Menu)” in Chapter 16 (Volume 2). Macro Creation and Editing You can create or edit a macro by recalling a macro register. To create a new macro, recall an empty macro register, and create the desired sequence of events (by executing the sequence of operations on the control panel that you want to save as events in the macro). 212 Macros To add an event to an existing macro, recall the register holding the macro, and create the event you want to add. Note While editing a macro, it is not possible to execute another macro. Creating a macro Chapter 1 MVS-8000 Functions To include all information associated with an operation when registering a macro event When registering an auto transition operation as an event, you can register the auto transition event to include the transition rate and background A/B bus selection status. When registering an effect execution, rewind, or fast forward as an event, you can also save the region to which this applies. To use this capability, assign the following functions to user preference buttons in the menu control block or buttons in the utility/shotbox control block, and turn the relevant button on before you start an event to register. Macro AT with Rate (Macro Auto Trans Event with/without Rate): When registering an auto transition macro event in one of the M/E banks or the PGM/PST bank, include the transition rate. Macro AT with A/B Bus (Macro Auto Trans Event with/without A/B Bus): When registering an auto transition macro event in the transition control block, include the background A/B bus cross-point. Macro TL with Region (Macro Timeline with Region): When registering an effect execution, rewind, or fast forward as a macro event, save the affected region together in the macro. For details of the method of assigning these functions to buttons, see “Setting Button Assignments (Prefs/Utility Menu)” in Chapter 16 (Volume 2). Events requiring adjustment when creating a macro The following events require time for execution to complete, and therefore when executed within a macro sequence, a pause event must be inserted to adjust the timing. • Rewinding effects involving external device control • VTR/disk recorder/Extended VTR cue-up For example, create a macro to cue up a VTR and then play back as follows. Macros 213 Macro event execution order: Macro events: Chapter 1 MVS-8000 Functions Auto insert mode on/off setting You can switch on or off the mode (auto insert mode) in which at the same time that a control panel operation is carried out, the event is automatically saved in a macro. Editing a macro You can carry out the following macro editing operations. Event insertion Insert the control panel operation as an event in a macro. Event modification Modify any event. You can modify all events within a macro, or events within a specified range in a single operation. Event deletion Delete any one event. You can delete all events within a macro, or events within a specified range in a single operation. You can then paste the deleted event using the paste function. Event copy Copy any one event. You can copy all events within a macro, or events within a specified range in a single operation. Event paste Paste a copied or deleted event at a desired position within a macro. Undoing an editing operation You can undo the last event insertion, modification, deletion, or paste operation. Macro merging During macro editing, you can recall and copy another register to merge it with the macro being edited. For example, while editing macro register 2 you can recall and copy register 1 to merge it as shown in the following figure. 214 Macros Recall macro register 2, and move to another event. 1 2 3 Recall register 1. 4 1 Macro being edited (register 2) Contents of register 1 remain unchanged. 1 3 Newly recalled macro (register 1) 2 3 2 3 4 5 6 Chapter 1 MVS-8000 Functions Copy contents of register 1 and add after current event 1 (register 2). 2 7 Macro Execution To execute a macro, recall the register in which the macro is held. Simultaneous with the register recall, all events stored in the macro are played back (executed) in sequence without pause. Pausing and restarting macro execution It is also possible to execute a macro in the following ways. Pause event To adjust the execution timing of a particular event (to delay the start of execution of the event by a particular time interval), you can store a special event which pauses macro execution. This event is called a “pause event.” When you store a pause event, you can set the interval for which the macro is paused (the pause length) to any value in the range 1 to 999 frames. When the set time has elapsed, the macro is automatically executed. Pause zero event By including a pause event with the time set to zero, you can make macro execution pause at the pause event. Macros 215 Step execution (requires a Setup menu setting) By selecting step execution mode in the Setup menu, you can make macro execution pause every time an event is executed. Take operation When a paused macro is restarted, this is referred to as a “Take” operation. Chapter 1 MVS-8000 Functions Macro take operation using a GPI input You can carry out a macro take operation using a GPI input on the control panel and DCU. For GPI input settings, see “Interfacing With External Devices (Device Interface Menu” and “GPI Input Setting (GPI Input Assign Menu)” in Chapter 16 (Volume 2). Macro Timeline By recording macro recall and execute action on a timeline, in the same way as for key frames in an effect, you can automatically execute them in a sequence. This timeline is called a “macro timeline,” and one macro timeline can have up to 99 macros being executed simultaneously in parallel. There are 99 registers in the Macro region that can be recorded on the macro timeline, numbered 1 to 99. These registers are distinct from the registers where individual macros are stored. Note If you use a macro timeline to superimpose more than one macro, the macros may not be executed according to the timing information registered in the timeline. Available key frame functions The following lists the key frame functions that can be used on the macro timeline. • RECALL(1 to 99), STORE(1 to 99), RECALL UNDO, STORE UNDO, search for empty register, AUTO SAVE, RECALL MODE (RECALL, RECALL & REWIND) • EDIT ENABLE, EDIT UNDO • CONST DUR, EFF DUR, KF DUR, DELAY, PAUSE, INSERT BEFORE, INSERT AFTER, MODIFY, DELETE, COPY, PASTE BEFORE, PASTE AFTER, FROM TO, ALL • PREV KF, NEXT KF, GOTO TC, GOTO KF, RUN, REWIND, FF, STOP NEXT KF, NORMAL, JOG, KF FADER 216 Macros The following key frame functions cannot be used • KF LOOP, EFFECT LOOP, REVERSE, NORMAL/REVERSE • PATH Chapter 1 MVS-8000 Functions Saving to a register Set the recall and execute actions for the macros to be registered in the timeline, using the Macro Timeline menu. The setting data can be saved in a register as key frame data. You can manipulate this data by recalling the register in which it is saved, and using the key frame control block. For details, see Chapter 18, “Macros” (Volume 2). Note An action set for a key frame is only executed when the key frame effect is executed in the forward direction. It is important to remember that the action is not executed in the reverse direction when executing simultaneously with switcher and DME key frame effects. Forcibly ending a macro timeline • If the timeline has completed but a macro is still executing, press the [REWIND] or [RUN] button in the key frame control block to forcibly end the macro timeline. • In a macro timeline, since a take operation is not possible, if a macro included in the timeline has a pause event with a pause time of zero, the remainder of the timeline after the pause is ignored, and the macro timeline ends at that point. Register editing functions You can use the following editing functions on a register in which a macro timeline is stored. • • • • • • • Copy Move Swap Merge Lock Name Delete File-related functions You can save and recall a created macro timeline as effect data, in the File menu. Macros 217 Macro Editing Using Menus Macro Register Editing Chapter 1 MVS-8000 Functions You can lock, copy, and delete the contents of macro registers, and rename macro registers. Lock: Write-protect the contents of a macro register. Copy: Copy the contents of a macro register to another macro register. Delete: Delete the contents of a macro register. Rename: Rename a macro register. Online editing of macro events Using the On Line Edit menu, you can carry out the following editing operations while checking the control panel operation sequence. You can also carry out editing using the panel and menu. Insert: Insert a macro event. Delete: Delete a macro event. Modify: Modify a macro event. Offline editing of macro events Using the Off Line Edit menu, you can carry out the following editing operations in the menu only, unrelated to operation of the control panel. Insert: Insert a macro event. Add: Add a macro event. Delete: Delete a macro event. You can also create a new macro. Macro Attachment Macro attachment is a function whereby a macro register is assigned to a control panel button or a particular position of a fader lever, linking the execution of the button function or a fader lever operation with a macro execution. Setting a macro attachment to a button Select one of the following three linking modes to make the macro attachment. Pre-macro: Mode in which the button function is executed after macro execution has completed 218 Macros Post-macro: Mode in which the macro is executed after carrying out the button function Macro only: Mode in which the button function is not executed, and the macro only is executed Chapter 1 MVS-8000 Functions The selection of pre- or post-macro mode is carried out in the cross-point control block of the PGM/PST bank or the M/E banks. For the macro-only mode, assign the selection function to a utility/shotbox control block button or user preference button, and make the selection by pressing the button. Alternatively, without pressing the button, you can make the selection simply, by simultaneously pressing the pre-macro and post-macro selection buttons in the cross-point control block. You can assign any one of the 99 macro registers to a button. For a button whose function is switched by delegation, you can make a separate macro attachment for each function. For each control panel, you can make up to 1000 macro attachment settings. The macro attachment setting is possible for the following bus buttons. For button locations, see pages in parentheses. Block Button PGM/PST or M/E bank • • • • • • • • • • • • • • Background A row cross-point buttons (page 256) Background B row cross-point buttons (page 256) Key 1 bus cross-point buttons (page 256) Key 2 bus cross-point buttons (page 256) Key 3 bus cross-point buttons (page 256) Key 4 bus cross-point buttons (page 256) Utility 1 bus cross-point buttons (page 256) Utility 2 bus cross-point buttons (page 256) DME external video bus cross-point buttons (page 256) DME utility 1 bus cross-point buttons (page 256) DME utility 2 bus cross-point buttons (page 256) [AUTO TRANS] button a) (page 260) [CUT] button (page 260) [KEY1 ON] to [KEY4 ON] buttons a) (pages 260, 304) • The button to which the same function as that of VTR/disk recorder/Extended VTR/frame memory clips play, cue, and stop buttons (page 260) • Memory recall buttons i) • Buttons set to “Inhibit” (page 256) Auxiliary bus control block • Cross-point button1st row b) (page 288) • Cross-point button 2nd row b) (page 288) Keyframe control block • [RUN], [REWIND] and [FF] buttons (page 281) • [NORM], [REV], and [NORM/REV] buttons (page 281) Macros 219 Chapter 1 MVS-8000 Functions Block Button Device control block (trackball, joystick) The buttons to which the same functions as those of VTR/disk recorder/Extended VTR/frame memory clips play, cue, stop, and start tc buttons (page 271) Device control block (search dial) [PLAY], [CUE], [STOP] and [START TC] buttons Downstream key control block • [DSK1 ON] to [DSK4 ON] buttons a) (page 306) • [TAKE] button a) (page 306) • [MIX], [WIPE], [DME], and [CUT] buttons (page 306) Transition control block • [PTN LIMIT] button c) d) (page 260) • [LIMIT SET] and [KF] buttons c) d) (page 260) • [NORM], [NORM/REV], and [REV] buttons c) e) (pages 260, 310) • [MIX], [NAM], [SUPER MIX], [PST COLOR MIX], [WIPE], and [DME] buttons (pages 260, 299, 310) • [MIX], [WIPE], and [DME] buttons d) (page 260) • [ALL], [KEY PRIOR], [BKGD], and [KEY1] to [KEY4] buttons (pages 260, 299, 310) • [CUT] button f) (page 304) Fade to black control block [FTB] button (pages 287, 308) Downstream key/fade to black control block • [DSK1 ON] and [DSK2 ON] buttons • [AUTO TRANS] button • [FTB] button Utility/shotbox control block Memory recall buttons (page 298) Menu control block [PREFS 1] to [PREFS 16] buttons (page 294) Independent key transition control block (simple type) h) • [KEYx ON] button a) g) • [TAKE] button a) • [MIX], [WIPE], [DME], and [CUT] buttons a) In the case of an event that inserts or deletes a key by an independent key transition, the key state at the time of event registration (inserted or not inserted) is also saved in the macro. When the macro is executed, the event is only replayed if the key state matches the saved state. (Example: For a macro with an event that deletes a key, when the macro is executed, if the key is inserted it is deleted, but otherwise nothing occurs as concerns keying.) b) Cross-point buttons of the bus assigned by AUX delegation setting. c) Macro attachment can be set with these buttons only when they are assigned to [Play/Stop/Cue] in the Engineering Setup >Panel >Config >Program Button >Transition Module menu and when the [DEV] button in the device control block is lit. d) Buttons on the standard type module only. e) Buttons on the standard type module and compact type module only. f) Independent key transition control block (simple type only). g) “KEYx” refers to any of KEY1 to KEY4 and DSK1 to DSK4, depending on the key assigned in setup. h) When there are a number of control blocks on the control panel, and the keys assigned to them in setup are the same, then the macro attachment settings for the above buttons are the same. The keys being the same includes cases such as “Key1,2” assigned to PGM/PST being the same as “DSK1,2”, “Key1,2” assigned to M/E-1 being the same as “M/E-1 Key1,2”, and so on. i) Only when key row is operated in the utility/shotbox mode 220 Macros Notes Chapter 1 MVS-8000 Functions • After setting a macro attachment to a cross-point button in the auxiliary bus control block, if in the Setup menu you change the assignment of buses to the AUX delegation buttons, the macro attachment setting disappears. • After setting a macro attachment to a button for which you can perform function replacement or function assignment, if you change the function assignment to the button, the macro attachment setting disappears. • After setting a macro attachment to a cross-point button in the cross-point control block, if you change the function assignment to the button, the macro attachment setting disappears. Enabling and disabling macro attachment You can temporarily disable the macro attachment settings. When a macro attachment is disabled, pressing the button does not cause execution of the assigned macro. You can enable and disable macro attachments for the PGM/PST bank and M/ E banks individually. Setting a macro attachment to a fader lever You can set a macro attachment to any particular position of a fader lever in the transition control block. Notes • In macro-only mode it is not possible to set a macro attachment. • It is not possible to set a macro attachment to a fader lever in the keyframe control block or downstream key control block. • For a split fader, you can set a macro attachment to the main split fader. For details of a split fader, see “Split Fader” (page 373). Clearing the macro attachments You can clear all of the macro attachments in a single operation. Displaying the macro attachment list You can display the macro attachment settings in the form of a list in the menu display to check them. Macros 221 Menu Macros The term “menu macro” refers to the function whereby a sequence of menu operations is saved as data in memory, so that it can be recalled as required to automatically execute the same sequence of operations. Chapter 1 MVS-8000 Functions For more details of menu macros, see “Menu Macros” in Chapter 18 (Volume 2). Menu macro registers The area of memory that holds a menu macro is termed a “menu macro register.” For each control panel there are 99 menu macro registers, numbered 1 to 99. You can manipulate these in the menu macro register menu. Menu macro events The events that can be recorded in a menu macro are operations carried out in a menu. For menu operations which are not recorded in menu macros, see the appendix, “Menu Operations Not Recorded in a Menu Macro” (Volume 2). Menu macro creation and editing Carry out menu macro creation and editing in the menu. Executing menu macros You execute a menu macro after recalling a menu macro register. You can recall and execute simultaneously. You can also recall and execute a menu macro from a macro recalled on the control panel. 222 Macros Color Corrector The color corrector enables video signal color correction (black balance/white balance adjustment, gamma correction, knee correction, etc.). Chapter 1 MVS-8000 Functions Note To use the color corrector function on the MVS-8000/8000A requires the MKS-8420M Color Corrector Board. To use the color corrector function on the MVS-8000G requires the MKS-8442G Frame Memory Board and BZS-8420 Color Corrector Software. To use the software, you are required to input an install key. For the method of inputting an install key, see “Installation and Device Setup (Install/Unit Config Menu)” in Chapter 16 (Volume 2). The color corrector includes the following functions. Input video processing Carrying out the following corrections to a YUV signal before conversion to an RGB signal. • Overall gain adjustment of the video signal • Gain adjustment of the Y signal • Gain adjustment of the C signal • Hue delay • Black level adjustment Primary color correction Carrying out the following corrections to each of the R, G, and B signals. Black balance adjustment: setting the output level for a 0% level input signal. White balance adjustment: setting the output level for a 100% level input signal. Gamma correction: adjusting the curvature of the gamma curve. Knee correction: adjusting the position of the maximum point of the gamma curve. Color Corrector 223 Output level White balance adjustment Output level Gamma correction Chapter 1 MVS-8000 Functions Input level Input level Knee correction Black balance adjustment Unadjusted signal Adjusted signal It is also possible to mask part of the region to be corrected. Secondary color correction For the six colors R (red), G (green), B (blue), Y (yellow), C (cyan), and M (magenta), adjust the luminance and saturation, and also the hue within a range of ±30 degrees of the center value for each color. You can mask a part of the region to be corrected. Note This function is disabled when spot CCR is enabled with a setup setting. For details, see “Installation and Device Setup (Install/Unit Config Menu)” in Chapter 16 (Volume 2). On the MVS-8000G, this function and spot CCR can be enabled at the same time. RGB clip For each of the R, G, and B signals, you can make dark clip and white clip adjustments. Luminance processing After converting a signal to which RGB color correction has been applied to a YUV signal, dividing the luminance levels into three regions, referred to as 224 Color Corrector Dark, Middle, and Bright, and applying video signal adjustments to these regions. Under Dark point Middle/Dark point Dark Over Bright point Bright/Middle point Middle Bright Chapter 1 MVS-8000 Functions Input signal luminance level There are three modes for luminance processing, as follows. Tint mode: adding a specified color to the original video signal. Color Modify mode: adjusting the original video signal. Y Modify mode: adjusting the output levels of the input luminance signal. • White balance adjustment: setting the output level for an input luminance signal at the 100% level. • Black balance adjustment: setting the output level for an input luminance signal at the 0% level. • Y lift correction: adjusting the curvature of the curve. • Y dark correction: adjusting the position of the maximum point of the curve. Output signal luminance level White balance adjustment Output signal luminance level Y Lift Input signal luminance level Input signal luminance level Y Dark Black balance adjustment Unadjusted signal Adjusted signal It is also possible to mask part of the region to be corrected. Color Corrector 225 Spot color adjustment Chapter 1 MVS-8000 Functions You can change the color of a specified color region to a different color, without affecting other regions. You can also mask part of such a region. Then for the region other than the region whose color you have changed, you can make the following corrections. • Video signal overall gain adjustment • Y signal gain adjustment • Y signal offset adjustment • C signal gain adjustment • C signal hue adjustment Note This function is disabled when secondary CCR is enabled with a setup setting. For details, see “Installation and Device Setup (Install/Unit Config Menu)” in Chapter 16 (Volume 2). On the MVS-8000G, this function and secondary CCR can be enabled at the same time. Output video processing Carrying out the following corrections on the YUV signal. • Video signal overall gain adjustment • Y signal gain adjustment • Y signal offset adjustment • C signal gain adjustment • C signal hue adjustment YUV clip For each of the luminance and color difference signals, the following processing. White clip: setting the maximum level of the luminance signal. Dark clip: setting the minimum level of the luminance signal. Positive clip: setting the maximum amplitude in the positive direction of the color difference signal. Negative clip: setting the maximum amplitude in the negative direction of the color difference signal. Copy and swap Copying or swapping data between two color correctors (CCR1 and CCR2). 226 Color Corrector Simple P/P Software Overview Chapter 1 MVS-8000 Functions By installing the BZS-8250 Simple P/P Software in the MVS-8000A/ 8000ASF/8000G/8000GSF Switcher Processor, you can use a separate program/preset function without using the M/E hardware. Getting access to the software To use the Simple P/P Software, you are required to enter an install key which validates the software. (If the software has been factory installed, the install key is not required.) For the method of obtaining an install key, contact your Sony representative. On that occasion, you may be required to submit the unique device ID of the switcher you are using. You can check the unique device ID in the Install menu of the switcher. For details of operating procedures, see Chapter 16, “Installation and Device Setup (Install/Unit Config Menu)” (Volume 2). Restrictions on Use Since this software is a simple version of the program/preset function, there are some restrictions on use. The following lists the points at which operation is different from a normal program/preset function. For details of the normal operations, set the relevant sections of this manual. Restrictions on using a downstream key • DSK3 and DSK4 cannot be used. For the key priority, set priority 1 or priority 2. • The following downstream key types cannot be used. – Chroma key – Color vector key – Wipe pattern key – Key wipe pattern key • When using a matte as the key fill for a downstream key, a mix color cannot be used. • It is not possible to modify a downstream key edge. The edge blink also cannot be used. • For a downstream key, main mask and sub-mask cannot be used. Simple P/P Software 227 • A processed key cannot be used. Therefore, it is not possible to apply a DME effect to a downstream key. • As an independent key transition type, wipe and DME wipe cannot be used. • The resizer cannot be used. • The key frame delay mode cannot be used. Chapter 1 MVS-8000 Functions Restrictions on executing transitions in the transition control block • DME wipes cannot be used. • Wipes can be used, but there are restrictions on use. For details, see the next item, “Restrictions when using wipes.” Restrictions when using wipes • The wipe patterns that can be used are standard wipes (pattern numbers 1 to 24) only. • A pattern mix cannot be used. • A split (splitting the wipe pattern) cannot be used. • When a border or soft border is selected for a wipe edge, the signal to be inserted in the edge (edge fill) is restricted as follows. – The utility 2 bus cannot be selected. – When using a matte, a mix color cannot be used. – Even if the wipe border width is set to the same numeric value for M/E and Simple P/P, the same image is not obtained. • The following wipe modifiers cannot be used: – Replication “Shift” and Multi Adjust menu adjustments – Pairing – Modulation – Spring – Spiral • Changing modifier parameter settings changes the wipe pattern size. Restrictions on utility buses The utility 1 and utility 2 buses cannot be used. Assignment of signals to output connectors Connectors to which the P/P row output signal assignment is fixed The assignment of the following signals to output connectors OUT17 to OUT22 is fixed. 228 Simple P/P Software Fixed assigned outputs Standard mode Multi-program mode DSK mode a) OUT17 Program P/P OUT1 b) Program 1 OUT18 Program P/P OUT1 b) Program 2 OUT19 Preview P/P OUT2 b) Key preview 1 OUT20 Clean P/P OUT3 b) Key preview 2 OUT21 Key preview P/P OUT4 b) Clean 1 OUT22 Preset Preset Clean 2 Chapter 1 MVS-8000 Functions Output connector a) In DSK mode, the backgrounds that can be selected in the PGM Config menu are restricted to background 1 and background 2. b) Depends on the setting in the Engineering Setup >Switcher >Config >M/E Output Assign menu. OUT5 and OUT6 cannot be used. Connectors for which a P/P row output signal can be selected For an edit preview bus or AUX bus assigned to output connector OUT23 or OUT24, you can select a P/P row output signal. If these buses are assigned to other than OUT23 or OUT24, then it is not possible to select a P/P row output signal. (Assigning these buses to the two connectors is recommended.) Output connector Assignable bus OUT23 Edit preview bus OUT24 AUX bus Format converter output restrictions On the MVS-8000G, the signal output from the format converter output connectors (FC1, FC2) can be assigned in either of the following ways. • Out#15-16: Assignment fixed, signals OUT15 (for FC1), and OUT16 (for FC2). • Out#17-22: Select from the OUT17 to OUT22 signals. (It is not, however, possible to select the same signal for FC1 and FC2.) It is not possible to select FC1 and FC2 differently. For example, it is not possible to select “Out#15-16” for FC1 and “Out#17-22” for FC2. FC3 and FC4 always have the same signals assigned: OUT39 and OUT40 respectively, and therefore it is not possible to select OUT17-OUT22. Logical assignment of the physical PGM/PST In the Engineering Setup >Switcher >Config >Logical M/E Assign menu, it is not possible to assign the physical PGM/PST as a logical PGM/PST. In the group, you can select from M/E-1, M/E2, and M/E-3. Simple P/P Software 229 Multi Program 2 Overview Chapter 1 MVS-8000 Functions What is Multi Program 2? By operating the switcher in Multi Program 2 mode, a single switcher mix/ effects bank can be used to create two separate video outputs, referred to as “main” and “sub.” You can set backgrounds, keys, and transitions for each of main and sub. Keys 2 to 4, however, are common to main and sub. For example, immediately after a score in baseball two versions of the scene can be provided as shown below, and switched simultaneously. Key 3 Background A Background A (signal from utility 2 bus) TEAM B TEAM A Key 1 Background B Program output for “Main” Background B (signal from utility 3 bus) Program output for “Sub” Note The Multi Program 2 function is only supported on the MVS-8000A/8000G. To enable this function requires the BZS-8200 Multi Program 2 software. Depending on the CPU module, this function may not be supported. For details, consult your Sony service representative or sales representative. Using the software To use the Multi Program 2 software, you are required to enter an install key which validates the software. (If the software has been factory installed, the install key is not required.) 230 Multi Program 2 For the method of obtaining an install key, contact your Sony representative. To obtain a key, you may be required to submit the unique device ID of the switcher you are using. You can check the unique device ID in the Install menu of the switcher. For details of the operation, see “Installation and Device Setup (Install/Unit Config Menu)” in Chapter 16 (Volume 2). Chapter 1 MVS-8000 Functions Assigning main and/or sub to switcher banks For Multi Program 2 operations, a single switcher bank may be shared, and switched between main and sub, or two separate switcher banks may be used, each dedicated to main or sub. Example 1: Assigning M/E-1 main and sub to a single switcher bank, and switching between them Used switched between M/E-1 main and sub Example 2: Assigning separate switcher banks as “M/E-1 main dedicated” and “M/E-1 sub dedicated” Used for M/E-1 main operations Used for M/E-1 sub operations Video creation operations in Multi Program 2 mode For each of main and sub, there are differences from the operations in standard mode. Multi Program 2 231 For details, see “Differences Between Multi Program 2 Mode and Standard Mode” (page 242). Sequence of Operations in Multi Program 2 Chapter 1 MVS-8000 Functions Basic operation sequence Enter the BZS-8200 install key (first time only) ↓ Set Multi Program 2 operating mode for each switcher bank ↓ Assign output signals, and set the background configuration, key configuration, and key preview configuration ↓ For each switcher bank, make a main/sub assignment (one of main dedicated, sub dedicated, and main and sub shared) ↓ For a switcher bank assigned to main and sub shared, assign the [MAIN] and [SUB] delegation buttons ↓ Create the main and sub images ↓ Execute the transition Optional operations • • • • • • Making cross-point settings Enabling DME wipe operations for sub Inhibiting utility 2 bus signal selection Including Multi Program 2 data in keyframes and snapshots Changing the key assignment for each output Assigning sub preview output to preview selection buttons in the fade-toblack control block • Changing the matrix size to Standard • Making settings for keyframe timeline operation Basic Operations (Required) Entering the BZS-8200 install key (first time only) After installing the BZS-8200 Multi Program 2 software in the switcher, carry out the following procedure. 232 Multi Program 2 1 In the status area of the Engineering Setup >System >Install/Unit Config menu, select the switcher (SWRx), and press [License]. The License menu appears. 2 In the License menu, enter the BZS-8200 install key. 3 4 Chapter 1 MVS-8000 Functions For details of the operation, see “Installation and Device Setup (Install/ Unit Config Menu)” in Chapter 16 (Volume 2). Shut down the menus. (see page 333.) Power the switcher and SCU off and on again. Setting the operating mode for each switcher bank To set a desired switcher bank to Multi Program 2 mode, use the following procedure. 1 2 3 Display the Engineering Setup >Switcher >Config menu. Select the switcher bank from M/E-1 to M/E-3, and P/P. In the group, select [Multi Program2]. Note In the PGM/PST when using the simple P/P software (see page 227), [Multi Program2] cannot be selected. 4 Repeat steps 2 and 3 as required, to set the operating mode for all desired switcher banks. Assigning output signals for Multi Program 2 mode To assign signals to outputs Use the Engineering Setup >Switcher >Config >M/E Output Assign menu. The difference from standard mode is that OUT1 is fixed, set to PGM1 (main program), and OUT6 is fixed, set to PGM2 (sub program), and that for the OUT2 to OUT5 signals you can assign any signal selected from the following. PGM1, PGM2, PGM3, PGM4, PVW1, PVW2, K-PVW1, K-PVW2, CLEAN, SUB CLEAN Note Each of main and sub can use a maximum of four of the six outputs (OUT1 to OUT6). The outputs can be used within the following limits. Multi Program 2 233 • OUT1, OUT2: main only • OUT3, OUT4: can be used for either main or sub • OUT5, OUT6: sub only For details, see “To assign the output of each bank in Multi Program mode” in Chapter 16 (Volume 2). Chapter 1 MVS-8000 Functions To set the background and key configuration Use the Engineering Setup >Switcher >Config >PGM Config menu. The following are the differences from standard mode. Background configuration: Consists of the following combinations. • For main: Clean, Bkgd A, Bkgd B • For sub: Sub Clean, Utility 2, Utility 3 Key configuration: Key1 can be set to “Enable” only when the background is Clean, Bkgd A, or Bkgd B. For details, see “To set the output configuration for each bank” in Chapter 16 (Volume 2). To set the key preview configuration Use the Engineering Setup >Switcher >Config >K-PVW Config menu. The following are the differences from standard mode. Background configuration: Clean or Sub Clean Key configuration: Key1 can be set to “On” or “Link” only when the background is Clean. For details, see “To set the key preview configuration” in Chapter 16 (Volume 2). To assign sub outputs to output ports Use the Engineering Setup >Switcher >Output >Output Assign menu. You can assign a sub output signal to a switcher output port number. For details, see “Assigning output signals” in Chapter 16 (Volume 2). Assigning main and/or sub to switcher banks For each switcher bank for which Multi Program 2 mode is selected, set whether this is main dedicated, sub dedicated, or main and sub shared. To assign main and sub to a single switcher bank 1 2 In the Engineering Setup >Panel >Config >MP2 Main/Sub Assign menu, select the switcher bank. In the group, select [Main&Sub]. Main: use for main operations. 234 Multi Program 2 Sub: use for sub operations. Main&Sub: use for both main and sub operations. When “Main&Sub” is selected, it is necessary to assign [MAIN] and [SUB] delegation buttons to the control panel. 1 2 Chapter 1 MVS-8000 Functions To assign main and sub to two consecutive switcher banks For example, to assign the first row (first switcher bank) to M/E-1 main, and the second row (second switcher bank) to M/E-1 sub, use the following procedure. In the status area of the Engineering Setup >Panel >Config >MP2 Main/ Sub Assign menu, select 1st Row (M/E-1), then press [Main] in the group. Press [Dual M/E Assign] to assign M/E to two banks. In this state, both 1st Row and 2nd Row are set to main. 3 Set “2nd Row” to [Sub]. This cancels the shift/non-shift assignment for dual M/E in standard mode. Note It is not possible to assign the combinations of Main with Main&Sub, or Sub with Main&Sub. Assigning the [MAIN] and [SUB] delegation buttons to buttons on the control panel You can assign the [MAIN] and [SUB] delegation buttons to any of the following three places. To assign to the pattern limit buttons (PTN LIMIT and LIMIT SET) in the transition control block (standard type) For details of the transition control block (standard type), see page 260. 1 In the Engineering Setup >Panel >Config menu, press [Program Button]. The Program Button menu appears. 2 Press [Transition Module]. The Transition Module menu appears. Multi Program 2 235 3 Select the switcher bank, then in the group, press [Main/Sub]. You can now use the [PTN LIMIT] button as [MAIN], and the [LIMIT SET] button as [SUB]. Chapter 1 MVS-8000 Functions To assign to the wipe direction selection buttons (NORM and NORM REV) in the transition control block This applies to a standard type and compact type transition control block. For details of the transition control block (standard type), see page 260, and for details of the transition control block (compact type), see page 310. 1 2 In the Transition Module menu, select the switcher bank. In the group, press [Main/ Sub]. You can now use the [NORM] button as [MAIN], and the [NORM/REV] button as [SUB]. To assign to macro buttons in the cross-point control block For details of the cross-point control block, see page 256. 1 In the Engineering Setup >Panel >Config menu, press [Program Button]. The Program Button menu appears. 2 Press [Xpt Module]. The Xpt Module menu appears. 3 Select the switcher bank, then in the group, press [Main Sub]. You can now use the [PRE MCRO] button as [MAIN], and the [POST MCRO] button as [SUB]. To assign macro operations to different buttons If in the above operation you assigned a Multi Program 2 function to the macro buttons, you can assign the PRE MCRO and POST MCRO functions to different buttons. For details, see “Assigning functions to user preference buttons” or “Assigning a function to a memory recall button in the utility/shotbox control block” in Chapter 16 (Volume 2). 236 Multi Program 2 Examples of Operations in the Multi Program 2 Mode (When Sharing a Switcher Bank) To create video on the M/E or PGM/PST bank assigned to both main and sub operations, use the following procedure. Press the [MAIN] button, turning it on, and turning off the [SUB] button. Chapter 1 MVS-8000 Functions 1 2 3 With the normal operations, create the main video. Press the [SUB] button, turning it on, and turning off the [MAIN] button. Now you can create the sub video. 4 Create the sub video. The basic method of operation is the same as for the main video, except that the utility 2 bus signal is assigned to background A, and the utility 3 bus signal is assigned to background B. For sub, only keys 2 to 4 can be used, and for wipes, standard wipe patterns only. There are also other differences in operation from standard mode. For details, see “Differences Between Multi Program 2 Mode and Standard Mode” (page 242) and “Restrictions on Using Multi Program 2 Mode” (page 243). 5 Press the [MAIN] and [SUB] buttons simultaneously, turning them on. If both buttons are lit, the control panel shows the status of main. 6 Carry out the transition. Both main and sub video images are switched. Optional Operations Making cross-point settings Cross-point assign tables can be set not only for main output but also for sub output. You can set cross-point assign tables for the following banks. M/E-1 SUB to M/E-3 SUB P/P SUB The table actually used is that for which the control panel delegation button is lit. Multi Program 2 237 For details, see “Cross-Point Settings (Xpt Assign Menu)” in Chapter 16 (Volume 2). Enabling DME wipe operations for sub Chapter 1 MVS-8000 Functions By factory default, DME wipe operations are inhibited for sub background. To enable them, in the Engineering Setup >Switcher >Config menu, set [DME Wipe Sub Enable] to On. This enables DME wipe operations for sub background. This setting applies to the whole control panel (all M/E banks and PGM/PST bank). Note If a DME wipe for sub is recalled in a snapshot or keyframe, the image will not be handled correctly. Inhibiting utility 2 bus signal selection In Multi Program 2 mode, you can inhibit other uses of the utility 2 bus signal in order to use the signal as the background for sub. This setting applies to the whole control panel (all M/E banks and PGM/PST bank). In the Engineering Setup >Panel >Config >MP2 Main/Sub Assign menu, set [Util2 Inhibit] to On. This inhibits operations of selecting from the background B row while holding down the [UTIL] button in the cross-point control block. Including Multi Program 2 data in recall operations of keyframes and snapshots In the Engineering Setup >Switcher >Config menu, set [Recall M/E Config] to On. When a keyframe or snapshot is stored or recalled, the following data is included. M/E Config, PGM Config, M/E Output Assign, and Key PVW Config For details of the above data, see “Setting the operating mode for each switcher bank” (page 233) and “Assigning output signals for Multi Program 2 mode” (page 233). This setting applies to the whole control panel (all M/E banks and PGM/PST bank). Note M/E Config data is saved, even when this setting is Off. 238 Multi Program 2 Changing the key assignment for each output (Misc menu) In Multi Program 2 mode you can change the key assignments independently. The following describes an example using M/E-1, but the operation is the same for other banks. Notes 1 Chapter 1 MVS-8000 Functions • This setting is linked to the setting in the Engineering Setup >Switcher > Config >PGM Config menu. • It is not possible to make this setting while the above PGM Config menu is locked, or [Recall M/E Config] (see previous item) is set to Off. In the M/E-1 menu, select first VF7 ‘Misc,’ then HF5 ‘Key Assign.’ The Key Assign menu appears, and the current key assignment is shown in the status area. 2 Change the setting in “Key Enable” as required. Keys recalled in a snapshot recall If a snapshot is recalled independently on main or sub, this only retrieves the settings for the key assigned to the recalled side. For example, if key 1 and key 2 are assigned on main, and key 3 and key 4 are assigned on sub, then if you recall a snapshot on main, this only retrieves the settings for key 1 and key 2, and the state of key 3 and key 4 assigned on sub is not affected. Assigning sub preview output to preview selection buttons You can assign the sub preview output to a preview selection button in the fade-to-black control block or downstream key/fade-to-black control block. For details, see “Overall Control Panel Settings (Config Menu)” in Chapter 16 (Volume 2). When the Multi Program 2 license is valid, by assigning the “Shift” function to a button, you can assign two preview outputs, “Shift” and “Unshift” to a single button. To use the shift output, always assign “Shift” to some button. Changing the matrix size to Standard When using a router, if the matrix size is set to [Compact (128×128)], it is not possible to control the utility 3 bus on the S-Bus. When using Multi Program 2, in thegroup of the Engineering Setup >Router/Tally >Router menu, select [Standard (136×138)]. For details, see “Assigning switcher inputs and outputs to S-Bus space” in Chapter 16 (Volume 2). Multi Program 2 239 As for the bus number of the utility 3 bus, a DME Key bus number is used as follows. Chapter 1 MVS-8000 Functions No. Bus (Standard) Bus (MP2) 70 M/E-1 DME Key M/E-1 Utility3 85 M/E-2 DME Key M/E-2 Utility3 100 M/E-3 DME Key M/E-3 Utility3 115 P/P DME Key P/P Utility3 Making settings for timeline-related keyframe operations To assign sub regions to the region selection buttons in the numeric keypad control block In the Engineering Setup >Panel >Config >10 Key Region Assign menu, assign regions to the region selection buttons in the numeric keypad control block. For details, see “Overall Control Panel Settings (Config Menu)” in Chapter 16 (Volume 2). To make region and reference region selections using a menu During snapshot or keyframe operations, you can select a region (including sub) in the Key Frame >Region Select menu. This is convenient for selecting some of the regions assigned to the numeric keypad control block or changing the reference region. For details, see “Specifying the Region and Edit Points” in Chapter 13 (Volume 2). To assign regions shown in the Timeline menu You can select how regions assigned to region selection buttons appear in the Key Frame >Timeline menu. For details, see “Setting the display of regions in the Timeline menu on or off” in Chapter 13 (Volume 2). Enabling re-entry between the main and sub sides of the same M/E bank In the Engineering Setup >Panel >Config menu, set [MP2 Free Re-Entry] to On. Notes • Re-entry adds a 1H delay to the video. Nested re-entry may lead to problems in the video. 240 Multi Program 2 • A maximum of eight re-entry stages are possible, with the final output having a delay of 4H. • The selection order of re-entry signals affects the number of lines by which the output signal is lowered. • If a delay occurs in the image, even when the through mode is set, the ancillary data does not pas through. • For example, it is possible to select the re-entry of M/E-1 main on M/E-1 main. Chapter 1 MVS-8000 Functions Restrictions on Mutual Re-entry When Using Multi Program 2 The snapshot function is affected by this re-entry function. When the [MP2 Free Re-Entry] button is On, and any of the switcher banks are in Multi Program 2 mode, then the following restrictions apply. If you save and recall snapshots simultaneously with more than one region specified, the recorded state is played back in the order of precedence of regions (M/E-1 >M/E-2 >M/E-3 >P/P). Therefore, if you save and recall snapshots with more than one region specified, the cross-point settings may not be recalled correctly. To recall the snapshots correctly, press the cross-point button before recalling the snapshots, to select a signal other than the re-entry signal, then recall the snapshots. Functions Added in Multi Program 2 Mode • You can set video processing for the utility 3 bus signal. • In the control panel and DCU GPI input settings and switcher GPI link settings, the actions that can be selected now also include “Sub Cut” and “Sub Auto Trans.” • A switcher GPI link can now be set also for the utility 3 bus. • To the macro event configuration parameters and macro attachment settings, “Main & Sub” and “Sub” have been added. • For cross-point button link settings, M/E-1 to M/E-3, and P/P “Sub Program,” “Sub Preset,” and “Sub Trans PGM” have been added to the link source bus. • Snapshot attributes can now be set independently for main and sub. • There are additional menus for sub which can be recalled by pressing a button twice. • You can set [MP2 Auto Correct] to On or Off in the Effect menu or Snapshot menu. When this is set to On, for example, copy destination and source data is automatically recognized as main or sub, and the data interchanged. Multi Program 2 241 Differences Between Multi Program 2 Mode and Standard Mode The differences from operation in standard mode are as follows. Chapter 1 MVS-8000 Functions Item Main Sub Keys a) Keys 1 to 4 can be used Keys 2 to 4 only can be used Wipes Patterns (background) Same as standard mode • Only standard patterns can be used • Pattern mix is not possible Same as standard mode • Pairing, modulation, spring, spiral, and split cannot be used • Edge fill mattes are single-color only • Replication can be selected from four patterns Modifiers Wipes (key) DME wipes Same as wipes (background) for sub Use Can be used Cannot be used (Can be used, with a setting change) Patterns for 1 For a dedicated interface, each of main and sub can be channel used. For the SDI interface, only one of main and sub can be used. Patterns for 2 Only one of main and sub can be used channels (For each M/E, the number of DMEs that can be used is the same as in standard mode.) Patterns for 3 channels Transitions Snapshots Backgrounds Wipe edge fill matte (including color mix and other settings in the Matte Adjust menu) Wipe edge fill matte (single-color only) Modifiers Same as standard mode Wipe border colors are single-color only Key priority Cannot be used Transition preview Cannot be used Preset color mix Color matte or video signal selected on the utility 2 bus Color matte only Cross-point hold Utility 2 cannot be set Utility 3 is added. BKGD A/B and Key1 cannot be set. Same as standard mode Cannot be used Control from an editor 242 Multi Program 2 Item Main Sub Operation setting for switcher GPI inputs and outputs Same as standard mode Cannot be used a) Keys 2 to 4 are common to main and sub. Chapter 1 MVS-8000 Functions Notes • Allow a transition to complete before carrying out main and sub delegation switching. • The sub background A bus (utility 2 bus) is shared with wipe edge border fill. Making a change to one affects the other. • Even if the wipe border width is set to the same numeric value for main and sub, the same image is not obtained. • Changing the position of the wipe pattern for sub also changes the pattern size. Restrictions on Using Multi Program 2 Mode • The following functions are not available for sub: – Data copy and swap – Default recall (except for parametric recall) – M/E link – [TRANS] button function (see page 268) – [TRACE] button function (see page 270) – [AUTO] button function (see page 309) • Re-entry is limited to four levels. Re-entry is not possible for main and sub of the same M/E. However, this restriction can be removed. For details, see “Enabling reentry between the main and sub sides of the same M/E bank” (page 240). • In the following cases, a transition using the fader lever may not be performed correctly: – When the main and sub bus toggle modes are set differently – For a pattern mix, preset color mix, and so on • For an Internal bus link, GPI link, or External bus link, the “Utility 2” bus cannot be selected. • Screen aspect, show key, and [MCRO ATTCH ENBL] button settings are common to main and sub. • If a snapshot is recalled simultaneously for main and sub, or a keyframe is executed simultaneously for main and sub, then for the following common to main and sub the main settings are reflected. – Key – M/E Config – DME external video bus and utility 1 bus Multi Program 2 243 Chapter 1 MVS-8000 Functions • When a macro attachment is set on the DME utility 1 bus or DME utility 2 bus, it is not possible to make separate main and sub settings. • When snapshots with different M/E Config settings are recalled: – If M/E Config data is not to be included in the snapshot data, the current system settings are used for snapshot reproduction. – If M/E Config data is to be included in the snapshot data and if it was created before Version 5.30, then standard mode is used. If created in Version 5.30 or later, first M/E Config data is set, and then other snapshot data is recalled. • The bus override function is only available on the following buses: – M/E-1 to M/E-3 Main BKGD A/B buses – M/E-1 to M/E-3 Sub BKGD A/B buses (UTIL-2, UTIL-3 buses) – P/P Main PGM/PST bus – P/P Sub PGM/PST buses (UTIL-2, UTIL-3 buses) • When a master snapshot or master timeline is executed with a key being assigned to both main and sub, it is uncertain which data will be reflected. • When recalling a master snapshot with different register numbers for main and sub, the recall timing may differ by one field or more between main and sub. • The link state is maintained even when M/E Config is changed. Set the link setting again, as required. • Since keys 2 to 4 are shared between main and sub, when the main and sub fader lever positions are different, if you move the fader lever, the video changes instantaneously to the value of the most recently moved fader lever. • When the transition type for main or sub is set to preset color mix, it is not possible to carry out independent key transition operation (common to main and sub). 244 Multi Program 2 Dual Link Support Chapter 1 MVS-8000 Functions By installing the BZS-8560 switcher upgrade software in the MVS-8000G, or the BZDM-8560 DME upgrade software in the MVE-8000A, you can switch the signal format to 1080P/59.94 or 1080P/50. In this case, signal input/output uses a dual link a). a) Standard specified by SMPTE 372M-2002. One video signal is carried by two HD-SDI signals, allowing data with an increased frame rate to be carried. Getting access to the software To use the switcher upgrade software and DME upgrade software, you are required to enter an install key which validates the software. (If the software has been factory installed, the install key is not required.) For the method of obtaining an install key, contact your Sony representative. On that occasion, you may be required to submit the unique device ID of the switcher you are using. You can check the unique device ID in the Install menu of the switcher. For details of operating procedures, see Chapter 16, “Installation and Device Setup (Install/Unit Config Menu)” (Volume 2). Note Switching the signal format to 1080P/59.94 or 1080P/50 requires the optional multi-format software. For details of this software option, see page 189. An MKS-8110G 17-input board and MKS-8160G 24-output board set are also required. Setting the signal format to 1080P/59.94 or 1080P/50 You can switch the signal format to 1080P/59.94 or 1080P/50 in setup. For details, see “Setting the Signal Format (Format Menu)” in Chapter 16 (Volume 2). You can also switch the signal format with a GPI input. For details, see the following sections of Chapter 16 (Volume 2), depending on the device. • “Interfacing With External Devices (Device Interface Menu)” in “Setup Relating to Switcher Processor” Dual Link Support 245 • “Interfacing With External Devices” in “Setup Relating to Operations From the Control Panel” • “Interfacing With External Devices (Device Interface Menu)” in “Setup Relating to DME” • “GPI Input Settings (GPI Input Assign Menu)” in “Setup Relating to DCU” • The available input reference signals are as follows. Signal format Input reference signal Chapter 1 MVS-8000 Functions Tri Sync Black burst 1080P/59.94 59.94 Black Burst 59.94 Sync 59.94 1080P/50 50 Black Burst 50 Sync 50 Switching the signal type of DME output (video/key) assigned to a monitor signal The function for switching the signal type of the monitor output (one channel) to video or key is assigned to one of the Prefs buttons of the Menu control block or one of the buttons of the Utility/Shotbox control block (DME MON KEY command). For details of the assignment, see “Settings Button Assignment (Prefs/Utility Menu)” in Chapter 16 (Volume 2). To switch the signal type of DME output (video/key) assigned to a monitor signal Press the DME MON KEY command assigned button and turn it on to assign DME key output to a monitor signal. Then press the button and turn it off to assign DME video output to a monitor signal. For selection of the DME channels to be assigned to a monitor signal, see “Assigning a DME output signal as a monitor signal” (page 403) under “Applying a DME Effect to a Key” in Chapter 4. Selecting the signal output from the DME monitor output connector 1 2 3 4 Display the Engineering Setup >DME >Output >Monitor Output menu. Press [DME1] or [DME2] to select the DME to operate on. On the left, select MONI OUT#1 or MONI OUT#3. On the right, select the signal. You can select any of Ch1 Video, Ch1 Key, Ch2 Video, and Ch2 Key. 246 Dual Link Support 5 Press [Set]. This assigns the signal. Restrictions when using a dual link When using a dual link, the switcher and DME resources are linked in duplex (link A and link B), resulting in the following restrictions. Details Functions that cannot be used in the system Functions of the following items in the Engineering Setup >Switcher >Config menu Single Simul, Dual Simul Functions that cannot be used in the switcher • • • • • • • • • • • Functions that cannot be used on the DME • DME channels 3, 4, 7, and 8 • Freeze in film mode • “Freeze Timing” in the following effects Input Freeze, Trail, Decay, KF Strobe (always set to Frame) • Brick • Editor ports 3 and 4 when the editor port operation mode is set to “Independent.” Other restrictions • • • • Chapter 1 MVS-8000 Functions Restrictions Primary inputs numbers 41 to 80 Outputs number 25 to 48 Monitor buses 2/4/6/8 M/E-2 bank a) M/E-3 bank DME utility 1 and 2 buses Color background 2 b) Color corrector 2 Frame memory Format converter Functions of the following items in the Engineering Setup >Switcher >Config menu Switching Timing, M/E Config excluding Standard, and Logical M/E Assign Auto chroma keying operates on the image of link A. Tallies are generated for the link A signal. Key frames are created in units of two frames. It is not possible to change the interpolation method in the DME. a) When the simple P/P software is not installed b) When the switcher is a 2M/E system only Dual Link Support 247 Chapter 1 MVS-8000 Functions Dual Link Support 248 Chapter 2 Menus and Control Panel Names and Functions of Parts of the Control Panel .............................251 Control Panel: Example Configuration 1 (With Standard Transition Modules) .....................................251 Control Panel: Example Configuration 2 (With Simple Transition Modules) ........................................252 Control Panel: Example Configuration 3 (With Compact Transition Modules) .....................................255 Cross-Point Control Block ................................................................256 Transition Control Block (Standard Type) ........................................260 Flexi Pad Control Block (Standard Type) .........................................264 Key Control Block .............................................................................267 Device Control Block (Trackball) .....................................................271 Device Control Block (Joystick) .......................................................277 Device Control Block (Search Dial) ..................................................278 Keyframe Control Block ...................................................................281 Numeric Keypad Control Block ........................................................284 Fade to Black Control Block .............................................................287 Auxiliary Bus Control Block (for AUX Buses) ................................288 Auxiliary Bus Control Block (for Router Control) ...........................291 Menu Control Block ..........................................................................294 Memory Card/USB Adaptor Block ...................................................295 “Memory Stick”/USB Connections Block ........................................296 Utility/Shotbox Control Block ..........................................................298 Transition Control Block and Flexi Pad Control Block (Simple Type) .. 299 Independent Key Transition Control Block (Simple Type) ..............304 Downstream Key Control Block .......................................................306 Downstream Key/Fade-to-Black Control Block ...............................308 Transition Control Block (Compact Type) .......................................310 Basic Menu Operations ............................................................................313 Menu Organization ............................................................................313 About the Top Menu List ..................................................................313 Accessing Menus ...............................................................................314 Displaying a Menu ............................................................................321 Interpreting the Menu Screen ............................................................322 Menu Operations ...............................................................................323 Switching Between the Main Menu Site and Subsidiary Menu Site 335 Shortcut Menu ...................................................................................335 Names and Functions of Parts of the Control Panel Control Panel: Example Configuration 1 (With Standard Transition Modules) The MVS-8000 system control panel comprises a number of modules. The following illustration shows a typical 32-button, 4-M/E configuration, with standard transition modules used in the transition control block. Chapter 2 Menus and Control Panel Auxiliary bus control block (page 288) M/E-1 bank M/E-2 bank M/E-3 bank PGM/PST (program/ preset) bank Cross-point control block (page 256) Control panel configuration 1 (left side) (with standard transition modules) Names and Functions of Parts of the Control Panel 251 Keyframe control block (page 281) Menu control block (page 294) Key control block (page 267) Device control block (page 271/page 277) Memory card/USB adaptor block (page 295) “Memory Stick”/USB connections block (page 296) Utility/Shotbox control block (page 298) Chapter 2 Menus and Control Panel Downstream key control block (page 306) Transition control block (standard type) (page 260) Numeric keypad control block (page 284) Fade to black control block (page 287) Flexi Pad control block (standard type) (page 264) Control panel configuration 1 (right side) (with standard transition modules) Control Panel: Example Configuration 2 (With Simple Transition Modules) The following illustration shows a typical configuration, with simple transition 252 Names and Functions of Parts of the Control Panel modules used in the transition control block. Except for the simple modules, this is the same configuration as in example configuration 1. Chapter 2 Menus and Control Panel Control panel configuration 2 (left side) (with simple transition modules) Names and Functions of Parts of the Control Panel 253 Transition control block and Flexi Pad control block (simple type) (page 299) Independent key transition control block (simple type) (page 304) Chapter 2 Menus and Control Panel Control panel configuration 2 (right side) (with simple transition modules) 254 Names and Functions of Parts of the Control Panel Control Panel: Example Configuration 3 (With Compact Transition Modules) The following illustration shows a typical configuration, with compact transition modules used in the transition control block. Transition control block (compact type) (page 310) Chapter 2 Menus and Control Panel Control panel configuration 3 (with compact transition modules) Names and Functions of Parts of the Control Panel 255 Cross-Point Control Block All operations except those of the [SHIFT] button are the same as for a module with source name displays. In the cross-point control block, you can select the signals to be used in this M/E bank or PGM/PST bank. There are also modules without the source name displays shown in the following figure. 1 Cross-point buttons Key 2 row Reentry buttons Key 1 row 7 M/E bank display Chapter 2 Menus and Control Panel 3 Key bus selection buttons SHIFT M/E 1 M/E 2 M/E 3 XPT HOLD KEY3 SHIFT M/E 1 M/E 2 M/E 3 XPT HOLD KEY4 PRE MCRO POST MCRO SHIFT SHIFT M/E 1 M/E 2 M/E 3 XPT HOLD MCRO ATTCH ENBL SHIFT M/E 1 M/E 2 M/E 3 XPT HOLD UTIL 8 Macro buttons Background B row 4 UTIL button Background A row 2 XPT HOLD buttons 5 Source name displays Reentry buttons 6 SHIFT button a Cross-point buttons These buttons select the signals used for video creation on this M/E bank or PGM/ PST bank. Each row of buttons corresponds 256 Names and Functions of Parts of the Control Panel to one or more signal buses within the switcher. Key 1 row: The buttons in this row select the key 1 or key 3 signals to be inserted Background B row: Press the desired button to select the signal as the background after the next transition on this M/E bank or PGM/PST bank. While the [UTIL] button on the right hand side is held down in Hold mode, these buttons are assigned to the utility 2 bus, and can be used to select the signal on that bus. Reentry buttons: These allow you to select the video created on another bank as background A or B or one of the keys 1 to 4. For example, to use the video created on the M/E-1 bank as background B on the M/E-2 bank, press the reentry button [M/E 1] in the background B row of buttons on the M/ E-2 bank. Chapter 2 Menus and Control Panel into the video on this M/E bank or PGM/PST bank. To select the key 1 fill signal, check that the right-hand [KEY3] button in the M/E bank (or the [DSK3] button in the PGM/PST bank) is off, then press the button assigned to the desired signal. To select the key 3 fill signal, press the [KEY3] button, turning it on. While the [UTIL] button on the right hand side is held down, these buttons are assigned to the DME external video bus allowing you to select the signal on that bus. Key 2 row: The buttons in this row select the key 2 or key 4 signals to be inserted into the video on this M/E bank or PGM/PST bank. To select the key 2 fill signal, check that the right-hand [KEY4] button in the M/E bank (or the [DSK4] button in the PGM/PST bank) is off, then press the button assigned to the desired signal. To select the key 4 fill signal, press the [KEY4] button, turning it on. While the [UTIL] button on the right hand side is held down, these buttons are assigned to the DME utility 1 or 2 bus as follows. • When the [KEY4] button is off, holding down the [UTIL] button assigns these buttons to the DME utility 1 bus. • Holding down the [UTIL] button and pressing the [KEY4] button, turning it on, assigns these buttons to the DME utility 2 bus. Background A row: Press the desired button to select the signal as the current background video on this M/E bank or PGM/PST bank. While the [UTIL] button on the right hand side is held down in Hold mode, these buttons are assigned to the utility 1 bus, and can be used to select the signal on that bus. Cross-point button numbers This description applies to the example of a 32-button system. From the left, the first 31 buttons are numbered 1, 2, ... 30, 31. When the 32nd button is set to be a [SHIFT] button, these buttons can also be switched to select signals numbered from 32 to 62. While the [SHIFT] button is held down, these switch to numbers 32 to 62, or alternatively, every time the button is pressed, switching is made between numbers 1 to 31 and 32 to 62. Similarly, the reentry buttons can be switched between two sets of numbers: 121 to 123, and 125 to 127. Both the assignment of the 32nd button to a [SHIFT] button and the selection of the button operation mode can be done in a Setup menu. Assigning signals to button You can assign a signal to each button using the Setup menu. This assignment is common to the crosspoint buttons in the M/E-1, M/E-2, M/E-3, and PGM/PST banks, and the auxiliary bus Names and Functions of Parts of the Control Panel 257 control block. According to the settings made in the menu, the video and key signals are assigned to the cross-point buttons in pairs. You can also make separate signal assignments for each operating control block. Chapter 2 Menus and Control Panel Visual indications on cross-point buttons The currently selected button in a row (i.e. the last button pressed) lights amber or red. Amber (“low tally”): The signal selected on the bus does not form part of the program output from the switcher. Red (“high tally”): The signal selected on the bus forms part of the program output from the switcher. b XPT (cross-point) HOLD buttons Turning one of these buttons on enables you to recall a keyframe or snapshot while keeping the current cross-point selection unchanged. When the [XPT HOLD] button in the key 1 or key 2 row is on, then the operation is as follows, depending on the setting in the Setup menu. When the panel setup is “Normal”: The operation is as follows, depending on the setting in switcher setup. Key Disable: The snapshot or keyframe is recalled without changing the current key settings. Key Disable with Status: The snapshot or key frame is recalled without changing the current key settings, including the on/off status. Xpt Hold: The snapshot or keyframe is recalled without changing the current cross-point selection. When the panel setup is “Protect”: The cross-point settings cannot be changed by pressing panel buttons. 258 Names and Functions of Parts of the Control Panel c Key bus selection buttons KEY3 button: Press this button, turning it on, to assign the key 1 cross-point buttons to the key 3 fill bus. KEY4 button: Press this button, turning it on, to assign the key 2 cross-point buttons to the key 4 fill bus. Pressing one of the key delegation buttons [KEY1] to [KEY4] in the transition control block (standard type) twice in rapid succession changes the state of the corresponding one of these buttons, so that you can make cross-point selections on the key bus (see page 263). d UTIL (utility) button While this button is held down, the crosspoint buttons are assigned to the following buses, respectively. Background A row: utility 1 bus Background B row: utility 2 bus Key 1 row: DME external video bus Key 2 row: DME utility 1 bus when the [KEY4] button is off, or DME utility 2 bus when the [KEY4] button is lit. In a Setup menu, you can select either of the following two modes for these buttons. • The button takes effect while being held down. • Every time the button is pressed, it toggles between the on and off states for key 1 and key 2 rows. For background A and background B rows, utility buses remain disabled. e Source name displays These show the names of the signals which can be selected on the cross-point buttons, in two or four characters, or in auto mode. While the [SHIFT] button on the right hand side or the [SHIFT] button assigned to the column of cross-point buttons is enabled, the source name of the signal assigned to the column of cross-point buttons in shift mode appears. You can select green, orange, or yellow for the background color of the source name display, for each source separately. You can set the source name display mode and background color in a Setup menu. g M/E bank display This indicates the notional mix/effect bank name to which the particular M/E or PGM/ PST bank is assigned, as a four-character identifier. Chapter 2 Menus and Control Panel f SHIFT button When this button is enabled, either the source name displays show the shifted signal names, or the shifted signals for all buses in this M/E (P/P) bank are enabled. You can select either mode in a Setup menu. Each press of the button toggles between the enabled and disabled states. In the case of a module without source name displays, when “Display” is selected in the Setup menu, this button is invalid. POST MCRO (post macro) button: Use this button to set a macro attachment in post macro mode. For setting in macro only mode, use this in combination with a macro only set button assigned to the utility/shotbox control block or a user preference button. Alternatively, without using the button, you can make the selection simply, by pressing simultaneously with the [PRE MCRO] button. When dual background bus mode or utility/shotbox mode is selected in setup, this button is disabled. If in setup the function for disabling cross-point button operations is assigned to the [PRE MCRO] button, then this button is disabled. MCRO ATTCH ENBL (macro attachment enable) button: When this button is on, the macro attachments set for the buttons of the M/E bank are enabled. h Macro buttons PRE MCRO (pre macro) button: Use this button to set a macro attachment in pre macro mode. For setting in macro only mode, use this in combination with a macro only set button assigned to the utility/shotbox control block or a user preference button. Alternatively, without using the button, you can make the selection simply, by pressing simultaneously with the [POST MCRO] button. When dual background bus mode is selected in setup, this switches the dual background bus mode on and off. When set to utility/shotbox mode, this enables and disables the use of the key 2 row as a utility/shotbox. If in setup this is assigned to the function for disabling cross-point button operations, then it enables or disables cross-point button operations. Names and Functions of Parts of the Control Panel 259 Transition Control Block (Standard Type) In the transition control block, you can modify the output of the M/E bank or PGM/ PST bank, and perform transitions. Both common transition and independent key transition operations are possible. 9 PRIOR SET button 1 Next transition selection buttons 8 Key status display 2 Transition type selection buttons qf Key snapshot setting buttons q; Key delegation buttons Chapter 2 Menus and Control Panel qd Key source name display/key snapshot buttons ON ON ON ON 1234123412341234 BKGD KEY1 KEY2 KEY3 KEY4 KEY1 KEY PRIOR MIX NAM SUPER MIX ALL PST COLOR MIX WIPE DME KEY2 MIX PRIOR SET NORM NORM /REV REV AUTO TRANS TRANS PVW CUT PTN LIMIT LIMIT SET KEY3 WIPE KEY4 DME K-MOD ENBL K-SS K-TR ENBL K-SS STORE KEY1 ON KEY2 ON KEY3 ON KEY4 ON AUTO TRANS AUTO TRANS AUTO TRANS AUTO TRANS KF qs Independent key transition execution section qa Independent key transition type selection buttons 7 KF button 6 Pattern limit buttons 5 TRANS PVW button 3 Transition execution section 4 Wipe direction selection buttons 260 Names and Functions of Parts of the Control Panel b Transition type selection buttons You can assign these buttons in setup to any transition type (see “Overall Control Panel Settings (Config Menu)” in Chapter 16 (Volume 2)). Press one of these buttons, turning it on, to determine the type of the next transition. When multi-program mode is selected in the Setup menu (see “Settings for Switcher Configuration (Config Menu)” in Chapter 16 (Volume 2)), two or more of the following buttons may light. MIX: In a background transition, the new video fades in as the current video fades out. During the transition, the overall signal level is maintained at 100%. In a key transition, the key fades in (for insertion) or out (for removal). NAM (non-additive mix): The current and new video signals are compared, and the signal with the higher luminance level is given priority in the output. The current video is maintained at 100% output for the first half of the transition as the new video increases progressively to 100%, then the current video is progressively reduced from 100% to zero in the second half while the new video is maintained at 100%. SUPER MIX: The current video is maintained at 100% output for the first half of the transition as the new video is mixed while increasing progressively to 100%. The current video is then progressively reduced from 100% to zero in the second half while the new video is maintained at 100%. PST (preset) COLOR MIX: In the first transition, the current video is replaced by the color matte in a mix (dissolve), then in the second transition the color matte is replaced by the new video also in a mix (dissolve). In place of a color matte, you can select any signal on the utility 2 bus. WIPE: The current video is replaced by the new video, using the wipe pattern selected in the Wipe menu. DME: A wipe type of transition is carried out, using the DME effect selected in the DME Wipe menu. FM1&2ClIP, FM3&4ClIP, FM5&6ClIP, FM7&8ClIP: A recorded clip is played back together with the transition. At this point, you can also carry out a transition (wipe or mix (dissolve)) simultaneously together with the clip. Chapter 2 Menus and Control Panel a Next transition selection buttons Press these buttons, turning them on, to determine what the next transition will apply to. BKGD: Next transition changes the background. KEY1 to KEY4 (DSK1 to DSK4 in the PGM/PST bank): Press this button, turning it on, to make the next transition insert or remove the corresponding key (keys 1 to 4). If a key is currently inserted it will be removed, and vice versa. In the PGM/PST bank, this inserts or removes downstream keys 1 to 4. KEY PRIOR (priority): When this button is lit, the setting of the key priority after the next transition is enabled. The key priority after the next transition appears in the key status display. ALL: Pressing this button turns on a preselected set of the [BKGD], [KEY1] to [KEY4], and [KEY PRIOR] buttons. Make this setting in a Setup menu. c Transition execution section Transition indicator: This comprises multiple LEDs, which show the progress of the transition. Fader lever: Move this to carry out a manual transition. Pressing the [KF] Names and Functions of Parts of the Control Panel 261 Chapter 2 Menus and Control Panel button to turn it on allows you to use this as a key frame fader. Transition rate display: This shows the “transition rate” (the time from the beginning of a transition to its completion) set for an auto transition, in frames. You can set the transition rate using the numeric keypad control block, Flexi Pad control block, or menu. AUTO TRANS (transition) button: Pressing this button carries out an auto transition of the set transition rate (duration). The transition starts immediately, and the button lights amber. When the transition completes, the button goes off. CUT button: Pressing this button carries out the transition as a cut (i.e. instantaneously). d Wipe direction selection buttons When you have selected a wipe or DME wipe as the transition type, press one of these buttons, turning it on, to select the wipe direction. NORM (normal): The wipe proceeds in the direction from black to white as shown on the pattern in the lists of patterns see “Wipe Pattern List” (page 560) and “DME Wipe Pattern List” (page 566) in Appendix (Volume 1), or in the direction of the arrow. When the VTR/disk recorder/frame memory operation mode is enabled in setup, pressing this button plays the tape. REV (reverse): The wipe proceeds in the opposite direction to that when the [NORM] button is pressed. When the VTR/disk recorder/frame memory operation mode is enabled in setup, pressing this button cues the tape automatically to the start point. NORM/REV (normal/reverse): The wipe direction alternates between normal 262 Names and Functions of Parts of the Control Panel and reverse every time a transition is executed. When the VTR/disk recorder/frame memory operation mode is enabled in setup, pressing this button stops the tape. e TRANS PVW (transition preview) button When this button is lit, you can check in advance the video changes during the transition, on the preview output from the M/E or PGM/PST bank. During the preview, you can use the fader lever, [AUTO TRANS] button, and [CUT] button. One of the following functions of this button can be selected in a Setup mode. • When the transition completes, the system returns to the normal mode. • The transition preview mode is maintained while this button is pressed. • Switching is made between the transition preview mode and normal mode every time this button is pressed. f Pattern limit buttons PTN (pattern) LIMIT: Pressing this button, turning it on, enables the pattern limit function. When the VTR/disk recorder/frame memory operation mode is enabled in setup, pressing this button plays the tape. LIMIT SET: Use this button to set a pattern limit when the [PTN LIMIT] button is off. Move the fader lever to the position of a particular pattern size, and stop it there, then press this button to set the pattern limit range. When the VTR/disk recorder/frame memory operation mode is enabled in setup, pressing this button stops the tape. g KF (keyframe) button When the VTR/disk recorder/frame memory operation mode is enabled in setup, pressing this button cues the tape automatically to the start point. When not, pressing this button to turn it on allows you to use the fader lever as a key frame fader. h Key status display For each of keys 1 to 4, the corresponding ON indicator lights when the key is inserted. It also shows the priority (1 to 4) of each key. The following controls are used as the independent key transition control block. j Key delegation buttons These buttons delegate this independent key transition control block to a desired keyer. Press one of the [KEY1] to [KEY4] buttons ([DSK1] to [DSK4] in the PGM/ PST bank), turning it on. You can press more than one button to select two or more keyers. While these buttons are held down, you can select a key source with the cross-point buttons for the key bus. Key delegation button (double press) Corresponding key bus [KEY1] key 1 a) [KEY2] key 2 b) [KEY3] key 3 c) [KEY4] key 4 d) a) The key bus selection button [KEY3] in the crosspoint control block goes off. b) The key bus selection button [KEY4] in the crosspoint control block goes off. c) The key bus selection button [KEY3] in the crosspoint control block lights. d) The key bus selection button [KEY4] in the crosspoint control block lights. Chapter 2 Menus and Control Panel i PRIOR (priority) SET button While this button is held down, you can set the key priority. The setting mode when this button is pressed depends on whether or not the [KEY PRIOR] button is lit, as follows. • When the [KEY PRIOR] button is off, the current key priority is set. • When the [KEY PRIOR] button is lit, the key priority after the next transition is set. Press the [KEY PRIOR] button as required, to switch between these two modes. In either mode, hold down the [PRIOR SET] button, and press the button ([KEY1] to [KEY4]) corresponding to the key you want to bring to the front. Pressing one of these buttons twice in rapid succession changes its state so that you can make cross-point selections on the corresponding key bus. k Independent key transition type selection buttons Press one of the following buttons, turning it on, to select the independent key transition type. MIX: Faded in or out. WIPE: Inserted or deleted with a wipe. DME (DME wipe): Inserted or deleted with a DME wipe. l Independent key transition execution section KEY1 ON to KEY4 ON (DSK1 ON to DSK4 ON in the PGM/PST bank) buttons: Press the corresponding one of these buttons to cut key 1 to key 4 in or out instantaneously. When the key corresponding to the button appears in the final program output, the button lights red, and otherwise lights amber. AUTO TRANS (transition) buttons: These correspond to keys 1 to 4 from left to right; press one to carry out an auto transition. The transition rate for an independent key transition can be Names and Functions of Parts of the Control Panel 263 set in the numeric keypad control block, in the Flexi Pad control block, or in a menu. m Key source name display/key snapshot buttons These display the source name selected on the corresponding keyer. In key snapshot mode, press these buttons, corresponding to registers 1 to 4 for the selected keyer, to save or recall a key snapshot. n Key snapshot setting buttons K-SS (key snapshot): This enables key snapshot mode. K-SS STORE (key snapshot store): To save a key snapshot, hold down this button, and press the key source name display/key snapshot button corresponding to the register you want to save. K-MOD ENBL (key modifier enable): To recall key adjustment values and key modifier settings when recalling a key snapshot, press this button, turning it on. K-TR ENBL (key transition enable): To recall independent key transition settings when recalling a key snapshot, press this button, turning it on. Chapter 2 Menus and Control Panel Flexi Pad Control Block (Standard Type) The Flexi Pad control block is used for saving and recalling wipe snapshots, DME wipe snapshots, and snapshots, for recalling effects, and shotbox content, and for entering the transition rate. 264 Names and Functions of Parts of the Control Panel 1 Mode selection buttons 5 XPT HOLD status display 6 Numeric display 4 UNDO button WIPE XPT HOLD A B U 1 U2 1 2 3 4 UNDO DME 7 8 9 4 5 6 1 2 3 SNAP SHOT TRANS RATE BNAK 0 EFF Chapter 2 Menus and Control Panel SHOT BOX BANK 1 0 MCRO STORE STATS EFF DISS AUTO TRAN BANK SEL 2 Bank selection buttons 3 Memory recall section a Mode selection buttons WIPE: To save or recall a wipe snapshot, or recall the pattern number of a wipe pattern, use this in combination with the buttons of the memory recall section. DME: To save or recall a DME wipe snapshot, or recall the pattern number of a DME wipe pattern, use this in combination with the buttons of the memory recall section. SNAPSHOT: To save or recall a snapshot, use this in combination with the buttons of the memory recall section. EFF (effect): To recall the master timeline or run an effect, use this in combination with the buttons in the memory recall section. SHOTBOX: To recall or execute a shotbox, use this in combination with the buttons of the memory recall section. MCRO (macro): To save, recall or edit a macro, use this in combination with the buttons of the memory recall section. TRANS RATE (transition rate): To enter the transition rate, press this button, turning it on. To enter the independent key transition rate, hold down this button, and press the key delegation button in the independent key transition control block. To select whether the value is entered in frames or as a timecode value, switch the [TC] button in the memory recall section on or off. Names and Functions of Parts of the Control Panel 265 b Bank selection buttons BANK0 (bank 0): Assigns the memory recall section to bank 0, of registers 1 to 10. BANK1 (bank 1): Assigns the memory recall section to bank 1, of registers 11 to 20. BANK SEL (bank selection): After pressing this button, press a button in the memory recall section to select banks 0 to 9. c Memory recall section This consists of 12 buttons with LCDs. These display changes, according to various operation modes. Chapter 2 Menus and Control Panel d UNDO button UNDO: After recalling a register, press this button to return to the state before recalling the register. When contents have been saved to a register, hold down the [STORE STATS] button and press this button to return the register to its state before the save operation. STORE STATS (store status): When a save or delete operation has been carried out on a register, this button lights amber. After saving to a register, hold down this button and press the relevant register button to delete the data in the register. Again, after a save operation on a register, hold down this button and press the [UNDO] button to restore the register to its state before the save operation. e XPT HOLD (cross-point hold) status display A bus for which cross-point hold is set appears as a green light. f Numeric display Depending on the operation mode, this shows the pattern number of a wipe or 266 Names and Functions of Parts of the Control Panel DME wipe, a bank number, a register number, a transition rate, and so on in up to four digits. Key Control Block Each of the M/E banks and the PGM/PST bank includes four keyers (for keys 1 to 4), and you can delegate this control block to any desired keyer. In this control block, you can adjust and modify keys. 3 Key fill/key source selection buttons 2 Key type selection buttons q; ON AIR indicators 1 Delegation buttons qg RESIZER button 8 Displays 9 DME channel selection buttons M/E 2 M/E 3 P/P RE SIZER KEY1 KEY2 KEY3 KEY4 TRANS LUM LIN CRK CVK PTN AUTO SEL SPLIT MATTE FILL KEY DROP SOFT EDGE BDR DROP BDR SHDW OUT LINE EMBOS SHOW KEY MAIN MASK SUB MASK ZABTN MORE DME 1 DME 2 DME 3 DME 4 DME 5 DME 6 DME 7 DME 8 MON FM FEED PROC KEY AUTO DELEG OVER RIDE TRACE qf AUTO DELEG button 6 SHOW KEY button 4 Key modifier buttons Chapter 2 Menus and Control Panel M/E 1 7 Knobs qa Output destination specification buttons qd TRACE button qs OVERRIDE button 5 MORE button a Delegation buttons Key delegation: Press one of the [KEY1] to [KEY4] buttons to delegate the key control block to the corresponding keyer. M/E delegation: Press one of the [M/E 1] to [M/E 3], and [P/P] buttons to select the bank (an M/E bank or the PGM/ PST bank) to which the key control block is delegated. Names and Functions of Parts of the Control Panel 267 TRANS: By pressing this button, you can check the DME channel used for DME wipes on the M/E or PGM/PST bank. Also, by pressing this button, then pressing one of the DME channel selection buttons, you can preset the DME channel to be used when a DME wipe is selected as the transition type for the next transition. When presetting the DME channel for an independent key transition, hold down this button, then press one of the [KEY1] to [KEY4] buttons, turning the two buttons on, beforehand. Chapter 2 Menus and Control Panel b Key type selection buttons Press one of these buttons, turning it on, to select the desired key type. Depending on the selected key type, various parameters are displayed, and you can set the values with the knobs. LUM (luminance key): The background is cut out according to the luminance (Y) of the key source signal, and at the same time the key fill signal is cut out and then added to the background signal. LIN (linear key): This is a type of luminance key with a reduced variation in gain and a higher adjustment precision. CRK (chroma key): A particular hue (usually blue) in the key source signal is used to determine the hole to be cut in the background and filled with the key fill signal. CVK (color vector key): The background is cut out with a key source created by adding the luminance and chrominance components of the key signal. If the saturation is high, this allows perfect keying even if the luminance level is low and the signal is not suitable for luminance keying. PTN (wipe pattern key): A hole is cut in the background by a wipe pattern 268 Names and Functions of Parts of the Control Panel selected in the transition, and this is filled with the key fill signal. c Key fill/key source selection buttons AUTO SEL (selection): Use the signal selected on the key fill bus, and the paired key source signal. The setting of key fill and key source pairs is carried out in a Setup menu. SPLIT: To use the signal selected on the key fill bus as key fill, and a signal separate from the signal assigned in a pair with key fill for key source, press this button, turning it on. To select the signal on the key source bus, hold down this button, and press a button in the key 1 or key 2 row in the cross-point control block. To use the signal selected on the key fill bus as key source (self keying), press the [AUTO SEL] button and [SPLIT] button at the same time, so that both are off. MATTE FILL: To use a color matte from the internal generator as key fill, press this button, turning it on. You can adjust the color matte using the knobs. When this button is off, the signal selected on the key fill bus is used as key fill. d Key modifier buttons To add an edge modifier to the key, press one of these buttons, turning it on. Depending on the edge type selected, parameters appear in the displays, and you can set the values with the knobs. KEY DROP: When drop border or shadow is selected, turning this button on lowers the key fill and key source position by four or eight scan lines as set in the key menu. To select 4H or 8H, use the Key menu. When the selected edge type is “normal” and soft edge is selected or when border, outline, or emboss is it changes from amber to green and the fifth and subsequent parameters are assigned to the knobs, allowing them to be adjusted. f SHOW KEY button While this button is held down, a key processed key source signal is output from the specified output port. You can make the output specification independently for each of edit preview and the preview of each M/ E or PGM/PST bank in a Setup menu. g Knobs Turn the knobs to adjust the parameter values. h Displays Each display shows the initial letters of the parameter name and the parameter value (maximum three digits including a minus sign for a negative value). Chapter 2 Menus and Control Panel selected, this button lights automatically. BDR (border): Apply a border of a uniform thickness to the whole key. DROP BDR (drop border): Apply a border to two sides of the key (for example, below and to the right, or below and to the left). SHDW (shadow): Apply a shadow to two sides of the key (for example, below and to the right, or below and to the left). OUTLINE: Use the outline of the key. EMBOS (emboss): Apply an embossing effect to the periphery of the key. • To select a “normal” as the edge type (that is, a plain edge), set all five of the above buttons off. • When border, drop border, or shadow is selected, you can use a special color matte or a signal selected on the utility 1 bus for the edge. • When emboss is selected, you can use the dedicated color matte signal for the emboss function. • When outline is selected, the signal selected on the key fill bus is used to fill the edge. MAIN MASK: Press this button, turning it on, to enable the key mask using the main pattern. It also enables you to set the parameters with the knobs. SUB MASK: Press this button, turning it on, to enable the key mask using the sub pattern. It also enables you to set the parameters with the knobs. ZABTN (zabton): When this is pressed, turning it on, a translucent pattern is inserted behind the key. With the knobs, you can adjust the color, size, density, and softness parameters. SOFT EDGE: Soften the edge of the key. i DME channel selection buttons Press one of these buttons, turning it on, to delegate a DME channel to the keyer. The number of valid DME channel selection buttons depends on the number of channels installed in the DME processor. A maximum of four consecutively numbered DME channels from the two sets, DME 1 to 4 and DME 5 to 8, can be assigned to one keyer. A DME channel assigned to a keyer cannot be selected on another keyer. However, using the override function it is possible to allocate a channel already allocated to another keyer to the currently selected keyer. If DME channel allocations have been made in a Setup menu, these buttons cannot be used to make DME channel allocations. Using the trace function, it is possible to check which keyer a DME channel is allocated to. e MORE button When there are more than four parameters, this button lights amber. When it is pressed, Names and Functions of Parts of the Control Panel 269 j ON AIR indicators These light red when the corresponding DME channels are included in the final program output. Chapter 2 Menus and Control Panel k Output destination specification buttons MON (DME monitor): Hold down this button and press the selection button for the DME channel you want to assign to the monitor output; you can then monitor the output signal on the DME monitor output. While this button is held down, the DME channel selection buttons light as follows, allowing you to check the monitor assignment. Lit amber: DME channel that can currently be monitored Lit green: DME channel currently assigned to the monitor output FM FEED (frame memory feed): When you press this button, it lights momentarily amber, then for the currently selected keyer, the key processed signals are selected for frame memory sources 1 and 2. If a DME is selected on the currently selected keyer, the key fill and key source signals to which a DME effect is applied are assigned to frame memory sources 1 and 2; otherwise the key fill and key source are assigned. Carrying out a frame memory feed causes the [PROC KEY] button to light amber. PROC KEY (processed key): When this button is on, the key fill/source signal subjected to key processing or signal subjected to a DME effect on the currently selected keyer can be selected as a reentry signal (PROC V or PROC K) for the M/E or PGM/PST bank, on the auxiliary bus or the like. 270 Names and Functions of Parts of the Control Panel l OVERRIDE button To select a DME channel already allocated to another keyer or transition to the currently selected keyer (or transition), hold down this button, and press the DME channel selection button. m TRACE button When a DME channel is already allocated to another keyer or transition, hold down this button, and press the corresponding DME channel selection button, to switch to the state in which the keyer (or transition) to which the DME channel is allocated is currently selected. n AUTO DELEG (auto delegation) button When this button is on, the key delegation selection state of the key control block is linked to the key delegation selection state of the independent key transition control block. o RESIZER button Enables or disables resizer on the MVS8000G. For details on resizer, see page 419. Device Control Block (Trackball) DME, for wipe pattern position setting, and for VTR/disk recorder/frame memory clip operation. The description below of frame memory clip operations applies only to the MVS8000A/8000G. The device control block is used for threedimensional transform operations using a 5 MENU button 1 Region selection buttons 3 Trackball M/E2 M/E3 P/P DME1 DME2 DME3 DME4 DME5 DME6 DME7 DME8 RUN CTRL MENU LOCAL K1 CB1 GLB K2 CB2 SRC K3 TRGT K4 AXIS LOC MAIN ASP PERS SUB LOC SIZE ASP LOC XYZ LOC ROT POS RSZR SHIFT CLR WORK BUFR X Y Z USER DEV RSZR CTRL CTR 2 Operating buttons a Region selection buttons The operation mode allocated to the device control block depends on the selection state of the region selection buttons. When the [M/E 1], [M/E 2], [M/E 3], and [P/P] buttons are selected: This enables the wipe pattern position setting (positioner) operation mode in the device control block. You can select multiple buttons simultaneously. When the [USER] button is selected: This enables pattern position setting used for color backgrounds. Chapter 2 Menus and Control Panel M/E1 4 Z-ring When the [DME 1] to [DME 8] buttons are selected: This enables the threedimensional transform operation mode in the device control block. Press a button, turning it on, to select a DME channel. You can select multiple buttons simultaneously. The number of valid buttons depends on the number of DME processor channels installed. When the [DEV] button is selected: This enables the VTR/disk recorder/frame memory operation mode in the device Names and Functions of Parts of the Control Panel 271 Chapter 2 Menus and Control Panel control block. In this state, the [M/E 1] to [M/E 3] buttons, [P/P] button and [DME1] to [DME8] buttons function as the device 1 to device 12 allocation buttons as follows. [M/E1] (DEV1): device 1 [M/E2] (DEV2): device 2 [M/E3] (DEV3): device 3 [P/P] (DEV4): device 4 [USER] (FM1CLIP): frame memory clip 1 [Unused] (FM2CLIP): frame memory clip 2 [DME1] (DEV5): device 5 [DME2] (DEV6): device 6 [DME3] (DEV7): device 7 [DME4] (DEV8): device 8 [Unused] (FM LOOP): frame memory loop [DME5] (DEV9): device 9 [DME6] (DEV10): device 10 [DME7] (DEV11): device 11 [DME8] (DEV12): device 12 To exit from this mode, press the [DEV] button again, turning it off. When the [RUN CTRL] button is selected: This enables the effect run control mode in the device control block. When the [RSZR CTRL] button is selected: This enables the resizer control mode in the device control block of the MVS-8000G. For details on resizer, see page 419. The functions of the operation buttons, trackball, and Z-ring vary with the operation mode as follows. b Operation buttons When the positioner operation mode is enabled K1 CB1: Press this button to enable wipe pattern position setting for key 1 272 Names and Functions of Parts of the Control Panel (DSK1). When the [USER] button is selected, pattern position setting for color background 1 is enabled. K2 CB2: Press this button to enable wipe pattern position setting for key 2 (DSK2). K3: Press this button to enable wipe pattern position setting for key 3 (DSK3). K4: Press this button to enable wipe pattern position setting for key 4 (DSK4). MAIN: Press this button to enable main wipe pattern position setting for normal transitions. SUB: Press this button to enable sub wipe pattern position setting for normal transitions. Among the [K1 CB1] button, [K2 CB2] button, [K3] button, [K4] button, [MAIN] button, and [SUB] button, you can select multiple buttons. POS: Press this button to enable pattern movement in the x-axis and y-axis directions with the trackball. When the [USER] button is selected, this enables the trackball to move the pattern in the x-axis and y-axis directions, and the Z-ring to adjust the size of the pattern. X, Y: These restrict the axes affected by the trackball and Z-ring to the x- or y-axis. Z: This restricts the axes affected by the trackball and Z-ring to the z-axis. CTR (center): When this button is pressed, the pattern position returns to the center. When the [USER] button is selected, the pattern size also returns to 50.00. SHIFT/CLR WORK BUFR: Press this button twice in rapid succession to reset all parameters on the target M/E or PGM/PST to their initial values. When the three-dimensional transform operation mode is enabled LOCAL: Enable operations in the DME local coordinate space. GLB (global): Enable operations in the DME global coordinate space. The [LOCAL] and [GLB] buttons can be selected at the same time. Chapter 2 Menus and Control Panel SRC (source): Enable operations in the DME source coordinate space. TRGT (target): Enable operations in the DME target coordinate space. The [SRC] and [TRGT] buttons cannot be selected at the same time. When these buttons are held down, trackball and Z-ring operation is switched to a finer control. (fine mode) AXIS LOC (location): When this button is lit, the trackball moves the rotational axis of the image in the x-axis and yaxis directions, and the Z-ring moves the axis in the z-axis direction. ASP PERS (aspect/perspective): When the [SRC] button is lit, pressing this button enables the trackball to control the x-axis and y-axis directions independently, and the Z-ring controls the x-axis and y-axis directions together, to vary the aspect ratio. When the [SHIFT] button is held down and this button is pressed, the trackball controls the skew of the image in the xaxis and y-axis directions. When the [TRGT] button is lit, pressing this button enables the trackball to control the perspective of the image in the x-axis and y-axis directions. The Z-ring controls the distance to the viewpoint. LOC (location) SIZE: When this button is lit, the Z-ring controls the image size. The trackball moves the image in the xaxis and y-axis directions. LOC (location) XYZ: When this button is lit, the trackball moves the image in the x-axis and y-axis directions, and the Zring moves the image in the z-axis direction. SHIFT: While holding down this button, pressing the [ASP PERS] button or [ROT] button switches to the shifted version of the corresponding function. CLR WORK BUFR (clear work buffer): Press this button once to clear only the three-dimensional transform parameters of the information held in the work buffer. Press twice in rapid succession to clear all of the parameters, and return to the default state. ROT (rotation): When this button is lit, the trackball rotates the image about the xand y-axes, and the Z-ring rotates the image about the z-axis. Pressing this while holding down the [SHIFT] button enables rotation of the image in the “Spin” mode. The trackball and Z-ring operate in the same manner. X, Y, Z: These restrict which axes the trackball and Z-ring can control. You can select more than one. When one of these buttons is selected, you can enter the parameter value for the corresponding axis using the numeric keypad control block. CTR (center): Pressing this button changes the values of the threedimensional parameters currently controlled by the trackball and Z-ring to the closest detent values. Pressing twice in rapid succession returns the parameter values to their defaults. When the VTR/disk recorder/frame memory operation mode is enabled Names and Functions of Parts of the Control Panel 273 Chapter 2 Menus and Control Panel LOCAL (DELAY): Press this button, turning it on, to enter a delay value from the numeric keypad control block. GLB (STB OFF: standby off): Press this button to switch to standby off mode. This button cannot be used for frame memory clip operations. SRC (REC: record): Press this button at the same time as the [Y] button to start recording. This button cannot be used for frame memory clip operations. TRGT (STOP): Press this button to stop the tape, disk or frame memory clip. AXIS LOC (START TC: start timecode): Press this button to set the timecode of the start point at that time. The timecode of the start point is updated to the current time each time this button is pressed. When the device the operation applies to is a VTR/disk recorder, the start point updated by the setting of the [MENU] button is as follows. When the [MENU] button is On: start point of the timeline When the [MENU] button is Off: start point of Cueup & Play ASP PERS (STOP TC: stop timecode): Press this button to set the timecode of the stop point at that time. The timecode of the stop point is updated to the current time each time this button is pressed. When the device the operation applies to is a VTR/disk recorder, the stop point updated by the setting of the [MENU] button is as follows. When the [MENU] button is On: stop point of the timeline When the [MENU] button is Off: stop point of Cueup & Play LOC SIZE (VAR: variable speed playback): Pressing this button and turning the Z-ring plays back the tape, disk or frame memory clip at a variable 274 Names and Functions of Parts of the Control Panel speed and direction proportional to the rotation angle of the Z-ring. The variable speed range is –1 to +3 times normal playback speed. LOC XYZ (SHTL: shuttle): Pressing this button and turning the Z-ring plays back the tape, disk or frame memory clip at a speed and direction proportional to the rotation angle of the Z-ring. ROT (JOG): Pressing this button and turning the Z-ring plays back the tape, disk or frame memory clip at a speed and direction proportional to the rotation of the Z-ring. CLR WORK BUFR (CUE): Pressing this button cues the tape, disk or frame memory clip automatically to the start point. X (REW: rewind): Press this button to rewind the tape, disk or frame memory clip. Y (PLAY): Press this button to play the tape, disk or frame memory clip. Z (FF): Press this button to fast forward the tape, disk or frame memory clip. CTR (ALL STOP): Press this button to stop all tape transport/disk drive/frame memory operations. When the resizer control mode is enabled (for the MVS-8000G only) LOCAL (K1): Select key 1. GLB (K2): Select key 2. SRC (K3): Select key 3. TRGT (K4): Select key 4. LOC SIZE (ASP: aspect): Pressing this button and operating the trackball or Zring changes the aspect ratio of a key to which the resizer function is applied to. When this button is held down, the trackball or Z-ring operation is switched to a finer control. (fine mode) LOC XYZ (LOC: location): Pressing this button and operating the trackball or Z- c Trackball When the positioner operation mode is enabled By moving this, you can move the pattern in the x-axis and y-axis directions. When the three-dimensional transform operation mode is enabled Move the trackball to control the x- and yaxes in a three-dimensional transform. When the [SRC] or [TRGT] button is held down, the trackball operation is switched to a finer control. (fine mode) When the resizer control mode is enabled (for the MVS-8000G only) By turning the trackball, you can move in the x- and y-directions of the key to which the resizer is applied, and change the aspect ratio. When the [LOC SIZE] or [LOC XYZ] button is held down, the trackball operation is switched to a finer control. (fine mode) d Z-ring When the positioner operation mode is enabled When the [USER] button is selected, by turning the ring you can adjust the size of the pattern. When the three-dimensional transform operation mode is enabled Turn this ring to control the z-axis in a three-dimensional transform. When the [SRC] or [TRGT] button is held down, the Z-ring operation is switched to a finer control. (fine mode) Chapter 2 Menus and Control Panel ring moves, shrinks, or magnifies a key to which the resizer function is applied to. When this button is held down, the trackball or Z-ring operation is switched to a finer control. (fine mode) ROT (RSZE: resizer): Press this button, turning it on, to enable the resizer. CLR WORK BUFR (CLR WORK BUFR): Pressing this button once returns the two-dimensional transformation settings to the defaults. Pressing twice in rapid succession returns all resizer parameter values to the defaults. X, Y: These restrict the axes affected by the trackball and Z-ring to the x- or y-axis. Z: This restricts the axes affected by the trackball and Z-ring to the z-axis. CTR (center): Pressing this button once changes the two-dimensional transformation settings to the closest detent values. Pressing twice in rapid succession returns the two-dimensional transformation settings to the defaults. When the effect run control mode is enabled By turning the Z-ring, you can run the keyframe effect, independent of the STOP NEXT KF, EFF LOOP, and similar settings in the keyframe control block. Turn clockwise to run the effect in the normal direction, and counterclockwise for the reverse direction. When the resizer control mode is enabled (for the MVS-8000G only) By turning the ring, you can zoom the key to which the resizer is applied, and change the aspect ratio. When the [LOC SIZE] or [LOC XYZ] button is held down, the Z-ring operation is switched to a finer control. (fine mode) When the VTR/disk recorder/frame memory operation mode is enabled Turning the Z-ring controls the tape transport/disk drive/frame memory clip operations, at a speed determined by the operating buttons. Turn clockwise for the normal direction, and counterclockwise for the reverse direction. Names and Functions of Parts of the Control Panel 275 e MENU button Press this button, turning it on, to enable adjusting the parameters allocated to the knobs in the menu using the trackball and Z-ring. In the case of the DME menu, the operation applies to the selected DME channel. In VTR/disk recorder/frame memory operation mode, press this button, setting it to On. This makes it possible to carry out timeline start/stop point setting operation for the device selected with the device selection buttons. Chapter 2 Menus and Control Panel 276 Names and Functions of Parts of the Control Panel Device Control Block (Joystick) The description below of frame memory clip operations applies only to the MVS8000A/8000G. of the trackball type, except that the trackball and Z-ring operations are carried out with the joystick. All functions of the joystick type device control block are equivalent to the functions MENU button Region selection buttons 1 Joystick M/E2 M/E3 P/P DME1 DME2 DME3 DME4 DME5 DME6 DME7 DME8 RUN CTRL MENU LOCAL K1 CB1 GLB K2 CB2 SRC K3 TRGT K4 AXIS LOC MAIN ASP PERS SUB LOC SIZE ASP LOC XYZ LOC ROT POS RSZR SHIFT CLR WORK BUFR X Y Z USER Chapter 2 Menus and Control Panel M/E1 DEV RSZR CTRL CTR Operating buttons a Joystick When the positioner operation mode is enabled By moving this, you can move the pattern in the x-axis and y-axis directions. When the three-dimensional transform operation mode is enabled By moving this, you can carry out operations in the x-, y-, and z-axes. When the following buttons are held down, the joystick operation is switched to a finer control. (fine mode) • The button on the end of the joystick • [SRC] button • [TRGT] button Depending on the settings made in the Setup menu, the operation speed multiple can be changed. When the effect run control mode is enabled By moving the joystick sideways, you can run the keyframe effect, independent of the STOP NEXT KF, EFF LOOP, and similar settings in the keyframe control block. Names and Functions of Parts of the Control Panel 277 Move to the right to run the effect in the normal direction, and to the left for the reverse direction. When the VTR/disk recorder/frame memory operation mode is enabled Moving the joystick sideways controls the tape transport/disk drive/frame memory clip operation, at a speed determined by the operating buttons. When the resizer control mode is enabled (for the MVS-8000G only) Move for operations in the x-, y-, and zaxes. Hold down the button on the tip of the joystick to switch the joystick operation to a finer control. (fine mode). Move to the right for the normal direction, and to the left for the reverse direction. Device Control Block (Search Dial) Chapter 2 Menus and Control Panel The description below of frame memory clip operations applies only to the MVS8000A/8000G. Using the device control block (search dial), you can directly operate an XDCAM, disk recorder, VTR, other external device, frame memory clip, or shot box. The device control block (trackball) and device control block (joystick) can be used together. 4 DELAY button 7 TIMELINE button 2 Device selection buttons 8 STOP button 6 External device operation buttons 1 Timecode display CURRENT TIME LINE SHTL JOG VAR ENBL START TC STOP STOP TC DEV 1 DEV 2 DEV 3 DEV 4 DEV 5 DEV 6 DELAY FM1 CLIP FM2 CLIP SBOX 1 SBOX 2 SBOX 3 START TC STOP TC SET START TC SET STOP TC SET DUR STB OFF CUE REW PLAY FF ALL STOP REC 5 Editing buttons 278 Names and Functions of Parts of the Control Panel 9 Search dial 3 SBOX buttons b Device selection buttons These buttons are used for selecting assigned external devices or frame memory clips. Each button can only be assigned to a single device. Carry out the assignment in the Setup menu (see “Overall Control Panel Settings (Config Menu)” in Chapter 16 (Volume 2)). To select an assigned device, press the corresponding button, which lights green. To select more than one device simultaneously, hold down the button for the first selection, while pressing the buttons for the other selections in turn. The second and subsequent selected buttons light amber. If you press another button without holding down the first selected button, the second button will be the reference device and light green. DEV: Assign external devices DEV1 to DEV12. FM CLIP: Assign frame memory clips FM1 to FM8. Device selection buttons can be set as SBOX buttons or DELAY button in the Setup menu. c SBOX (shotbox) buttons Assign a shotbox saved in registers 1 to 99. When you press a button, the assigned shotbox is selected, and executed. Carry out the assignment in the Setup menu (see “Overall Control Panel Settings (Config Menu)” in Chapter 16 (Volume 2)). SBOX buttons can be set as device selection buttons or DELAY button in the Setup menu. Chapter 2 Menus and Control Panel a Timecode display This shows the current time (CURRENT) and the start and stop point timecode values for the current reference device (START TC, STOP TC). When you press a device selection button, the button lights, selecting the assigned device as the reference device, and displaying its setting value. In the case of the [SBOX] buttons, the display does not change. When the operation applies to a VTR/disk recorder, the displayed setting value depends on whether the [TIMELINE] button is on or off, as follows. When the [TIMELINE] button is on: Displays the start and stop points of the last set keyframe on the timeline. When the keyframe number is changed and the last register and keyframe change, the display also changes. (timeline setting mode) When the [TIMELINE] button is off: Displays the Cueup & Play (rewind action) start and stop points. d DELAY button When pressed, this button lights green, the numeric keypad control block display changes to DELAY__ : , and you can set the start delay time for the selected device. The setting range is from 00:00 to 59:29 (depends on the video format). This button goes off when another timecode setting button ([START TC], [STOP TC], [SET START TC], [SET STOP TC], or [SET DUR]) is pressed. Carry out the assignment in the Setup menu (see “Overall Control Panel Settings (Config Menu)” in Chapter 16 (Volume 2)). The DELAY button can be set as a device selection button or an SBOX button in the Setup menu. e Editing buttons These buttons set start and stop points. These operations are only valid while a device is selected with the device selection buttons. START TC: Press this button to set the timecode of the start point at that time. The timecode of the start point is updated to the current time each time this button is pressed. When the device the operation applies Names and Functions of Parts of the Control Panel 279 Chapter 2 Menus and Control Panel to is a VTR/disk recorder, the start point updated by the setting of the [TIMELINE] button is as follows. When the [TIMELINE] button is On: start point of the timeline When the [TIMELINE] button is Off: start point of Cueup & Play STOP TC: Press this button to set the timecode of the stop point at that time. The timecode of the stop point is updated to the current time each time this button is pressed. When the device the operation applies to is a VTR/disk recorder, the stop point updated by the setting of the [TIMELINE] button is as follows. When the [TIMELINE] button is On: stop point of the timeline When the [TIMELINE] button is Off: stop point of Cueup & Play SET START TC, SET STOP TC, SET DUR: When pressed, these buttons light green, “START TC”, “STOP TC” or “DUR” appears in the numeric keypad control block display, and you can enter a timecode from the numeric keypad. If you enter a numeric value and press the [ENTER] button, the button goes off, whereas if you press the [ENTER] button without entering a numeric value the numeric keypad control block display shows “--:--:--:--”. To exit the numeric value entry mode, either repeat pressing the same button, or press a different numeric keypad control block linked button, or a mode selection button such as the [EFF] and [SNAPSHOT] buttons in the numeric keypad control block. If the timecode has been set correctly, the entered numeric value appears in the timecode display. STB (standby) OFF: When pressed, this button flashes amber, and the device selected with the device selection 280 Names and Functions of Parts of the Control Panel buttons exits from the standby mode. This button cannot be used for frame memory clip operations. CUE: When pressed, this button flashes amber together with the [ALL STOP] button, and the device selected with the device selection button is cued up to the start point of the material. When more than one device is selected, the amber flashing continues until the reference device is cued up, and when the cueing up is finished, this button lights green. REW: When pressed, this button lights amber, and material of the device selected with the device selection buttons is rewound. To stop during the rewind, press the [STOP] button or [ALL STOP] button. PLAY: When pressed, this button lights amber, and the device selected with the device selection buttons plays. The playback stops not only if the [STOP] button is pressed, but also if any of the [STB OFF], [SHTL], [JOG], [CUE], [REW], [PLAY], [FF], and [ALL STOP] buttons is pressed. When the [VAR] button is pressed while the device is playing back, the device plays at one times normal speed in variable mode. FF: When pressed, this button lights amber, and the material of the device selected with the device selection buttons is fast forwarded. To stop during the fastforward, press the [STOP] button or [ALL STOP] button. ALL STOP: When pressed, all device material playback and other operations stop. During cueing up of any of the devices, this button flashes amber, and when all cueing up operations are completed, it lights green. REC: When pressed simultaneously with the [PLAY] button, this button lights red (the [PLAY] button lights amber), and the image from the selected device is recorded. This button cannot be used for frame memory clip operations. f External device operation buttons ENBL (enable): When this is pressed, turning it on, the search dial [VAR], [JOG], and [SHTL] button operations are enabled. VAR (variable): Sets the search dial to variable mode. JOG: Sets the search dial to jog mode. SHTL (shuttle): Sets the search dial to shuttle mode. g TIMELINE button Press to switch the device selected with the device selection buttons to timeline setting mode. h STOP button When pressed, this lights amber, and operation of the device selected with the device selection buttons stops. i Search dial Use this for search and other operations on the material of an external device. For details of the method of use, see “Controlling Tape/Disk Transport” in Chapter 12 (Volume 2). Chapter 2 Menus and Control Panel Keyframe Control Block In the keyframe control block, you can carry out effect editing and execution. Names and Functions of Parts of the Control Panel 281 1 EDIT ENBL button 4 Duration setting buttons 8 Effect execution direction selection buttons 0 EFF LOOP button qa AUTO INS button 5 KF LOOP button 6 PAUSE button 9 STOP NEXT KF button EFF LOOP STOP NEXT KF EDIT ENBL NORM REV KF DUR EFF DUR NORM /REV FF DELAY CONST DUR AUTO INS Chapter 2 Menus and Control Panel COPY PASTE DEL MOD KF LOOP PAUSE GO TO TC GO TO KF ALL FROM TO PREV KF NEXT KF RE WIND SHIFT RUN 7 Effect execution section a EDIT ENBL (edit enable) button Press this button, turning it on, to enable effect editing operations with the keyframe control block. When macro editing is carried out, this button lights red. b Edit point specification buttons GO TO TC (Go to timecode): Press this button, turning it on, to enter a numeric value from the numeric keypad control block, and move the edit point to the specified timecode position. GO TO KF (Go to keyframe): Press this button, turning it on, to enter a numeric value from the numeric keypad control block, and move the edit point to the specified keyframe. 282 Names and Functions of Parts of the Control Panel INS UNDO 2 Edit point specification 3 Editing buttons buttons During macro editing, pressing this button moves the edit point to the event number specified by numeric entry with the numeric keypad control block. PREV KF (previous keyframe): When this button is pressed, the edit point moves to the keyframe immediately before the current time (the position where the effect is currently stopped). During macro editing, pressing this button moves the edit point to the event immediately before the current event. NEXT KF (next keyframe): When this button is pressed, the edit point moves to the keyframe immediately after the current time. During macro editing, pressing this button moves the edit point to the event immediately after the current event. Chapter 2 Menus and Control Panel c Editing buttons ALL: Press this button, turning it on, to select all keyframes (during macro editing, all events) in the effect. FROM TO: Press this button, turning it on, to enter numeric values from the numeric keypad control block, and select a specified range of keyframes (during macro editing, the specified range of events). INS (insert): When this button is pressed, a new keyframe is inserted after the current keyframe. Pressing this button while holding down the [SHIFT] button inserts a new keyframe before the current keyframe. During macro editing, pressing this button registers an event after the current event. MOD (modify): When this button is pressed, the selected keyframe is modified with the values of the current keyframe. When the edit point is between two keyframes, the immediately preceding keyframe is modified. You can also select multiple keyframes, and modify them in a single operation. At this time, pressing this button while holding down the [SHIFT] button modifies all selected keyframes with the changed values taken as relative values. During macro editing, pressing this button amends the selected event. DEL (delete): When this button is pressed, the selected keyframe is deleted. When the edit point is between two keyframes, the immediately preceding keyframe is deleted. During macro editing, pressing this button deletes the selected event. You can also select multiple keyframes or macro events, and delete them in a single operation. COPY: When this button is pressed, the selected keyframe (during macro editing, macro event) is copied. You can also select multiple keyframes or macro events, and copy them in a single operation. PASTE: When this button is pressed, the deleted or copied keyframe (during macro editing, macro event) is inserted after the current keyframe (during macro editing, macro event). Pressing this button while holding down the [SHIFT] button inserts the deleted or copied keyframe (during macro editing, macro event) before the current keyframe (during macro editing, macro event). SHIFT: Hold down this button, and press the [INS] button, [MOD] button, or [PASTE] button, to obtain the shifted function for the button. UNDO: When this button is pressed, the last executed keyframe (during macro editing, macro event) insertion, modification, or deletion, or paste operation is canceled. d Duration setting buttons KF DUR (keyframe duration): Press this button, turning it on, to set the keyframe duration of the selected keyframe, by numeric value entry from the numeric keypad control block. EFF DUR (effect duration): Press this button, turning it on, to set the effect duration from the numeric keypad control block. DELAY: Press this button, turning it on, to enter a delay value from the numeric keypad control block. CONST DUR (constant duration): Select the duration mode. When this is lit, the mode is constant duration mode, and when off, variable duration mode. Names and Functions of Parts of the Control Panel 283 e KF LOOP (keyframe loop) button Press this button, turning it on, to execute the effect the specified number of times through the keyframes in the specified range. f PAUSE button When this button is pressed, a pause is applied to the selected keyframe. When editing a macro, press this button, turning it on, to include a pause event in the macro. The pause length can be set in the numeric keypad control block. Chapter 2 Menus and Control Panel g Effect execution section RUN: When this button is pressed, the effect is run from the first keyframe to the last keyframe. However, if a pause is set on a keyframe, the effect stops at that point. Press this button again to resume execution, and continue to the next pause point or the end of the effect. Effect indicator: This comprises multiple LEDs, which show the progress of the effect. Fader lever: Moving this up or down manually runs the effect. REWIND: When this button is pressed, the currently recalled effect is rewound to the first keyframe. FF (fast forward): When this button is pressed, the currently recalled effect is advanced to the last keyframe. h Effect execution direction selection buttons NORM (normal): When this button is lit, effect execution runs from the first keyframe to the last keyframe. REV (reverse): When this button is lit, effect execution runs from the last keyframe to the first keyframe. Pressing one of these buttons automatically turns the other off. NORM/REV (normal/reverse): Press this button, turning it on, to reverse the direction of the effect when it reaches the last keyframe or first keyframe. i STOP NEXT KF (stop next keyframe) button When this button is pressed, turning it on, the effect execution range is from the current time to the next keyframe. j EFF LOOP (effect loop) button When the effect reaches the last keyframe with this button on, it returns to the first keyframe and repeats. k AUTO INS (auto insert) button When editing a macro, press this button, turning it on, to enable the auto insert function, so that every control panel operation you carry out is added to the macro as an event. Numeric Keypad Control Block The numeric keypad control block is used for region selection, for saving and recalling snapshots, effects and shotboxes, for entering numeric values for trackball operation and keyframe operation, and for transition rate entry. 284 Names and Functions of Parts of the Control Panel 1 Mode selection buttons EFF SNAP SHOT MASTR SHOT BOX ALL MCRO TRANS RATE UNDO P-BUS GP1 STORE STATS 5 Display +/- 7 M/E 1 M/E 2 M/E 3 P/P USER 1 USER 2 USER 3 USER 4 RTR DME 1 DME 2 DME 3 DME 4 DEV 1 DME 5 DME 6 DME 7 DME 8 DEV 2 8 9 EFF DISS TC 4 5 CLR AUTO 6 TRANS TRIM STORE RCALL 1 0 2 3 GPI ENBL ENTER Chapter 2 Menus and Control Panel 4 Numeric keypad 3 Function selection buttons 2 Region selection buttons a Mode selection buttons EFF (effect): Press to save or recall an effect. SNAPSHOT: Press to save or recall a snapshot. SHOTBOX: Press to save or recall a shotbox. MCRO (macro): Press to save, recall or edit a macro. TRANS RATE (transition rate): Press to set the transition rate. Hold down this button, and press one of the key delegation buttons [KEY1] to [KEY4] in the transition control block to set an independent key transition rate. b Region selection buttons These select the functional block (“region”) of the control panel to which operations apply. You can select more than one region at the same time. The first button you press is taken as the reference region, and lights green, while the next pressed button lights amber. With the exception of the [MASTER] and [ALL] buttons, you can change the region assignment to the buttons as desired in the Setup menu. MASTR: Press this, turning it on, to save region information in a master snapshot register or master timeline register, or to recall such region information. Names and Functions of Parts of the Control Panel 285 ALL: Select all regions. When any region is already selected, pressing this button makes all regions unselected. M/E 1 to M/E 3, P/P: Select the corresponding regions, M/E-1, M/E-2, M/E-3, and PGM/PST. USER 1 to USER 8: Select a User region. DME1 to DME8: Select a DME channel. P-Bus: Select the P-Bus region. GPI: Select the GPI region. RTR:Select the router region. DEV1 to DEV12: Select the Device 1 to Device 12 regions respectively. MCRO: Select the macro region. Chapter 2 Menus and Control Panel c Function selection buttons UNDO: After recalling a register, press this button to return to the state before recalling the register. STORE STATS (store status): This lights amber when data is stored in a register. After saving data to a register, hold down this button and press the [UNDO] button to return the register to the state before the data was saved. TC (timecode): Press this button, turning it on, to switch transition rate entry to the timecode entry mode. STORE: Press this button to switch to the mode for saving a snapshot, effect, shotbox or macro in a register. RCALL (recall): Press this button to switch to the mode for recalling a snapshot, effect, shotbox or macro from a register. [STORE] button or [RCALL] button flashes amber when one or more of the regions assigned to the Region selection buttons are not selected by the Region Select menu. d Numeric keypad In addition to the buttons for numeric input, this includes buttons for adding attributes to snapshots. 0 to 9: Used to input numeric digits. 286 Names and Functions of Parts of the Control Panel . (period): Enters the decimal point. When the [TRANS RATE] button is lit, enters “00.” When the [EFF] button, [SNAPSHOT] button or [SHOTBOX] button is lit, this is used to find an empty register. +/–/ EFF DISS (effect dissolve): Invert the sign, negative or positive. When the [SNAPSHOT] button is lit, applies the effect dissolve attribute to a snapshot. CLR/AUTO TRANS (clear/auto transition): Clear an input value, returning to the previous state. When the [SNAPSHOT] button is lit, applies the auto transition attribute to a snapshot. TRIM/GPI ENBL (enable): After entering a difference value to be added to an existing setting, press this button to confirm the change. ENTER: Confirm an entered value. e Display This shows the selected region name and entered numeric values. Fade to Black Control Block 3 AUTO button 1 FTB button 2 Preview selection buttons FTB AUTO PST P/P M/E 1 M/E 2 M/E 3 M/E IK M/E 2K M/E 3K P/P K DME V DME K b Preview selection buttons Press one of these buttons to select a signal on the edit preview bus. Each button can be assigned to any preview output in setup (see Chapter 16 “Overall Control Panel Settings (Config Menu)” (Volume 2)). PST (preset): When this button is pressed, the signal selected on the background B row of the PGM/PST bank is selected on the edit preview bus. M/E 1 to M/E 3, P/P (M/E1 to M/E 3, P/P preview): The preview signal (M/E-1 PVW, M/E-2 PVW, M/E-3 PVW, P/P PVW) of the M/E or PGM/PST bank corresponding to the pressed button is selected on the edit preview bus. M/E1 K to M/E3 K, P/P K (M/E1 to M/E 3, P/P key preview): The key preview Chapter 2 Menus and Control Panel a FTB (fade to black) button Press this button to fade to black the program output of the PGM/PST bank, at the set transition rate. You can set the fade to black transition rate in the menu. signal (M/E-1 K-PVW, M/E-2 KPVW, M/E-3 K-PVW, P/P K-PVW) of the M/E or PGM/PST bank corresponding to the pressed button is selected on the edit preview bus. DME V (DME monitor video): When this button is pressed, the DME monitor output video signal (DME MON V) is selected on the edit preview bus. DME K (DME monitor key): When this button is pressed, the DME monitor output key signal (DME MON K) is selected on the edit preview bus. c AUTO button When this button is pressed, the M/E or PGM/PST bank preview signal selected on the edit preview bus is automatically switched to the program signal depending on the on-air status. Names and Functions of Parts of the Control Panel 287 Auxiliary Bus Control Block (for AUX Buses) There are also models without the selected source name displays and source name displays shown in the following figure. All operations except those of the [DEST] button and [SHIFT] button are the same as for a model with selected source name displays and source name displays. 7 KEY button 8 2ND button 1 AUX delegation buttons qa RTR button 2 Selected source name displays 3 DEST button qs Level selection buttons Chapter 2 Menus and Control Panel LEVEL 1 DME 3K 2nd DME 4V DME 4K FMS 1 FMS 2 EDIT PVW LEVEL 2 LEVEL 3 LEVEL 4 RTR DEST 2ND SHIFT KEY SHIFT M/E 1 M/E 2 M/E 3 PGM XPT HOLD SHIFT M/E 1 M/E 2 M/E 3 PGM XPT HOLD 5 Cross-point buttons 1st 9 Source name displays 0 SHIFT button 6 XPT HOLD buttons 4 Selected bus display a AUX delegation buttons Press one of these buttons, turning it on, to select the bus to which to assign the cross- 288 Names and Functions of Parts of the Control Panel point buttons in the auxiliary bus control block. The buses that can be selected are as follows. • AUX buses 1 to 48 • MONITOR 1 to MONITOR 8 buses • FMS 1 (frame memory source 1) and FMS 2 buses • DME 1V to DME 8V buses • DME 1K to DME 8K buses • EDIT PVW (preview) bus • M/E-1 UTILITY 1 and M/E-1 UTILITY 2 buses • M/E-2 UTILITY 1 and M/E-2 UTILITY 2 buses • M/E-3 UTILITY 1 and M/E-3 UTILITY 2 buses • P/P UTILITY 1 and P/P UTILITY 2 buses • DSK 1 fill to DSK 4 fill buses • DSK 1 source to DSK 4 source buses • M/E-1 Key 1 fill to Key 4 fill buses • M/E-2 Key 1 fill to Key 4 fill buses • M/E-3 key 1 fill to M/E-3 key 4 fill buses • M/E-1 Key 1 source to Key 4 source buses • M/E-2 Key 1 source to Key 4 source buses • M/E-3 key 1 source to M/E-3 key 4 source buses • M/E-1 external DME bus • M/E-2 external DME bus • M/E-3 external DME bus • P/P external DME bus • DME UTILITY1 and DME UTILITY2 buses • CCR (color corrector) 1 and 2 buses d Selected bus display This shows the name of the bus selected by the auxiliary bus delegation buttons. b Selected source name displays These show the name of the currently selected signal (source) on the bus corresponding to the delegation button. g KEY button While this button is held down, you can use the cross-point row of buttons to select key signals. c DEST (destination) button Press this button, turning it on, to display the names of buses allocated to the delegation buttons in the selection source name displays. In the case of a module without selected source name displays, this button is invalid. h 2ND button After selecting a bus with an AUX delegation button, hold down this button, and select another AUX delegation, thus allocating a different bus in the 2nd row from the 1st row. Chapter 2 Menus and Control Panel e Cross-point buttons The cross-points in the auxiliary bus control block are arranged in two rows: an upper row (1st row) and a lower row (2nd row), and are allocated to the buses selected with the AUX delegation buttons. The 1st row contains the cross-point buttons for unshifted buses, and the 2nd row contains the cross-point buttons for shifted buses. When the DME 1V/K to 8V/K buses are selected with the AUX delegation buttons, the 1st row cross-point buttons are for the currently showing side of DME, and the 2nd row are for the reverse side. By holding down the [2ND] button and making an AUX delegation selection, you can allocate the 2nd row to a different bus from the 1st row. In this case, if the 32nd button is set to be a [SHIFT] button (in a 32-button system), the cross-point buttons switch to the shifted allocation while the [SHIFT] button is enabled. f XPT HOLD (cross-point hold) buttons Press one of these buttons, turning it on, to enable cross-point hold. Names and Functions of Parts of the Control Panel 289 i Source name displays These show the names of the source signals which can be selected by the cross-point buttons. While the [SHIFT] button is enabled, the shifted signal name is displayed. If a different bus is allocated to the 2nd row, while the [2ND] button is held down, the 2nd row signal name is displayed. While the [KEY] button is held down, the source name of the key signal assigned to the cross-point buttons appears. Chapter 2 Menus and Control Panel j SHIFT button While this button is enabled, the shifted signal names appear in the source name display. Pressing this buttons toggles the source name display between the shifted signal names and unshifted signal names. In the case of a module without source name displays, this button is invalid. k RTR (router) button Press this button, turning it on, to assign the auxiliary bus control block to router control. For details of the names and functions of parts for router control, see the next section. l Level selection buttons Used when the auxiliary bus control block is carrying out router control. 290 Names and Functions of Parts of the Control Panel Auxiliary Bus Control Block (for Router Control) Press the [RTR] button, turning it on, to assign the auxiliary bus control block to router control. 7 KEY button 8 2ND button 1 Destination selection buttons qa RTR button 2 Selected source name displays 3 DEST button qs Level selection buttons DME 3K 2nd DME 4V DME 4K FMS 1 FMS 2 EDIT PVW LEVEL 2 LEVEL 3 LEVEL 4 Chapter 2 Menus and Control Panel LEVEL 1 RTR DEST 2ND SHIFT KEY SHIFT M/E 1 M/E 2 M/E 3 PGM XPT HOLD SHIFT M/E 1 M/E 2 M/E 3 PGM XPT HOLD 5 Source selection button rows 1st 9 Source name displays 0 SHIFT button 6 XPT HOLD buttons 4 Selected destination display a Destination selection buttons Press a button, turning it on, to select the destination to which the router source is assigned. The button pressed to assign a destination to a source selection button in the 1st row lights amber. When another button is pressed to assign a different destination to a source selection button in the 2nd row, it lights green. b Selected source name displays These show the source name selected for the destination. If the source names and destination names are set in the Setup menu to “SW’er Local” Names and Functions of Parts of the Control Panel 291 mode, then the description names appear here. c DEST (destination) button Press this button, turning it on, to display the names of the destinations assigned to the destination selection buttons in the selected source name displays. d Selected destination display This shows the name of the destination selected by the destination selection buttons. If a protected destination is selected, the indication “PROTECT” appears. Chapter 2 Menus and Control Panel e Source selection button rows The destination selected with a destination selection button is assigned to a source selection button. Press a source selection button to select a source. The 1st row of buttons are source selection buttons for the unshifted destinations, and the 2nd row are shifted source selection buttons. By holding down the [2ND] button, and selecting a destination, you can assign a different destination from the 1st row to the 2nd row. In the 1st row, the button to which a destination is assigned lights amber. If a different destination is assigned to a button in the 2nd row, the button lights green. When the 32nd button is set as a [SHIFT] button (in a 32-button system), while the [SHIFT] button is active, these switch to the shifted source selection buttons. By using the [KEY] button, you can expand the source selection as follows. Source [SHIFT] [KEY] Selection selection operation 292 1 to 31 Off Off Press the source selection button. 32 to 62 On Off Press the [SHIFT] button, then press the source selection button. Names and Functions of Parts of the Control Panel Source [SHIFT] [KEY] Selection selection operation 63 to 93 Off On Hold down the [KEY] button, and press the source selection button. 94 to 124 On On Hold down the [KEY] button, and press the [SHIFT] button, turning it on (the [SHIFT] button locks here, even when in Hold mode), then press the source selection button. f XPT HOLD (cross-point hold) buttons Not used in router control mode. g KEY button When this button is enabled by a setting in the Setup menu, by holding it down during a source selection you can expand the function of the [SHIFT] button. (See “Expanding the shift function” in Chapter 16 (Volume 2).) h 2ND button After selecting a destination with the destination selection buttons, hold down this button and make another destination selection to assign a different destination from the 1st row to the 2nd row. i Source name displays These display the names of signals (sources) that can be selected with the cross-point buttons. While the [SHIFT] button is active, the shifted signal names appear. While the [KEY] button is held down, the expanded signal names appear. When a different destination is assigned to the 2nd row, the 2nd row signal names appear only while the [2ND] button is held down. j SHIFT button While this button is active, the source name displays show the shifted signal names. Press this button to toggle between the shifted and unshifted states. k RTR (router) button Press this button, turning it on, to assign the auxiliary bus control block to router control. Chapter 2 Menus and Control Panel l Level selection buttons To each of the four buttons, plural S-Bus levels are assigned in the Setup menu. Press a button, turning it on, to make operations apply to those S-Bus levels. Names and Functions of Parts of the Control Panel 293 Menu Control Block 1 Top menu selection buttons HOME M/E 1 M/E 2 M/E 3 SUB MENU SITE FRAME MEM COLOR BKGD AUX /MON COPY SWAP MISC DME GLB EFF RTR DEV KEY FRAME EFF SNAP SHOT P/P MCRO SHOT BOX FILE USER SETUP ENG SETUP DIAG PREFS 1 PREFS 2 PREFS 3 PREFS 4 PREFS 5 PREFS 6 PREFS 7 PREFS 8 4 User preference buttons Chapter 2 Menus and Control Panel a Top menu selection buttons These select the menu appearing in the menu display. It is also possible to change the assignment of these buttons in setup. For details, see “Overall Control Panel Settings (Config Menu)” in Chapter 16 (Volume 2). HOME M/E 1 M/E 2 M/E 3 P/P SUB MENU SITE FRAME MEM COLOR BKGD AUX /MON CCR COPY SWAP MISC STATS DME GLB EFF RTR DEV MCRO KEY FRAME EFF SNAP SHOT SHOT BOX FILE USER SETUP ENG SETUP DIAG b Menu display This shows the menu currently in use. 294 2 Menu display Names and Functions of Parts of the Control Panel 3 Knobs c Knobs These adjust the parameter values appearing in the menu. d User preference buttons These recall the functions or menus assigned to them in the Setup menu. In the default setup, nothing is assigned to the [PREFS 1] to [PREFS 7] buttons. It is also possible to change the assignment of these buttons in setup. For details, see “Overall Control Panel Settings (Config Menu)” in Chapter 16 (Volume 2). PREFS 8 button: When this button is on, control of an editor from the Remote1 port on the rear panel of the switcher is possible. However, even when it is off, control of the Edit PVW bus is always possible. Memory Card/USB Adaptor Block 1 Memory card slot 2 DEVICE connectors Chapter 2 Menus and Control Panel a Memory card slot This slot accepts a PCMCIA Type II compliant memory card. You can use it in software installation, and for saving and reading in data, such as snapshot, keyframe, effect, and setup data. b DEVICE connectors There are three USB connectors. You can connect a device such as a mouse, keyboard, pen tablet, and so on, that is equipped with a USB interface to any of these connectors. For details on the devices that can be connected, consult your Sony representative. Names and Functions of Parts of the Control Panel 295 “Memory Stick”/USB Connections Block 1 “Memory Stick” status indicator 2 “Memory Stick” slot Chapter 2 Menus and Control Panel 3 DEVICE connectors a “Memory Stick” status indicator Lights in red during access to a “Memory Stick.” Note Do not power the unit off or remove a “Memory Stick” when the “Memory Stick” status indicator is lit. b “Memory Stick” slot Insert “Memory Sticks.” You can use it in software installation, and for saving and reading data, such as snapshot, keyframe, effect, and setup data. See the next item, “Memory Sticks” for more information about the usable “Memory Sticks” and their handling. 296 Names and Functions of Parts of the Control Panel c DEVICE connectors There are three USB connectors. You can connect a device such as a mouse, keyboard, pen tablet, and so on, that is equipped with a USB interface to any of these connectors. For details on the devices that can be connected, consult your Sony representative. About “Memory Sticks” Usable “Memory Sticks” This unit has been confirmed to operate with those of the following “Memory Sticks” that have a capacity of 8 GB (gigabytes) or less. However, operation with all “Memory Sticks” is not guaranteed. • “Memory Stick” • “Memory Stick PRO” • “Memory Stick Duo” • “Memory Stick PRO Duo” Notes Chapter 2 Menus and Control Panel • When using a “Memory Stick PRO,” high-rate data transfer using parallel interface is not supported. • A “MagicGate Memory Stick” can also be used, but this system does not support the MagicGate function. • When using a “Memory Stick Duo,” be sure to use it with a “Memory Stick Duo Adaptor” (MSAC-M2 or equivalent). If you insert a “Memory Stick Duo” without using the adaptor, there is the possibility that the stick cannot be removed, resulting in a serious accident. Handling “Memory Sticks” When using “Memory Sticks,” pay attention to the following points. • Do not touch the connector of the “Memory Stick” with anything, including your finger or metallic objects. • Do not attach anything other than the supplied label to the “Memory Stick” labeling position. • Attach the label so that it does not stick out beyond the labeling position. • Carry and store the “Memory Stick” in its case. • Do not strike, bend, or drop the “Memory Stick.” • Do not disassemble or modify the “Memory Stick.” • Do not allow the “Memory Stick” to get wet. • Do not use or store the “Memory Stick” in a location that is: – Extremely hot, such as in a car parked in the sun – Under direct sunlight – Very humid or subject to corrosive substances Names and Functions of Parts of the Control Panel 297 Utility/Shotbox Control Block 1 Bank selection buttons Chapter 2 Menus and Control Panel BANK 1 1 2 3 4 5 6 BANK 2 7 8 9 10 11 12 BANK 3 13 14 15 16 17 18 BANK 4 19 20 21 22 23 24 2 Memory recall buttons a Bank selection buttons Press any of the [BANK1] to [BANK4] buttons to select a bank of 24 memory recall buttons. The selected button lights amber. b Memory recall buttons You can use these buttons to recall frequently used menus, utility functions, shotbox registers, or macro registers that you have assigned. When a utility function is allocated to a button, the button lights orange (or green depending on the status), and the allocated function name appears. Pressing the button executes the allocated function. When the function constitutes a switching on/off operation, the button lights green; otherwise, it only momentarily lights green. When a shotbox register or macro register recall is assigned to a button, the button lights orange, and the assigned register name appears. (If the register is empty, the 298 Names and Functions of Parts of the Control Panel button goes off.) In the case of a shotbox function, pressing the button executes the assigned shotbox function, and the button lights yellow. In the case of a macro register, pressing the button executes the assigned macro, and the button flashes yellow. Transition Control Block and Flexi Pad Control Block (Simple Type) The simple versions of the transition control block and Flexi Pad control block shown in the following figure is designed to allow simplified operations than with the standard type. The transitions carried out using these simple-type control blocks are also referred to as “simple transitions” in this User’s guide. Chapter 2 Menus and Control Panel Names and Functions of Parts of the Control Panel 299 qa Numeric display 0 XPT HOLD status display 2 Key transition selection buttons 6 Key status display 1 Transition type selection buttons ON ON OVER OVER KEY1 KEY2 XPT HOLD A B U1 U2 1 2 3 4 MIX NAM Chapter 2 Menus and Control Panel NORM /REV LIMIT SET WIPE REV PTN LIMIT DME WIPE 1 2 DME 3 4 5 6 7 8 SNAP SHOT TAKE UNDO 3 Transition execution section 5 Pattern limit buttons 4 Wipe direction selection buttons 7 Mode selection buttons 9 UNDO button 8 Memory recall section Shown above is the right-hand type transition control block (with the right-hand fader lever). 300 Names and Functions of Parts of the Control Panel Transition Control Block and Flexi Pad Control Block (with INH button) qs INH button XPT HOLD LIMIT SET MIX PIN LIMIT NAM NORM /REV WIPE REV DME A B U1 U2 1 2 3 4 INH WIPE DME SNAP SHOT Chapter 2 Menus and Control Panel TAKE UNDO Memory recall section UNDO button a Transition type selection buttons You can assign these buttons in setup to any transition type (see “Overall Control Panel Settings (Config Menu)” in Chapter 16 (Volume 2)). Press any of the following buttons, turning it on, to select the transition type. Press one of these buttons, turning it on, to determine the type of the next transition for a background. To select the key transition type, hold down the [KEY1] or [KEY2] button, and press one of the following buttons, turning it on. When multi-program mode is selected in the Setup menu (see “Settings for Switcher Configuration (Config Menu)” in Chapter 16 (Volume 2)), two or more of the following buttons may light. MIX: In a background transition, the new video fades in as the current video fades out. During the transition, the overall signal level is maintained at 100%. In a key transition, the key fades in (for insertion) or out (for removal). NAM (non-additive mix): The current and new video signals are compared, and the signal with the higher luminance level is given priority in the output. The current video is maintained at 100% output for the first half of the transition as the new video increases progressively to 100%, then the current video is progressively reduced from 100% to zero in the second half while the new video is maintained at 100%. WIPE: The current video is replaced by the new video, using the wipe pattern selected in the Wipe menu. Names and Functions of Parts of the Control Panel 301 DME: This applies a wipe-like transition, using the DME effect selected in the DME Wipe menu. FM1&2ClIP, FM3&4ClIP, FM5&6ClIP, FM7&8ClIP: A recorded clip is played back together with the transition. At this point, you can also carry out a background transition (wipe or mix (dissolve)) simultaneously together with the clip. Chapter 2 Menus and Control Panel b Key transition selection buttons To insert or delete key 1 on the next transition, hold down the [KEY1] button, and select the type of transition using the transition type selection buttons. If the key is currently not inserted, the transition will insert it, and if the key is currently inserted, the transition will delete it. You can use the [KEY2] button in a similar way. While these buttons are held down, you can select a key source with the cross-point buttons on the key bus. Pressing one of these buttons twice in rapid succession changes the state of the corresponding key bus so that a cross-point can be selected. Key delegation button (double press) Corresponding key bus [KEY1] key 1 a) [KEY2] key 2 b) a) The key bus switching button [KEY3] in the crosspoint control block goes off. b) The key bus switching button [KEY4] in the crosspoint control block goes off. c Transition execution section Fader lever: Move this vertically to carry out a transition. When the split fader function is enabled, by pressing the projection on the left side of the grip you can release the lock and separate the two halves of the fader lever. With the split fader 302 Names and Functions of Parts of the Control Panel lever, in a background mix transition, you can control the background A and B buses independently. Transition indicator: This comprises multiple LEDs, which show the progress of the transition. Transition rate display: This displays the transition rate (the time from the beginning of the transition to its completion) set for an auto transition, in frames. You can set the transition rate using the numeric keypad control block or menu. TAKE button: Pressing this button carries out an auto transition of the set transition rate. The transition starts immediately, and the button lights amber. When the transition completes, the button goes off. d Wipe direction selection buttons REV (reverse): When this button is off, the wipe proceeds in the normal direction. When the button is lit, the wipe proceeds in the reverse direction. The normal direction refers to the black to white direction or in the direction of the arrow as shown in “Wipe Pattern List” (page 560) and “DME Wipe Pattern List” (page 566) in Appendix (Volume 1). NORM/REV (normal/reverse): The wipe direction alternates between normal and reverse every time a transition is executed. e Pattern limit buttons LIMIT SET: Move the fader lever to the position of a particular pattern size, and stop it there, then press this button to set the pattern limit range. This button is enabled when the [PTN LIMIT] button is off. PTN (pattern) LIMIT: When a wipe or DME wipe is selected, pressing this button, turning it on, enables the pattern limit function. f Key status display For each of keys 1 and 2, when the key is inserted, the corresponding ON indicator lights. The OVER indicators show the priority between keys 1 and 2, by lighting when the corresponding key is on top. For example, when key 1 appears over key 2 on the program monitor, the OVER indicator for key 1 lights. The following is the Flexi Pad control block. j XPT HOLD (cross-point hold) status display A bus for which cross-point hold is set appears as a green light. k Numeric display Depending on the operation mode, this shows a wipe or DME wipe pattern number, or a register number in up to four digits. In macro mode, this provides indications for macro editing. l INH (inhibit) button Pressing this button, turning it on, disables the buttons in the memory recall section and the [UNDO] button. Chapter 2 Menus and Control Panel g Mode selection buttons WIPE: When saving or recalling a wipe snapshot, use this in combination with the buttons of the memory recall section. DME: When saving or recalling a DME wipe snapshot, use this in combination with the buttons of the memory recall section. SNAPSHOT: When saving or recalling a snapshot, use this in combination with the buttons of the memory recall section. the memory recall section for recalling and executing a macro. h Memory recall section This consists of eight buttons with LCDs, whose display changes according to the operation mode. Use these in combination with the mode selection buttons to save or recall wipe snapshots, DME wipe snapshots, or snapshots. i UNDO button After recalling a register, press this button to return to the state before recalling the register. With a setup setting, this can be switched to a mode selection button for macro setting, and used in combination with the buttons in Names and Functions of Parts of the Control Panel 303 Independent Key Transition Control Block (Simple Type) The left side of this control block controls key 3, and the right side controls key 4. The control block for key 3 only is described as an example, but the operations on the key 4 control block are the same. In setup you can assign any key to either side of this control block. For details, see “Assigning Keys to the Independent Key Transition Control Block (Simple Type)” in Chapter 16 (Volume 2). 3 K-SS button 4 Key source name display/key snapshot buttons Chapter 2 Menus and Control Panel K-SS WIPE DME K-SS WIPE DME SHIFT MIX CUT SHIFT MIX CUT KEY3 ON KEY4 ON TAKE TAKE 2 Independent key transition execution section 1 Independent key transition type selection buttons a Independent key transition type selection buttons Press one of the following buttons, turning it on, to select the independent key transition type. MIX: Faded in or out. WIPE: Inserted or deleted with a wipe. DME: Switches the key with a DME wipe. CUT: Inserted or deleted instantaneously. 304 Names and Functions of Parts of the Control Panel SHIFT: This has the following functions. • When setting is made in the Setup menu to allow a different transition type for inserting or deleting a key, it is possible to display and set the transition type after the next transition while this button is held down. • While this button is held down, you can select a key source with the cross-point buttons for the key bus. • If you press this button twice in rapid succession, the key bus selection button [KEY3] in the cross-point control block lights, and a key 3 key bus cross-point can be selected. • If you press this button, while holding down [TRANS RATE] button in the numeric keypad control block, you can set the independent key transition rate on the control block. Chapter 2 Menus and Control Panel b Independent key transition execution section KEY3 ON button: This inserts or deletes key 3 instantaneously. When key 3 is present in the final program output from the switcher, this lights red, and otherwise lights amber. TAKE button: This carries out an auto transition on key 3. c K-SS (key snapshot) button This enables key snapshot mode. In key snapshot mode, it is possible to save and recall key snapshots. d Key source name display/key snapshot buttons These show the signal name of the key fill selected for key 3 and the transition rate on two buttons. In key snapshot mode, these correspond to registers 1 and 2 for key 3; press to save or recall a key snapshot. To save a key snapshot, with the [K-SS] button lit amber, hold down [SHIFT] button and press one of the key snapshot buttons. This saves a key snapshot in the button you pressed, which lights yellow. Names and Functions of Parts of the Control Panel 305 Downstream Key Control Block 1 Key delegation buttons 5 Key source name display/key snapshot buttons 4 Key snapshot setting buttons DSK1 DSK2 UNDO WIPE DME K-SS DSK3 DSK4 SHIFT MIX CUT K-SS STORE Chapter 2 Menus and Control Panel DSK1 ON DSK2 ON DSK3 ON DSK4 ON TAKE TAKE TAKE TAKE 2 Independent key transition type selection buttons 3 Independent key transition execution section a Key delegation buttons Press one of the [DSK1] to [DSK4] buttons to delegate this control block to the corresponding keyer. Using the Setup menu, it is possible to delegate this control block to key 1 to key 4 of the M/E bank. While these buttons are held down, you can select a key source with the cross-point buttons for the key bus. Pressing one of these buttons twice in rapid succession changes its state so that you can make cross-point selections on the corresponding key bus. 306 Names and Functions of Parts of the Control Panel b Independent key transition type selection buttons Press one of these buttons, turning it on, to select the downstream key transition type. MIX: Carry out a dissolve with the key selected with the key delegation buttons. WIPE: Carry out a wipe with the key selected with the key delegation buttons. DME: This switches the key selected with the key delegation buttons, using a DME wipe. CUT: Instantaneously insert or delete the key selected with the key delegation buttons. SHIFT: When setting is made in the Setup menu to allow a different transition type for inserting or deleting a key, it is possible to display and set the transition after the next transition while this button is held down. e Key source name display/key snapshot buttons These display the selected source name for each corresponding keyer. In snapshot mode, they correspond to registers 1 to 4 of the selected keyer, and pressing the button saves or recalls a key snapshot. Chapter 2 Menus and Control Panel c Independent key transition execution section DSK1 (downstream key 1) ON to DSK4 ON buttons: Press these to instantaneously cut the downstream keys 1, 2, 3, and 4 in or, when the downstream keys are already inserted, cut them out. When the key corresponding to the button appears in the final program output, the button lights red, and otherwise lights amber. TAKE buttons: These correspond to downstream keys 1, 2, 3, and 4 from left to right; press to execute an auto transition. The transition starts immediately, and the button lights amber. When the transition completes, the button goes off. Fader lever: Move this to carry out a manual downstream key transition. Transition indicator: This comprises multiple LEDs, which show the progress of the downstream key transition. d Key snapshot setting buttons K-SS (key snapshot): This enables key snapshot mode. K-SS STORE (key snapshot store): To save a key snapshot, hold down this button, and press the key source name display/key snapshot button for the register you want to save. UNDO (key snapshot recall undo): This undoes the last key snapshot recall. Names and Functions of Parts of the Control Panel 307 Downstream Key/Fade-to-Black Control Block 4 Key source name display/key snapshot buttons 3 K-SS button 5 FTB button FTB DSK1 DSK2 Chapter 2 Menus and Control Panel DSK1 ON AUTO TRANS 1 Key delegation buttons K-SS DSK2 ON AUTO TRANS 2 Independent key transition execution section a Key delegation buttons Press DSK1 or DSK2, to select the keyer. Each button can be assigned to any key in setup (see Chapter 16 “Overall Control Panel Settings (Config Menu)” (Volume 2)). While these buttons are held down, you can select a key source with the cross-point buttons on the key bus. Pressing one of these buttons twice in rapid succession changes its state so that you can make cross-point selections on the corresponding key bus in the PGM/PST bank. 308 Key delegation button (double press) Corresponding key bus [DSK1] key 1 a) Names and Functions of Parts of the Control Panel AUTO PST P/P M/E 1 M/E 2 M/E 3 M/E IK M/E 2K M/E 3K P/P K DME V DME K 7 Preview selection buttons 6 AUTO button Key delegation button (double press) Corresponding key bus [DSK2] key 2 b) a) The key bus selection button [KEY3] in the P/P cross-point control block goes off. b) The key bus selection button [KEY4] in the P/P cross-point control block goes off. b Independent key transition execution section DSK1 ON, DSK2 ON buttons: Press these to cut in the corresponding downstream key 1 or 2. When the key is already inserted, pressing the button cuts it out. Each button lights red when the corresponding key is inserted in the program output (final output from the switcher), and lights amber at other times. AUTO TRANS buttons: The left button applies to DSK1 and the right button to DSK2; press these buttons to carry out an auto transition. The transition immediately starts, and the button lights amber. When the transition completes, the button goes off. c K-SS (key snapshot) button Pressing this button, turning it on, enables the key snapshot mode. In this mode, you can save and recall key snapshots. e FTB (fade to black) button Press this button to fade to black the program output of the PGM/PST bank, at the set transition rate. You can set the fade to black transition rate in the menu. Chapter 2 Menus and Control Panel d Key source name display/key snapshot buttons Each column of two buttons relates to the corresponding downstream key 1 or 2. The upper button displays the name of the key fill signal selected for the key, and the lower button shows the transition rate. In key snapshot mode, these buttons correspond to registers 1 to 4 of the keyer selected with the key delegation buttons, and pressing a button recalls the key snapshot. To save a key snapshot, hold down the [STORE] button in the numeric keypad control block, and press the button for the desired register. g Preview selection buttons Press one of these buttons to select a signal on the edit preview bus. Each button can be assigned to any preview output in setup (see Chapter 16 “Overall Control Panel Settings (Config Menu)” (Volume 2)). PST (preset): When this button is pressed, the signal selected on the background B row of the PGM/PST bank is selected on the edit preview bus. M/E 1 to M/E 3, P/P (M/E1 to M/E 3, P/P preview): The preview signal (M/E-1 PVW, M/E-2 PVW, M/E-3 PVW, P/P PVW) of the M/E or PGM/PST bank corresponding to the pressed button is selected on the edit preview bus. M/E1 K to M/E3 K, P/P K (M/E1 to M/E 3, P/P key preview): The key preview signal (M/E-1 K-PVW, M/E-2 KPVW, M/E-3 K-PVW, P/P K-PVW) of the M/E or PGM/PST bank corresponding to the pressed button is selected on the edit preview bus. DME V (DME monitor video): When this button is pressed, the DME monitor output video signal (DME MON V) is selected on the edit preview bus. DME K (DME monitor key): When this button is pressed, the DME monitor output key signal (DME MON K) is selected on the edit preview bus. f AUTO button When this button is pressed, the M/E or PGM/PST bank preview signal selected on the edit preview bus is automatically switched to the program signal depending on the on-air status. Names and Functions of Parts of the Control Panel 309 Transition Control Block (Compact Type) The compact version of the transition control block shown in the following figure has fewer buttons than the standard type. Independent key transition operations can also be controlled with the compact transition control block. 7 PRIOR SET button 1 Next transition selection buttons 6 Key status display 2 Transition type selection buttons Chapter 2 Menus and Control Panel 8 Independent key transition execution section ON ON ON ON 1234123412341234 BKGD KEY1 KEY2 KEY PRIOR MIX ALL PST COLOR MIX KEY3 KEY1 TRANS KEY4 SUPER MIX NAM KEY2 TRANS PRIOR SET NORM WIPE NORM /REV DME REV AUTO TRANS KEY3 TRANS TRANS PVW KEY4 TRANS CUT 5 TRANS PVW button 3 Transition execution section 4 Wipe direction selection buttons a Next transition selection buttons Press these buttons, turning them on, to determine what the next transition will apply to. BKGD: Next transition changes the background. 310 Names and Functions of Parts of the Control Panel KEY1 to KEY4 (DSK1 to DSK4 in the PGM/PST bank): Press this button, turning it on, to make the next transition insert or remove the corresponding key (keys 1 to 4). If a key is currently inserted it will be removed, and if it is not currently inserted, it will be inserted. In the PGM/PST bank, this inserts or removes downstream keys 1 to 4. KEY PRIOR (priority): When this button is lit, the setting of the key priority after the next transition is enabled. The key priority after the next transition appears in the key status display. ALL: Pressing this button turns on a preselected set of the [BKGD], [KEY1] to [KEY4], and [KEY PRIOR] buttons. Make this setting in a Setup menu. Chapter 2 Menus and Control Panel b Transition type selection buttons You can assign these buttons in setup to any transition type (see “Overall Control Panel Settings (Config Menu)” in Chapter 16 (Volume 2)). Press one of these buttons, turning it on, to determine the type of the next transition. When multi-program mode is selected in the Setup menu (see “Settings for Switcher Configuration (Config Menu)” in Chapter 16 (Volume 2)), two or more of the following buttons may light. MIX: In a background transition, the new video fades in as the current video fades out. During the transition, the overall signal level is maintained at 100%. In a key transition, the key fades in (for insertion) or out (for removal). NAM (non-additive mix): The current and new video signals are compared, and the signal with the higher luminance level is given priority in the output. The current video is maintained at 100% output for the first half of the transition as the new video increases progressively to 100%, then the current video is progressively reduced from 100% to zero in the second half while the new video is maintained at 100%. SUPER MIX: The current video is maintained at 100% output for the first half of the transition as the new video is mixed while increasing progressively to 100%. The current video is then progressively reduced from 100% to zero in the second half while the new video is maintained at 100%. PST (preset) COLOR MIX: In the first transition, the current video is replaced by the color matte in a mix (dissolve), then in the second transition the color matte is replaced by the new video also in a mix (dissolve). WIPE: The current video is replaced by the new video, using the wipe pattern selected in the Wipe menu. DME: A wipe type of transition is carried out, using the DME effect selected in the DME Wipe menu. FM1&2ClIP, FM3&4ClIP, FM5&6ClIP, FM7&8ClIP: A recorded clip is played back together with the transition. At this point, you can also carry out a transition (wipe or mix (dissolve)) simultaneously together with the clip. c Transition execution section Transition indicator: This comprises multiple LEDs, which show the progress of the transition. Fader lever: Move this to carry out a manual transition. Transition rate display: This shows the “transition rate” (the time from the beginning of a transition to its completion) set for an auto transition, in frames. You can set the transition rate using the numeric keypad control block, Flexi Pad control block, or menu. AUTO TRANS (transition) button: Pressing this button carries out an auto transition of the set transition rate (duration). The transition starts immediately, and the button lights Names and Functions of Parts of the Control Panel 311 amber. When the transition completes, the button goes off. CUT button: Pressing this button carries out the transition as a cut (i.e. instantaneously). Chapter 2 Menus and Control Panel d Wipe direction selection buttons When you have selected a wipe or DME wipe as the transition type, press one of these buttons, turning it on, to select the wipe direction. NORM (normal): The wipe proceeds in the direction from black to white as shown on the pattern in the lists of patterns (see “Wipe Pattern List” (page 560) and “DME Wipe Pattern List” (page 566) in Appendix (Volume 1)), or in the direction of the arrow. When the VTR/disk recorder operation mode is enabled in setup, pressing this button plays the tape. REV (reverse): The wipe proceeds in the opposite direction to that when the [NORM] button is pressed. When the VTR/disk recorder operation mode is enabled in setup, pressing this button cues the tape automatically to the start point. NORM/REV (normal/reverse): The wipe direction alternates between normal and reverse every time a transition is executed. When the VTR/disk recorder operation mode is enabled in setup, pressing this button stops the tape. e TRANS PVW (transition preview) button When this button is lit, you can check in advance the video changes during the transition, on the preview output from the M/E or PGM/PST bank. During the preview, you can use the fader lever, [AUTO TRANS] button, and [CUT] button. One of the following functions of this button can be selected in a Setup menu. 312 Names and Functions of Parts of the Control Panel • When the transition completes, the system returns to the normal mode. • The transition preview mode is maintained while this button is pressed. • Switching is made between the transition preview mode and normal mode every time this button is pressed. f Key status display For each of keys 1 to 4, the corresponding ON indicator lights when the key is inserted. It also shows the priority (1 to 4) of each key. g PRIOR (priority) SET button While this button is held down, you can set the key priority. The setting mode when this button is pressed depends on whether or not the [KEY PRIOR] button is lit, as follows. • When the [KEY PRIOR] button is off, the current key priority is set. • When the [KEY PRIOR] button is lit, the key priority after the next transition is set. Press the [KEY PRIOR] button as required, to switch between these two modes. In either mode, hold down the [PRIOR SET] button, and press the button ([KEY1] to [KEY4]) corresponding to the key you want to bring to the front. h Independent key transition execution section KEY1 TRANS (transition) to KEY4 TRANS (DSK1 TRANS to DSK4 TRANS in the PGM/PST block) buttons: Press the corresponding one of these buttons to cut key 1 to key 4 in or out automatically at the set transition rate. When the key corresponding to the button appears in the final program output, the button lights red, and otherwise lights amber. During a transition, the button lights green. Basic Menu Operations Menu Organization Operations on the MVS-8000 switcher system make frequent use of menu operations. This section describes the menus and their interrelationships. Overview About the Top Menu List When the control panel is powered on, the top menu list appears as shown below. You can also display this by selecting VF1 ‘Top Menu List’ after pressing the [HOME] button at the upper left in the top menu selection button area of the menu control block. Chapter 2 Menus and Control Panel All detailed settings for basic operations such as transitions, keys, DME, or wipes, are made in menus. There are also menus for carrying out general system control, managing setting data, and initial setup. To display the top menu In the same way as for the top menu selection buttons in the menu control block, press each button to display the particular top menu in the menu display. The top menu list button is the same as the default layout of the top menu selection buttons. However, even if the assignment of the top menu selection buttons is changed, this does not affect the top menu list. To shut down the menus Press the [Shutdown] button at the lower right. This operation is the same as the shut down operation in the top menu window. For details, “Shutting down the menus” (page 333). Basic Menu Operations 313 Accessing Menus Chapter 2 Menus and Control Panel You can use any of the following methods to access a menu, and the initially displayed menu page depends on the method used. • Pressing a top menu selection button in the menu control block. This displays the page you last accessed in the particular menu. After initially powering on the system, however, the page of VF1 - HF1 of the particular menu is always selected. • Pressing a button other than a top menu button twice in rapid succession (see page 316). Depending on the button, this may display a fixed page or the page selected last time you accessed the menu. • Press the menu page selection button at the top left of the menu display. The top menu window appears; press the top menu selection button for the particular menu, or enter the menu number with the numeric keypad, and press the Enter button. For details of the VF buttons and HF buttons, see “Interpreting the Menu Screen” (page 322). 314 Basic Menu Operations Menus accessed from a top menu selection button Menus Function See HOME Home Recalling menus using the top menu list or shortcut menu Top menu list: page 313 Shortcut menu: page 335 M/E 1 M/E-1 Transition, keys, and wipe settings for the M/E-1 bank page 348 (transitions), page 378 (keys), page 438 (wipes) M/E 2 M/E-2 Transition, keys, and wipe settings for the M/E-2 bank M/E 3 M/E-3 Transition, keys, and wipe settings for the M/E-3 bank P/P PGM/PST Transition, downstream key, and wipe settings for the PGM/PST bank FRAME MEM Frame Memory Frame memory settings page 490 COLOR BKGD Color Bkgd Color background settings page 538 AUX/MON Aux/Mon AUX bus settings page 555 CCR CCR Color corrector settings Chapter 19 (Volume2) COPY SWAP Copy/Swap Copy and swap settings page 544 MISC Misc Safe title settings page 548 STATS Status Status display Chapter 11 (Volume2) DME DME DME special effect settings Chapter 11 (Volume 2) GLB EFF Global Effect Global effect settings Chapter 11 (Volume 2) DEV Device Settings for external device operation Chapter 12 (Volume 2) MCRO Macro Macro register settings Chapter 18 (Volume 2) KEY FRAME Key Frame Keyframe settings Chapter 13 (Volume 2) EFF Effect Keyframe effect register settings Chapter 13 (Volume 2) SNAP SHOT Snapshot Snapshot register settings Chapter 14 (Volume 2) SHOTBOX Shotbox Shotbox register settings Chapter 15 (Volume 2) FILE File File settings Chapter 17 (Volume 2) ENG SETUP Engineering Setup Setup functions Chapter 16 (Volume 2) DIAG Diagnosis Status information display Chapter 20 (Volume 2) Basic Menu Operations Chapter 2 Menus and Control Panel Buttons 315 Menus accessed by pressing a button twice For relevant buttons other than the top menu selection buttons, pressing twice in rapid succession directly recalls a related menu page. The following table lists these buttons of each control block, together with the menus they recall. (XX represents the HF menu recalled last in the VF menu.) Cross-point control block Chapter 2 Menus and Control Panel Buttons Menus See FM1 to 8 signals assigned buttons Frame Memory >Still >Recall page 500 Color Bkgd1 signal assigned button Color Bkgd >Color Bkgd1 page 538 Color Bkgd2 signal assigned button Color Bkgd >Color Bkgd2 CCR1 signal assigned button CCR >CCR1 >XX CCR2 signal assigned button CCR >CCR2 >XX Chapter 19 (Volume 2) Transition control block (standard type, compact type) Buttons Menus See a) • M/E-1, 2, 3 >Key1 >XX • PGM/PST >DSK1 >XX page 378 KEY2 (DSK2) a) • M/E-1, 2, 3 >Key2 >XX • PGM/PST >DSK2 >XX KEY3 (DSK3) a) • M/E-1, 2, 3 >Key3 >XX • PGM/PST >DSK3 >XX KEY4 (DSK4) a) • M/E-1, 2, 3 >Key4 >XX • PGM/PST >DSK4 >XX KEY1 (DSK1) 316 WIPE M/E-1, 2, 3, PGM/PST >Wipe >Main Pattern page 438 DME M/E-1, 2, 3, PGM/PST >DME Wipe >XX page 467 SUPER MIX M/E-1, 2, 3, PGM/PST >Misc >Transition page 349 PST COLOR MIX M/E-1, 2, 3, PGM/PST >Misc >Transition page 350 FM1&2 CLIP, FM3&4 CLIP, FM5&6 CLIP, FM7&8 CLIP M/E-1, 2, 3, PGM/PST >Misc >Clip Transition page 524 PRIOR SET M/E-1, 2, 3, PGM/PST >Misc >Key Priority page 345 KEY PRIOR M/E-1, 2, 3, PGM/PST >Misc >Next Key Priority page 346 WIPE (Independent key transition type selection button (standard type)) • M/E-1, 2, 3 >Key1, 2, 3, 4 >Transition >Wipe Adjust >Pattern Select • PGM/PST >DSK1, 2, 3, 4 >Transition >Wipe Adjust >Pattern Select page 455 Basic Menu Operations Transition control block (standard type, compact type) Buttons Menus See DME (Independent key transition type selection button (standard type)) • M/E-1, 2, 3 >Key1, 2, 3, 4 >Transition >DME Wipe Adjust >1ch Pattern Select • PGM/PST >DSK1, 2, 3, 4 >Transition >DME Wipe Adjust >1ch Pattern Select page 477 K-SS STORE Snapshot >Key Snapshot >XX Chapter 14 (Volume 2) a) Including the key delegation buttons of the transition control block (standard type). Independent key transition control block (simple type) a) Menus See WIPE • M/E-1, 2, 3 >Key1, 2, 3, 4 >Transition >Wipe Adjust >Pattern Select • PGM/PST >DSK1, 2, 3, 4 >Transition >Wipe Adjust >Pattern Select page 455 DME • M/E-1, 2, 3 >Key1, 2, 3, 4 >Transition >DME Wipe Adjust >1ch Pattern Select • PGM/PST >DSK1, 2, 3, 4 >Transition >DME Wipe Adjust >1ch Pattern Select page 477 SHIFT • M/E-1, 2, 3 >Key1, 2, 3, 4 >XX • PGM/PST >DSK1, 2, 3, 4 >XX page 378 Chapter 2 Menus and Control Panel Buttons a) The menu to be recalled depends on the setup of the key assignment. Flexi Pad control block (standard type) Buttons Menus See WIPE M/E-1, 2, 3, PGM/PST >Wipe >Main Pattern page 438 DME M/E-1, 2, 3, PGM/PST >DME Wipe >XX page 467 SNAPSHOT Snapshot >Snapshot >XX Chapter 14 (Volume 2) EFF Effect >Effect 1-99 >XX Chapter 13 (Volume 2) SHOTBOX Shotbox >Register >Store/Recall Chapter 15 (Volume 2) MCRO Macro >Register >XX Chapter 18 (Volume 2) Basic Menu Operations 317 Key control block a) Buttons Menus See KEY1 • M/E-1, 2, 3 >Key1 >XX • PGM/PST >DSK1 >XX page 378 KEY2 • M/E-1, 2, 3 > Key2 > XX • PGM/PST >DSK2 >XX KEY3 • M/E-1, 2, 3 >Key3 >XX • PGM/PST >DSK3 >XX KEY4 • M/E-1, 2, 3 >Key4 >XX • PGM/PST >DSK4 >XX LUM • M/E-1, 2, 3 >Key1, 2, 3, 4 >Type • PGM/PST >DSK1, 2, 3, 4 >Type page 379 • M/E-1, 2, 3 >Key1, 2, 3, 4 >Type >Chroma Adjust • PGM/PST >DSK1, 2, 3, 4 >Type >Chroma Adjust page 382 LIN CVK PTN Chapter 2 Menus and Control Panel CRK a) The menu recalled depends on which of the M/E delegation buttons and key delegation buttons are selected in the key control block. Numeric keypad control block Buttons Menus See EFF • Effect >Effect 1-99 >XX b) • Effect >Master Timeline >Store c) Chapter 13 (Volume 2) SNAPSHOT • Snapshot >Snapshot >XX b) • Snapshot >Master Snapshot >Store c) Chapter 14 (Volume 2) SHOTBOX Shotbox >Register >Store/Recall Chapter 15 (Volume 2) MCRO Macro >Register >XX Chapter 18 (Volume 2) TRANS RATE a) Misc >Transition page 355 STORE RCALL Key Frame >Region Select d) Chapter 13 Chapter 14 (Volume 2) a) The menu recalled depends on which of the M/E-1 to M/E-3 banks and PGM/PST bank the numeric control block is delegated to. b) When other than [MASTR] is selected with the region selection buttons. c) When [MASTR] is selected with the region selection buttons. d) When the [SNAPSHOT] button or [EFF] button is set to On, or lit green. 318 Basic Menu Operations Downstream key control block a) Menus See DSK1 • M/E-1, 2, 3 >Key1 >XX • PGM/PST >DSK1 >XX page 378 DSK2 • M/E-1, 2, 3 >Key2 >XX • PGM/PST >DSK2 >XX DSK3 • M/E-1, 2, 3 >Key3 >XX • PGM/PST >DSK3 >XX DSK4 • M/E-1, 2, 3 >Key4 >XX • PGM/PST >DSK4 >XX WIPE • M/E-1, 2, 3 >Key1, 2, 3, 4 >Transition >Wipe Adjust >Pattern Select • PGM/PST >DSK1, 2, 3, 4 >Transition >Wipe Adjust >Pattern Select page 455 DME • M/E-1, 2, 3 >Key1, 2, 3, 4 >Transition >Wipe Adjust >Pattern Select • PGM/PST >DSK1, 2, 3, 4 >Transition >DME Wipe Adjust >Pattern Select page 477 K-SS STORE b) Snapshot >Key Snapshot >XX Chapter 14 (Volume 2) Chapter 2 Menus and Control Panel Buttons a) The menu recalled depends on which of keyers 1 to 4 the downstream key control block is delegated to. b) Recalling is possible only when the [K-SS] button is On. Auxiliary bus control block Buttons Menus FMS1, FMS2 Frame Memory >Still >Freeze/Store page 496 FM1 to 8 signals assigned buttons Frame Memory >Still >Recall page 500 Color Bkgd1 signal assigned button Color Bkgd >Color Bkgd1 page 538 Color Bkgd2 signal assigned button Color Bkgd >Color Bkgd2 CCR1 signal assigned button CCR >CCR1 >XX CCR2 signal assigned button CCR >CCR2 >XX See Chapter 19 (Volume 2) Device control block (trackball or joystick) Buttons Menus See DME1 to DME8 a) DME >XX Chapter 11 (Volume 2) DEV1 to DEV12 assigned buttons • Device >DDR/VTR >Cueup & Play b) • Device >DDR/VTR >Timeline c) Chapter 12 (Volume 2) Basic Menu Operations 319 Device control block (trackball or joystick) Buttons Menus See FM1CLIP to FM8CLIP assigned buttons Frame Memory >Clip >Recall – K1 to K4 d) • M/E-1, 2, 3 >Key1, 2, 3, 4 >Processed Key • PGM/PST >DSK1, 2, 3, 4 >Processed Key page 419 a) When the three-dimensional transformation operation mode is enabled. b) When the [MENU] button is Off. c) When the [MENU] button is On. d) For the MVS-8000G in resizer control mode Device control block (search dial) Buttons Menus See Chapter 2 Menus and Control Panel DEV1 to DEV12 • Device >DDR/VTR >Cueup & Play • Device >DDR/VTR >Timeline b) FM1CLIP to FM8CLIP assigned buttons Frame Memory >Clip >Recall a) Chapter 12 (Volume 2) – a) When the [TIMELINE] button is Off. b) When the [TIMELINE] button is On. Downstream key/fade-to-black control block Buttons Menus DSK1, DSK2 • PGM/PST >DSK1, 2 >XX See a) Chapter 16 (Volume 2) a) When a key other than DSK1 or DSK2 is assigned, the menu for the corresponding key appears. Transition control block and Flexi Pad control block (simple type) Buttons Menus See KEY1 (DSK1) • M/E-1, 2, 3 >Key1 >XX • PGM/PST >DSK1 >XX page 378 KEY2 (DSK2) • M/E-1, 2, 3 >Key2 >XX • PGM/PST >DSK2 >XX WIPE • M/E-1, 2, 3 >Wipe >Main Pattern • PGM/PST >Wipe >Main Pattern page 438 DME • M/E-1, 2, 3 >DME Wipe >XX • PGM/PST >DME Wipe >XX page 467 SNAPSHOT Snapshot >Snapshot >XX Chapter 14 (Volume 2) MCRO a) Macro >Register >XX Chapter 18 (Volume 2) a) When the button is assigned to macro function in the Setup menu. 320 Basic Menu Operations Displaying a Menu To display, for example, the M/E-1 >Key1 >Type menu, use either of the following operations. • Press the top menu selection button [M/E 1], then press the VF1 ‘Key1’ button and the HF1 ‘Type’ button in that order. • Press the menu page number button in the upper left corner of the menu screen to display the top menu window, then enter 5 Status area the page number of the M/E-1 >Key1 >Type menu, which is 1111, and press the [Enter] button. For details of the menu page numbers, see the appendix “Menu Tree” (Volume 2). The M/E-1 >Key1 >Type menu appears in the menu display as follows. qs b (previous) button and B (next) button 6 Function button area 2 Menu page number button 7 Parameter group button qa Default recall button Chapter 2 Menus and Control Panel 1 Menu title button 0 Keyframe status 4 HF buttons 3 VF buttons 8 Knob parameter buttons 9 Previous page button M/E-1 >Key1 >Type menu Basic Menu Operations 321 Interpreting the Menu Screen Depending on the selected item, the menu screen contents including the HF button indications change. The menu screen consists of the following principal parts. When buttons on the screen are lit or represented in a depressed state, this indicates that the corresponding item or function is selected (set on). d HF buttons These indicate the items within the menu. Depending on the selected item, the menu indications change. Depending on the function, if any one is on, the status is shown by an orange bar, as in the following figure. a Menu title button This shows the title of the menu screen. You can set different colors for the main menu site and subsidiary menu site (see page 335). Chapter 2 Menus and Control Panel b Menu page number button This shows the menu screen page number. When you press this button, the top menu window (see page 332) appears. You can enter the page number for the desired menu, or press one of the top menu selection buttons in the window, to display that menu. While the system is accessing the hard disk, the indicator lights red. Indicator for frame memory external hard disk Indicator for internal hard disk Note When the indicator is lit, do not power off the switcher, or disconnect the IEEE1394 cable 1). e Status area This shows the status of the settings items controlled by the selected menu. An orange frame appears around the parameter area relating to the displayed menu. For each of the twelve areas, pressing the display jumps to the related menu. f Function button area This shows the functions which can be operated in the currently selected menu by means of buttons. Each function button corresponds to a function which can be set in the currently selected menu. Press it to enable the function, to display a parameter group and adjust the parameters with the knobs, or to execute the function. These buttons are in groups by function. In the screen example shown on the previous page, the [Key Bus] and [Matte] function buttons constitute the group. 1) When an external hard disk drive is connected c VF buttons These indicate the larger subdivisions of this menu. 322 Basic Menu Operations g Parameter group button This displays parameter group names for which the knobs can make adjustments, the current parameter setting page number, and the total number of the parameter setting pages. (Example: Color Vector 1/2) When there are more than five parameters within the same parameter group, press this button to display the sixth and subsequent parameters, which can then be controlled by the knobs. h Knob parameter buttons These show the parameters currently controlled by the knobs and their values. Pressing one of these buttons displays the numeric keypad window (see page 330), and you can then enter a new value for the corresponding parameter with the numeric keypad. j Keyframe status This shows the keyframe status of the reference region. Pressing this button switches the menu screen as follows. When a menu other than the Key Frame menu is currently shown: The menu screen switches to the Key Frame menu. When the Key Frame menu is currently shown: The menu screen switches to the menu that was on the screen immediately before the Key Frame menu. In some parts of menus such as the File menu, this functions as a “Region selection area,” for selecting the region to which operations apply. k Default recall button This only appears in those menus for which the default recall function is available. (See l b (previous) button and B (next) button The b button returns to the previous menu. Press the B button to continue to the next menu. Chapter 2 Menus and Control Panel i Previous page button This shows the page number of the previously displayed menu screen. Press it to go back to that page. When the indication [Parent] appears, this displays the parent directory. “Menus allowing a return to default settings” (page 325).) Press this button, turning it on, then press a VF button or knob parameter button to return the settings to their default values, in the following groupings. • Function grouping: the functions within an HF menu under the VF button • Knob parameters (parameters currently controlled by the knobs) Menu Operations Selecting an item 1 Press the VF button (1 to 7) for the desired group of items. The HF button (1 to 7) indications change to show the items within the selected group. 2 Press the HF button for the desired item. The indications in the status area and function button area change, and you can now make various changes to the selected item. Selecting a function Press the appropriate function button within the function button area. Shape and color of the button Pressing the button turns it on, and it lights, showing the state. Basic Menu Operations 323 Setting parameters Lit pale blue: The function is enabled, and the parameters can currently be adjusted with the knobs. Lit orange: The function is enabled. Lit purple: Execution button. Pressing the button immediately executes the function. (Example: [Auto Start] button in the Chroma Adjust menu) Chapter 2 Menus and Control Panel Pressing a button of this type displays a further menu, allowing more detailed settings. (Example: [Chroma Adjust] button in the Type menu) This marking on a function button indicates that there are parameters which can be adjusted with the knobs. Pressing this function button assigns parameters to the knobs. You can set the parameter values by either of the following methods. • Turn the knob (1 to 5) corresponding to the parameter, to adjust the value. • Press the knob parameter buttons (1 to 5) corresponding to the parameter. This displays the numeric keypad window allowing you to enter the desired value. In the description of specific setting procedures, the knob adjustment is described, as follows. Example: When wipe pattern key is selected Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values 1 Size Pattern size 0.00 to 100.00 2 Soft Edge softness 0.00 to 100.00 3 Density Key density 0.00 to 100.00 When the [MENU] button in the device control block is lit, you can use the trackball and Z-ring to control the parameters. • Move the trackball on the x-axis to control the parameter for knob 1 or on the y-axis to control the parameter for knob 2. Moving up or to the right increases the parameter value, and moving down or to the left decreases the parameter value. • Use the Z-ring to adjust the parameter for knob 3. Turning clockwise increases the parameter value, and turning counterclockwise decreases the parameter value. 324 Basic Menu Operations Going back to the previous menu To return to the last displayed menu, press the previous page button. Returning to default state in function groupings 1 Press the [Default Recall] button, turning it on. This enters the menu default recall mode. 2 Press the VF button you want to return to the default state. This returns the settings within the function grouping to the default state, and the [Default Recall] button goes off. 2 Press the knob parameter button you want to return to the default state. This returns the knob parameter value to the default state, and the [Default Recall] button goes off. Note The default state of the settings depends on the setting of the initial status mode, set in the Setup menu of system setup, as follows. User: The state when [Initial Status Define] is executed. Factory: Factory default settings Returning knob parameters to default state Press the [Default Recall] button, turning it on. This enters the menu default recall mode. Chapter 2 Menus and Control Panel 1 Notes • In the following table, “Menus allowing a return to default settings,” the default recall function does not apply to some knob parameters. For details, see the table, “Knob parameters subject to restriction on default recall” on page 328. • The default recall function does not return the horizontal (H) and vertical (V) position settings to their default state individually. Returning the horizontal (H) position to its default state also returns the vertical (V) position to its default state automatically, and vice versa. For details, see the table, “Knob parameters subject to restriction on default recall” on page 328. Menus allowing a return to default settings Top menu selection button name VF number (HF number) Menu number Menu name M/E1 VF1 1110-series Key1 a) VF2 1120-series Key2 a) VF3 1130-series Key3 a) VF4 1140-series Key4 a) VF5 1150-series Wipe a) VF6 1160-series DME Wipe a) VF7 1170-series Misc a) Basic Menu Operations 325 Top menu selection button name VF number (HF number) Menu number Menu name M/E2 VF1 1210-series Key1 a) VF2 1220-series Key2 a) VF3 1230-series Key3 a) VF4 1240-series Key4 a) VF5 1250-series Wipe a) VF6 1260-series DME Wipe a) VF7 1270-series Misc a) VF1 1310-series Key1 a) VF2 1320-series Key2 a) VF3 1330-series Key3 a) VF4 1340-series Key4 a) VF5 1350-series Wipe a) VF6 1360-series DME Wipe a) VF7 1370-series Misc a) VF1 1410-series DSK1 a) VF2 1420-series DSK2 a) VF3 1430-series DSK3 a) VF4 1440-series DSK4 a) VF5 1450-series Wipe a) VF6 1460-series DME Wipe a) VF7 1470-series Misc a) VF1 2210 Color Bkgd 1 a) VF2 2220 Color Bkgd 2 a) VF1 2410-series CCR1 a) VF2 2420-series CCR2 a) VF1 2510-series Still b) VF2 2520-series Clip b) VF3 2530-series Reposition/Lock b) VF4 2540-series File b) VF5 2550-series Folder b) VF1 2311 Aux Bus b) M/E3 Chapter 2 Menus and Control Panel P/P COLOR BKGD CCR FRAME MEM AUX/MON 326 Basic Menu Operations VF number (HF number) Menu number Menu name DME VF1 4110-series Edge b) VF2 4120-series Video Modify b) VF3 4131 Freeze b) VF4 4141 Non-Linear b) VF5 4150-series Light/Trail b) VF6 4160-series Input/Output b) VF7 4170-series Enhanced Video Modify b) VF1 4210-series Ch1–Ch4 b) VF2 4220-series Ch5–Ch8 b) (HF3) 6113 Path b) GLB EFF KEY FRAME Chapter 2 Menus and Control Panel Top menu selection button name a) Menu to return to the default settings for particular functions or for particular knob parameters (for the relevant knob parameters, see page 327) b) Menu to return to the default settings for particular knob parameters (for the relevant knob parameters, see page 327) Knob parameters to which default recall does not apply Menu number a) Menu name Button name Knob Parameter 1111 Type [Luminance] and [Linear] in group 4 Filter [Color Vector] in group 1 2 (Parameter group [2/2]) Y Filter, C Filter 5 Filter [Color Cancel] in group 5 Filter [Mix Color] in group 5 Pattern [Multi] 3 Invert Type 1111.1 1112.1 1113 Type >CRK Adjust [Key Active] Edge >Matte Main Mask [Pattern] 5 Pattern [Multi] 3 Invert Type Basic Menu Operations 327 Knob parameters to which default recall does not apply Menu number a) Menu name Button name Knob Parameter 1116 Transition [Wipe] in group 1 Transition Rate Pattern [Wipe] in group 1 5 5 Transition Rate Pattern [Key Blink] and [Edge Blink] in
Source Exif Data:File Type : PDF File Type Extension : pdf MIME Type : application/pdf PDF Version : 1.5 Linearized : Yes Encryption : Standard V2.3 (128-bit) User Access : Print, Extract, Print high-res Page Mode : UseOutlines XMP Toolkit : 3.1-702 Producer : Acrobat Distiller 7.0.5 (Windows) Creator Tool : FrameMaker 6.0 Modify Date : 2008:04:23 17:43:06+09:00 Create Date : 2008:04:23 11:06:18Z Metadata Date : 2008:04:23 17:43:06+09:00 Format : application/pdf Title : MVS-8000/8000SF System Creator : Sony Corporation Document ID : uuid:103daa68-84f7-4948-9f12-007e9dd89a6a Instance ID : uuid:18e7d2aa-113d-47d4-8dd9-9d01de77933e Page Count : 591 Author : Sony CorporationEXIF Metadata provided by EXIF.tools